Nokia Solutions and Networks T6DY1 SC4812T-MC 1X/1X-DO @ 1.9GHz User Manual 1

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	427751
Application ID	HbPt+McxQilO0dsLRUF8nQ==
Document Description	Manual B
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	255.28kB (3191032 bits)
Date Submitted	2004-06-03 00:00:00
Date Available	2004-06-01 00:00:00
Creation Date	2004-06-01 10:19:46
Producing Software	Acrobat PDFWriter 4.05 for Windows NT
Document Lastmod	2004-06-01 10:20:24
Document Title	Document1
Document Creator	Document1 - Microsoft Word
Document Author:	WLMV00

BTS Equipment Identification
NOTE
– continued
1. Figure 1-17 identifies which BBXs are used for Omni and
2-Sector configurations.
2. The fourth PA quadrant (quadrant D) is populated with
CLPAs only when the 4x4 ETM is used.
3. PHYSICAL APPEARANCE OF FRAMES: The physical
appearance of the frame, especially the location of the
MCM, Power Amplifier cage, and Power
Distribution/Combiner cage, and the particular I/O plate
used, may differ on frames converted from early version
SC4812T BTSs. Functionally however, and for the purpose
of optimization and acceptance testing, those frames are
identical
4. For an SC4812T BTS frame which has been converted to
multicarrier capability, a fourth three–sector carrier, using
BBX–10 through BBX–12, is supported in R16.4 and later
software releases. In a converted multicarrier frame, PA slot
4 in all PA quadrants should never be populated. (see
Figure 1-21).
C–CCP (Omni)
1-38
BBX–4
BBX–5
BBX–10
BBX–11
BBX–R
BBX–1
BBX–2
BBX–7
BBX–8
BBX–4
BBX–10
BBX–R
BBX–1
Figure 1-18: BBXs Used for Omni and Two–Sector Operation
BBX–7
C–CCP (2 Sector)
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
BTS Equipment Identification
– continued
Figure 1-19: TX Filter and 50Ω Termination Requirements for Omni, Two–sector, and Three–sector
Configurations – OEM Multicarrier and Converted Multicarrier Frames (Minimum Power Configuration
Shown)
Omni
CLPA 1A
MCM
Two–Sector
CLPA 1B
CLPA 1A
50W
TERMINATORS
MCM
S3
S3
S2
S2
S1
S1
CLPA 1C
CLPA 1C
CLPA 1B
50W
TERMINATOR
CLPA 1D
TX FILTERS
TX FILTER
Three–Sector
CLPA 1A
MCM
CLPA 1B
S3
S2
TX FILTERS
S1
CLPA 1C
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
1-39
1
BTS Equipment Identification
– continued
Figure 1-20: Omni, Two–sector, and Three–sector PA Configurations – OEM Multicarrier Frame
Minimum Power Configuration
3 x 3 ETM
CLPA 1A
MCM
Minimum Power Configuration
4 x 4 ETM
CLPA 1B
CLPA 1A
50 W
TERMINATIONS
and/or
TX Filters
(See NO TAG)
S3
S2
S1
CLPA 1C
MCM
CLPA 2A
CLPA 3A
CLPA 1B
CLPA 3B
S2
CLPA 4A
S1
CLPA 1A
S1
CLPA 4B
CLPA 1D
MCM
CLPA 2A
50 W
TERMINATIONS
and/or
TX Filters
(See NO TAG)
CLPA 1C
CLPA 3A
CLPA 4A
CLPA 2C
CLPA 3C
CLPA 3C
CLPA 4C
CLPA 4C
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
CLPA 1B
CLPA 2B
S3
CLPA 3B
S2
CLPA 1C
CLPA 2C
1-40
S2
Maximum Power Configuration
4 x 4 ETM
CLPA 2B
S3
CLPA 1B
S3
CLPA 1C
Maximum Power Configuration
3 x 3 ETM
CLPA 1A
MCM
S1
CLPA 4B
CLPA 1D
CLPA 2D
CLPA 3D
CLPA 4D
5/21/04
BTS Equipment Identification
– continued
Figure 1-21: Omni, Two–sector, and Three–sector PA Configurations – Converted Multicarrier Frame
Minimum Power Configuration
3 x 3 ETM
CLPA 1A
MCM
Minimum Power Configuration
4 x 4 ETM
CLPA 1B
CLPA 1A
50 W
TERMINATIONS
and/or
TX Filters
(See NO TAG)
S3
S2
S1
CLPA 1C
MCM
CLPA 2A
CLPA 3A
S2
S1
CLPA 1B
S1
CLPA 1A
CLPA 3B
CLPA 1D
MCM
CLPA 2A
50 W
TERMINATIONS
and/or
TX Filters
(See NO TAG)
CLPA 1C
CLPA 3A
CLPA 3C
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
CLPA 2B
S3
CLPA 3B
S1
CLPA 2C
CLPA 3C
CLPA 1B
S2
CLPA 1C
CLPA 2C
5/21/04
S2
Maximum Power Configuration
4 x 4 ETM
CLPA 2B
S3
CLPA 1B
S3
CLPA 1C
Maximum Power Configuration
3 x 3 ETM
CLPA 1A
MCM
CLPA 1D
CLPA 2D
CLPA 3D
1-41
1
BTS Equipment Identification
– continued
Figure 1-22: Six–sector PA Configurations – OEM Multicarrier Frames Only
Minimum Power Configuration
4 x 4 ETM
Minimum Power Configuration
3 x 3 ETM
CLPA 1A
CLPA 3A
MCM
S3
CLPA 1B
CLPA 1A
CLPA 3B
CLPA 3A
TX FILTERS
S2
CLPA 3C
CLPA 1C
MCM
CLPA 3C
S6
TX FILTERS
CLPA 3A
CLPA 1B
CLPA 1C
CLPA 1A
S1
CLPA 3A
TX FILTERS
CLPA 4B
CLPA 1C
MCM
S5
CLPA 4C
1-42
CLPA 2B
S3
S1
MCM
CLPA 3C
TX FILTERS
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
CLPA 4B
CLPA 1D
S6
CLPA 3D
S5
CLPA 4C
S4
CLPA 3B
CLPA 2D
CLPA 2C
S6
CLPA 1B
S2
CLPA 4A
CLPA 2C
CLPA 3C
MCM
CLPA 2A
CLPA 3B
S2
CLPA 4A
CLPA 3D
Maximum Power Configuration
4 x 4 ETM
CLPA 2B
S3
S6
CLPA 1D
S4
Maximum Power Configuration
3 x 3 ETM
CLPA 2A
MCM
S5
S4
MCM
CLPA 3B
S1
S5
CLPA 1A
S3
CLPA 1B
S2
S1
CLPA 1C
MCM
S4
CLPA 4D
5/21/04
Chapter 2: Preliminary Operations
Table of Contents
5/21/04
Guide Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is In This Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–2
Book Catalogs and Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Book Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–3
1–5
Physical Page Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Text Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–6
1–6
1–7
1–9
Frame and Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frames With Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Charts and Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Types In This Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item/Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step/Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–13
1–14
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–16
Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–17
1–17
1–17
1–18
1–19
Map Title Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Overview
Introduction
This section first verifies proper frame equipage. This includes verifying
module placement, jumper, and dual in–line package (DIP) switch
settings against the site-specific documentation supplied for each BTS
application. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures are
presented.
Cell Site Types
Sites are configured as Omni with a maximum of 4 carriers, 3–sectored
with a maximum of 4 carriers, and 6–sectored with a maximum of 2
carriers. Each type has unique characteristics and must be optimized
accordingly. For more information on the differences in site types, please
refer to the 1X SC 4812T-MC BTS Hardware Installation manual.
CDF or NEC
The Configuration Data File (CDF) (circuit BTS) or Network Element
Configuration (NEC) files (packet BTS) contains site type and equipage
data information and passes it directly to the LMF during optimization.
The number of modem frames, C–CCP shelves, BBX boards, MCC
boards (per cage), and power amplifier assignments are some of the
equipage data included in the CDF or NEC files.
CAUTION
Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or
NECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml files are used for
the BTS. These should be the CDF or NEC files that are
provided for the BTS by the OMC–R. Failure to use the
correct CDF or NEC files can cause system errors. Failure
to use the correct CDF or NEC files to log into a live
(traffic carrying) site can shut down the site.
Site Equipage Verification
Review the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage data
to the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspect
and verify the equipment provided for the BTS or Modem frame and
ancillary equipment frame.
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage
by ESD. After removal, the card/module should be placed
on a conductive surface or back into the anti–static
shipping bag.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
2-1
Overview
– continued
Initial Installation of
Boards/Modules
Follow the procedure in Table 2-1 to verify the initial installation of
boards/modules.
Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules
Step
Action
Refer to the site documentation and install all boards and modules into the appropriate shelves as
required. Verify they are NOT SEATED at this time.
NOTE
The Switch Card has a configuration switch that must match the site configuration (see Figure 2-1).
As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial Number
Checklist” in the site logbook.
NOTE
Configuration Switch in Figure 2-1 shown for 3 Sector
Multicarrier BTS. (Switches 1 and 4 control configuration)
For Multicarrier, switch 1 should be Down; switch 4
depends on whether the frame supports 3 or 6 sector.
2-2
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Overview
– continued
Figure 2-1: Switch Card
SHIELDS
J1
J2
J3
Switch Card
J4
J5
Configuration
Switch
1 2 3 4
BTS
MF
ON
3 Sector
6 Sector
ti-CDMA-WP-00039-v01-ildoc-ftw
Setting Frame C–CCP Shelf
Configuration Switch
The backplane switch settings behind the fan module nearest the breaker
panel should be set as shown in Figure 2-2.
The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to the
BTS equipment.
S Starter Frame – all dip switches set to ON (UP)
S Expansion Frame – all dip switches ON (UP) except
MODEM_FRAME_ID_0 OFF (DOWN)
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
2-3
Overview
– continued
Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings
ALL SWITCHES ON (UP)
EXPANSION
FRAME
SETTING
SPEED
CONTROLLED
FAN
MODULE
REAR
REAR
FRONT
MODEM_FRAME_ID_0
PWR/ALM
AMR / MACH
GLI–1
MCC–1
MCC–2
MCC–3
MCC–4
MCC–5
MCC–6
BBX–1
BBX–2
BBX–3
BBX–4
BBX–5
BBX–6
BBX–R
MPC
AMR / MACH
GLI–2
MCC–7
MCC–8
MCC–9
MCC–10
MCC–11
MCC–12
BBX–7
BBX–8
BBX–9
BBX–10
BBX–11
BBX–12
Switch
39 mm Filter Panel
CSM
CCD
CSM
HSO
CCD
MCIO
Power Supply
Power Supply
Power Supply
19 mm Filter Panel
FAN MODULE
REMOVED
SPEED
CONTROLLED
FAN
MODULE
PWR/ALM
FRONT
MODEM_FRAME_ID_1
BOTTOM / TOP
MODEM_FRAME_ID_0
MODEM_FRAME_ID_1
RIGHT / LEFT
OFF
STARTER
FRAME
SETTING
ON
OFF
RIGHT / LEFT
ON
MPC
ALL SWITCHES ON (UP) EXCEPT MODEM_FRAME_ID_0 OFF (DOWN)
BOTTOM / TOP
SC 4812T C–CCP SHELF
ti-CDMA-WP-00211-v01-ildoc-ftw REF
2-4
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Pre–Power Up Tests
Objective
This procedure checks for any electrical short circuits and verifies the
operation and tolerances of the cellsite and BTS power supply units prior
to applying power for the first time.
Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required to complete the pre–power–up
tests:
S Digital Multimeter (DMM)
CAUTION
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling the any circuit card/module to prevent
damage by ESD.
Cabling Inspection
Using the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola Systems
Engineering, verify that the following cable systems are properly
connected:
S Receive RF cabling – up to 12 RX cables
S Transmit RF cabling – up to six TX cables
S GPS
DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)
Before applying any power to the BTS frame, follow the procedure in
Table 2-2 while referring to Figure 2-3 to verify there are no shorts in the
BTS frame DC distribution system.
Table 2-2: DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame)
Step
Action
Physically verify that all DC power sources supplying power to the frame are OFF or disabled.
On each frame:
S Unseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C–CCP shelf and LPA shelves, but
leave them in their associated slots.
S Set C–CCP shelf breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (labeled
C–CCP 1, 2, 3) located on the power distribution panel.
S Set LPA breakers to the OFF position by pulling out the LPA breakers (8 breakers, labeled 1A–1B
through 4C–4D) located on the power distribution panel.
Continue with Step 3 for –48 V or Step 4 for +27 V.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
2-1
Pre–Power Up Tests
– continued
Table 2-2: DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame)
Step
Action
For –48 V configurations ONLY:
Verify the resistance on the –48 V bus:
– Remove the Power Supply Modules (PSMs).
– Verify that the resistance from the power (–) feed terminal with respect to the ground terminal on
the top of the frame measures > 500 Ω (see Figure 2-3).
Verify the resistance on the +27 V bus:
– Remove PSM#1 or the filler panel.
! CAUTION
Do not put probes inside Elcon connectors.
– Place the Digital Multimeter probes on the mounting screws on the Elcon connector (bottom two
Elcon connectors).
– If reading is < 500 Ω, a short may exist somewhere in the DC distribution path supplied by the
breaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding. A reading > 3 MΩ could indicate an open (or
missing) bleeder resistor (installed across the filter capacitors behind the breaker panel).
For +27 V configurations ONLY:
Verify that the resistance from the power (+ or –) feed terminals with respect to the ground terminal on
the top of the frame measures > 500 Ω (see Figure 2-3).
– If reading is < 500 Ω, a short may exist somewhere in the DC distribution path supplied by the
breaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding. A reading > 3 MΩ could indicate an open (or
missing) bleeder resistor (installed across the filter capacitors behind the breaker panel).
Set the C–CCP breakers to the ON position by pushing them IN one at a time. Repeat Step 3 (for
–48 V) or Step 4 (for +27 V) after turning on each breaker.
NOTE
If the multimeter stays at 0 Ω after inserting any board/module, a short probably exists in that
board/module. Replace the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate the
problem before proceeding.
Insert and lock the DC/DC converter modules for the C–CCP shelf and into their associated slots one
at a time. Repeat Step 3 (for –48 V) or Step 4 (for +27 V) after inserting each module.
– A typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge, finally
indicating approximately 500 Ω.
! CAUTION
Verify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:
STPN4009B
PWR C–CCP 4812 +27V
2-2
Insert and lock all remaining circuit boards and modules into their associated slots in the C–CCP shelf.
Repeat Step 3 (for –48 V) or Step 4 (for +27 V) after inserting and locking each board or module.
– A typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge,
stopping at approximately 500 Ω..
. . . continued on next page
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Pre–Power Up Tests
– continued
Table 2-2: DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame)
Step
Action
Set the LPA breakers ON by pushing them in. Repeat Step 3 (for –48 V) or Step 4 (for +27 V) after
turning on each breaker.
– A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,
stopping at approximately 500 Ω..
NOTE
Engage circuit breakers only for LPAs that are equipped.
In the –48V BTS, insert PSMs one at a time in their associated slots, verifying that LED is green.
Repeat Step 3 after inserting each module.
10
Seat all LPA and associated LPA fan modules into their associated slots in the shelves one at a time.
Repeat Step 3 (for –48 V) or Step 4 (for +27 V) after seating each LPA and associated LPA fan
module.
S A typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,
stopping at approximately 500 Ω..
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
2-3
Pre–Power Up Tests
– continued
Figure 2-3: +27V Breaker Panel (–48V is similar)
TOP OF FRAME
DC FILTER 1
DC FILTER 2
GND
2-4
50
3A
50
4A
1B
50
2B
3B
50
4B
1C
50
2C
3C
50
4C
1D
50
2D
3D
50
4D
50
2A
50
1A
50
INPUT
CONNECTOR/
DC FILTER
FILLER
PLATE
ti-CDMA-WP-00224-v01-ildoc-ftw
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Initial Power Up Tests & Procedures
Power-up Procedures
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to
the BTS equipment. This test must be performed with a
second person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all
rings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to beginning this
test.
DC Input Power
In the tests to follow, power will first be verified at the input to each
BTS frame. After power is verified, cards and modules within the frame
itself will be powered up and verified one at a time.
Before applying any power, verify the correct power feed and return
cables are connected between the power supply breakers and the power
connectors at the top of each BTS frame. Verify correct cable position
referring to Figure 2-3.
NOTE
For positive power applications (+27 V):
S The positive power cable is red.
S The negative power cable is black.
For negative power applications (–48 V):
S The negative power cable is red or blue.
S The positive power cable (ground) is black.
Motorola recommends that the DC input power cable used to connect the
frame to the main DC power source conforms to the guidelines outlined
in Table 2-3.
Table 2-3: DC Input Power Cable Guidelines
Maximum Cable Length
Wire Size
30.38 m (100 ft)
107 mm2 (AWG #4/0)
54.864 m (180 ft)
185 mm2 (350 kcmil)
Greater that 54.864 m (180 ft)
Not recommended
NOTE
Make sure the connector adapters are securely attached to
each of the BTS power feeds and returns. Also, make sure
the cables have been properly installed into each
connector.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
2-5
Initial Power Up Tests & Procedures
– continued
Common Power Supply
Verification
The procedure in Table 2-4 must be performed on any BTS frame
connected to a common power supply at the site after the common power
supply has been installed and verified per the power supply OEM
suggested procedures.
Perform the following steps to verify the power input is within
specification before powering up the individual cards/modules with the
frames themselves.
CAUTION
While handling any circuit card/module, always wear a
conductive, high impedance wrist strap to prevent
damage by ESD. Extreme care should be taken during the
removal and installation of any card/module. After
removal, the card/module should be placed on a conductive
surface or back into the anti–static bag in which it was
shipped.
Table 2-4: Common Power Supply Verification
Step
Action
Physically verify that all DC power sources supplying the frame are OFF or disabled.
On each frame:
S Unseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C–CCP shelf and LPA shelves, but
leave them in their associated slots.
S Set breakers to the OFF position by pulling out C–CCP and LPA breakers (see Figure 2-3 for
breaker panel layout if required).
– C–CCP shelf breakers are labeled CCCP–1, 2, 3.
– LPA breakers are labeled 1A–1B through 4C–4D.
On –48 V BTS: Remove the –48 V to +27 V Power Supply Modules.
Inspect input cables, verify correct input power polarity via decal on top of frame.
Apply power to BTS frames, one at a time, by setting the appropriate breaker in the power supply that
supplies the frame to the ON position.
After power is applied to each frame, use a digital voltmeter to verify power supply output voltages at
the top of each BTS frame are within specifications:
On –48 V BTS: –48 Vdc nominal
On +27 V BTS: +27 Vdc nominal
On –48 V BTS: Plug in PSMs one at a time and verify ’Green’ LEDs on PSMs light.
Initial Power-up (BTS)
The procedure must be performed on each frame after input power from
the common power supply has been verified. Follow the steps in
Table 2-5 to apply initial power to the cards/modules within the frame
itself, verifying that each is operating within specification.
2-6
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Initial Power Up Tests & Procedures
– continued
Table 2-5: Initial Power–up (BTS)
Step
Action
At the BTS, set the C–CCP (POWER) power distribution breakers (see Figure 2-3) to the ON position
by pushing in the breakers.
Insert the C–CCP fan modules. Observe that the fan modules come on line.
! CAUTION
Verify the correct C–CCP power supplies by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:
STPN 4009B
PWR C–CCP 4812 +27V
Insert and lock the power supplies into their associated slots one at a time.
• If no boards have been inserted, all three PWR/ALM LEDs would indicate RED to notify the user
that there is no load on the power supplies.
– If the LED is RED, do not be alarmed. After Step 4 is performed, the LEDs should turn GREEN;
if not, then a faulty power supply is indicated and should be replaced before proceeding.
Seat and lock all remaining circuit cards and modules in the C–CCP shelf into their associated slots.
Seat the first equipped PA module pair into the assigned slot in the upper PA shelf including PA fan.
Repeat Step 5 for all remaining PAs.
NOTE
Engage circuit breakers only for PAs that are equipped.
Set the PA breakers to the ON position (per configuration) by pushing them IN. See NO TAG for
breaker panel layout.
Engage (push) PA circuit breakers.
S Confirm LEDs on PAs light.
After all cards/modules have been seated and verified, use a digital voltmeter to verify power supply
output voltages at the top of the frame remain within specifications:
On –48 V BTS: –48 Vdc nominal
On +27 V BTS: +27 Vdc nominal
5/21/04
Repeat Steps 1 through 8 for additional co–located frames (if equipped).
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
2-7
Initial Power Up Tests & Procedures
– continued
Notes
2-8
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Chapter 3: Optimization and Calibration
Table of Contents
5/21/04
Guide Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is In This Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–2
Book Catalogs and Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Book Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–3
1–5
Physical Page Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Text Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–6
1–6
1–7
1–9
Frame and Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frames With Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Charts and Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Types In This Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item/Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step/Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–13
1–14
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–16
Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–17
1–17
1–17
1–18
1–19
Map Title Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Introduction to Optimization & Calibration
Overview
This section describes procedures for isolating the BTS from the span
lines, preparing and using the LMF, downloading system operating
software, CSM reference verification/optimization, set up and calibration
of the supported test equipment, transmit/receive path verification, and
verifying the customer defined alarms and relay contacts are functioning
properly.
NOTE
Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the
“CAVEATS” section in the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf
folder for any applicable information.
Optimization Process
Summary
After a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations, such
as power up, have been completed, the LMF is used to optimize the
BTS. The basic optimization process consists of the following:
1. Download MGLI–1 with code and data and then enable MGLI–1.
NOTE
GLIs may be GLI2s or GLI3s.
2. Use the status function and verify that all of the installed devices of
the following types respond with status information: CSM, BBX,
GLI, and MCC. If a device is installed and powered up but is not
responding and is colored gray in the BTS display, the device is not
listed in the CDF or NEC files. The CDF or NEC files must be
corrected before the device can be accessed by the LMF.
3. Download code and data to all devices of the following types:
– CSM
– BBX (multicarrier uses BBX–1X)
– GLI (other than MGLI–1)
– MCC (may be MCC–8E, MCC24, or MCC–1X)
4. Verify the operation of the GPS and HSO signals.
5. Enable the following devices (in the order listed):
– Secondary CSM
– Primary CSM
– All MCCs
6. Connect the required test equipment for a full optimization.
7. Select the test equipment.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-1
Introduction to Optimization & Calibration
– continued
8. Calibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously been
calibrated using the CDMA LMF that will be used for the
optimization/calibration. The cable calibration values can also be
entered manually.
NOTE
All PAs must be INS during any TX testing.
9. If the TX calibration fails, repeat the optimization for any failed
paths.
10. If the TX calibration fails again, correct the problem that caused the
failure and repeat the optimization for the failed path.
11. If the TX calibration and audit portion of the optimization passes for
a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, correct the problem that
caused the failure and run the individual tests as required until all
TX and RX tests have passed for all paths.
Cell Site Types
Sites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX). Each type
has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.
NOTE
For more information on the differences in site types, refer
to the applicable BTS Hardware Installation manual.
Configuration Files
The Configuration Data File (CDF) and the Network Element
Configuration (NEC) files contain information that defines the BTS and
data used to download files to the devices. The BTS CDF (bts–#.cdf)
and CBSC CDF (cbsc–#.cdf) files are used by circuit BTSs. The NEC
Base (NECB – NECB*bts#.xml) and NEC Journaling (NECJ –
NECJ*bts#.xml) files are used by packet BTSs. CDF or NEC files
must be placed in the applicable BTS folder before the LMF can be used
to log into that BTS. CDF and NEC files are normally obtained from the
CBSC using a floppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be
used if the LMF computer has that capability.
The CDF and NEC files include the following information:
S Download instructions and protocol
S Site specific equipage information
S C–CCP shelf allocation plan
– BBX equipage (based on cell–site type) including redundancy
– CSM equipage including redundancy
– MCC (MCC24E, MCC8E, or MCC–1X) channel element allocation
plan. This plan indicates how the C–CCP shelf is configured, and
how the paging, synchronization, traffic, and access channel
elements (and associated gain values) are assigned among the (up to
12) MCCs in the shelf.
3-2
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Introduction to Optimization & Calibration
– continued
S CSM equipage including redundancy
S Effective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennas
respectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of a
transmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, and
government regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, the
antenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) and
antenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the required
power at the top of the BTS frame. The corresponding BBX output
level required to achieve that power level on any channel/sector can
also be determined.
NOTE
Refer to the LMF Help function on–line documentation for
additional information on the layout of the LMF directory
structure (including CDF or NEC file locations and
formats).
BTS System Software
Download
BTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTS
processor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operating
code is loaded from the LMF computer terminal.
CAUTION
Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correct
bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or NECB*bts#.xml and
NECJ*bts#.xml files for the BTS must be obtained from
the OMC–R and put in a bts–# folder in the LMF. Failure
to use the correct CDF or NEC files can cause improper or
unpredictable BTS operation. Failure to use the correct
CDF or NEC files to log into a live (traffic carrying) site
can shut down the site.
The CDF or NEC files are normally obtained from the OMC–R on a
DOS formatted diskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if the
LMF computer has ftp capability. Refer to the LMF Help function
on–line documentation for the procedure.
Site Equipage Verification
If it has not already done, use an editor to view the CDF or NEC files,
and review the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipage
data in the CDF or NEC files matches the actual site hardware using a
CDF or NEC file conversion table.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-3
Introduction to Optimization & Calibration
– continued
CAUTION
Use extreme care not to make any changes to the CDF or
NEC file content while viewing the file. Changes to the
CDF or NEC file can cause the site to operate unreliably or
render it incapable of operation.
CAUTION
Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while
handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by
ESD. Extreme care should be taken during the removal and
installation of any card/module. After removal, the
card/module should be placed on a conductive surface or
back into the anti–static container in which it was shipped.
3-4
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Preparing the LMF
Overview
Before optimization can be performed, the LMF application software
must be installed and configured on a computer platform meeting
Motorola–specified requirements (see Recommended Test Equipment
and Software in Chapter 1).
Software and files for installation and updating of the LMF are provided
on CD ROM disks. The following installation items must be available:
S LMF Program on CD ROM (see page NO TAG for current supported
version of LMF)
S CDF or NEC files for each supported BTS (on diskette or available
from the CBSC)
S CBSC CDF file for each supported circuit BTS (on diskette or
available from the CBSC)
The following section provides information and instructions for
installing and updating the LMF software and files.
Overview of Packet BTS files
R16.0 and earlier software releases used the CDF configuration file for
each BTS and CBSC supported by the LMF. In a packet BTS operating
with Software Release 16.1 or later, the CDF is replaced by the NEC
files. There are two NEC files. These are:
S NEC Base (NECB) file
S NEC Journal (NECJ) file
The NECB contains the baseline configuration information and is
analogous to the CDF, while the NECJ contains all the changes made to
the configuration since the last time the NECB was re–generated. Once
the NECJ reaches 80% of its maximum size, the NECB is re–generated
by the OMC–R, and all updates from the NECJ file are rolled into it.
The NEC files play much more extensive role than the previously–used
CDF files.
Additional important, LMF–related facts about the the NEC files are:
S Both files (NECB and NECJ) are in eXtensible Markup Language
(XML) format.
S NECB contains all the up-to-date static configuration information and
NECJ contains all the recent changes (including operations) which are
not updated in the NECB.
S Both files can be viewed in any XML viewer (most easily available is
Internet Explorer V5.0 and higher). They can be also viewed by any
other word or text processor, but the XML tags will also be seen when
using these types of applications.
S These files will be created by OMC–R from MIB and reflect the BTS
provisioning.
S These files will be regenerated for each software release upgrade on
the system for each BTS.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-5
Preparing the LMF
– continued
S Unlike the CDF file, the NEC files will reside on both OMC–R and
GLI3s operating in packet mode. The NEC files will be synchronized
periodically between the OMC–R and GLI3s in each BTS.
S Both the NECB and NECJ files contain a “SoftwareVersion” field in
their header section indicating the system release version of these
files.
S Instead of the bts–#.cdf file, the packet LMF uses
NECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml files, which are copies of the
NEC files.
S A GLI3 operating in packet mode will need the NECB and NECJ files
for site initialization.
S The scope of the NEC files has grown much broader than that of the
CDF and has much more BTS–centric information. This is principally
because the role of the GLI card has expanded significantly with the
introduction of the GLI3 card and packet backhaul.
CAUTION
Never use a generic NEC file. The specific, site–unique
information for the BTS must be included in the NEC file for the
site to operate properly.
LMF File Structure Overview
The LMF uses a :\lmf home directory> folder that contains all of the
essential data for installing and maintaining the BTS. The following list
outlines the folder structure for LMF. Except for the bts–# folders, these
folders are created as part of the the LMF installation. Refer to the
CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide for a complete description of the folder
structure.
Figure 3-1: LMF Folder Structure
(C:)
x:\ folder
cdma folder
bts–# folders (A separate folder is required
for each BTS where bts–# is the unique BTS
number; for example, bts–163.)
loads folder
version folder (A separate folder is
required for each different version; for
example, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5.)
code folder
data folder
3-6
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Preparing the LMF
– continued
NOTE
The “loads” folder and all the folders below it are not
available from the LMF for Software Release R2.16.4.1.
These folders may be present as as a legacy from previous
software versions or downloaded from the CBSC/OMC–R.
Any existing code in the directory is not affected by an SR
16.1 installation.
The user will need to manually add the directories to a
newly installed LMF when they add the code loads to be
downloaded.
LMF Home Directory
The CDMA LMF installation program creates the default home
directory, c:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories
(folders) in it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMA
LMF home directory will be referred to with the generic convention of:
:\
Where:
 = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF home
directory is located.
 = the directory path or name where the CDMA
LMF is installed.
Filename Conventions and
Directory Location
NEC Files
The naming conventions for the NECB and NECJ files are:
NECB*bts#.xml
NECJ*bts#.xmlNECJ*bts#.xml
Where:
* = any characters can be substituted
# = the actual integer BTS number; for example,
NECB–2.16.4.1.40–bts480.xml
The NECB and its corresponding NECJ must have the exact same name,
except for the “B” and “J” after the initial NEC characters.
The NECB and the NECJ must reside in the
\cdma\bts–# directory for the BTS to which they apply.
Load Information File (LIF)
The LIF contains all the devices binaries available for the specified
System Software Release. It is the functional equivalent of the Object
List File (OLF) file that was used pre–Packet.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-7
Preparing the LMF
– continued
The naming convention for the LIF is:
NE_LIF.xml
The LIF must reside in the \cdma\loads\ directory, where  = the home
directory in which the LMF is installed, usually C:\wlmf  = the System Software Release Number (e.g.
2.16.1.0.10).
Cal File
The Cal File still resides in the \cdma\bts–# directory
and is named bts–#.cal, where # is the actual integer number of the
BTS.
LMF Operating System
Installation
This section provides information and instructions for installing and
updating the LMF software and files.
NOTE
First Time Installation Sequence:
1. Install Java Runtime Environment (JRE)
2. Install U/WIN K–shell emulator
3. Install LMF application programs
4. Install/create BTS folders
NOTE
Any time U/WIN is installed, the LMF application software
must also be installed. This is because the LMF application
installation modifies some of the files that are installed during
the U/Win installation. These modifications are necessary for
proper LMF operation. Installing U/Win over–writes these
modifications.
There are multiple binary image packages for installation on the
CD–ROM. When prompted, choose the load that corresponds to
the software release currently installed in the network. Perform
the Device Images installation after the LMF installation.
If applicable, a separate CD ROM of BTS Binaries may be
available for binary updates.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-1 to install the LMF application
program using the LMF CD ROM.
Table 3-1: LMF Application Program Installation
n Step
1a
3-8
Action
Insert the LMF Program CD ROM into the LMF CD
ROM drive.
– If the Setup screen appears, follow the instructions
displayed on the screen.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Preparing the LMF
– continued
Table 3-1: LMF Application Program Installation
n Step
1b
Action
– If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to Step
2.
Click on the Start button.
Select Run.
Enter d:\autorun In the Open box and click OK.
NOTE
If applicable, replace the letter d with the correct
CD ROM drive letter.
Copy BTS and CBSC CDF or
NEC Files to the LMF Computer
Before logging on to a BTS with the LMF computer to execute
optimization/ATP procedures, the correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf
or NECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml files must be obtained from the
CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF computer. This requires
creating versions of the CBSC CDF files on a DOS–formatted floppy
diskette and using the diskette to install the CDF or NEC files on the
LMF computer.
NOTE
– If the LMF has ftp capability, the ftp method can be used to
copy the CDF files from the CBSC.
– On Sun OS workstations, the unix2dos command can be
used in place of the cp command (for example,
unix2dos bts–248.cdf bts–248.cdf). This should be done
using a copy of the CBSC CDF file so the original CBSC
CDF file is not changed to DOS format.
NOTE
When copying CDF or NEC files, comply with the following to
prevent BTS login problems with the LMF:
– The numbers used in the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or
NECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml filenames must
correspond to the locally assigned numbers for each BTS
and its controlling CBSC.
– The generic cbsc–1.cdf file supplied with the LMF
works with locally numbered circuit BTS CDF files. Using
this file will not provide a valid optimization unless the
generic file is edited to replace default parameters (for
example, channel numbers and corresponding set power
out) with the operational parameters used locally.
The procedure in Table 3-2 lists the steps required to transfer the CDF or
NEC files from the CBSC to the LMF computer. For further
information, refer to the LMF Help function on line documentation.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-9
Preparing the LMF
– continued
Table 3-2: Copying CBSC CDF or NEC Files to the LMF
n Step
Action
AT THE CBSC:
Login to the CBSC workstation.
Insert a DOS formatted diskette in the workstation drive.
Type eject –q and press the  key.
Type mount and press the  key.
NOTE
S Look for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.
S If the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a
number. Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.
Change to the directory containing the file by typing cd  (ex. cd
bts–248) and pressing .
Type ls  to display the list of files in the directory.
With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS–formatted versions of the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or
NECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml files on the diskette by entering the following command:
unix2dos  /floppy/no_name/
For example, unix2dos bts–248.cdf or NECB–2.16.4.41–bts248.xml /floppy/
no_name/bts–248.cdf .
NOTE
S Other versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases,
use the Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or
Windows text editor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF
or NEC files on the LMF computer is, therefore, not recommended.
S Using cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copied
with a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of the
command string following a space (for example,
cp bts–248.cdf cbsc–6.cdf /floppy/no_name).
Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each bts–# that must be supported by the LMF.
When all required files have been copied to the diskette, type eject and press the  key.
10
Remove the diskette from the CBSC.
AT THE LMF:
11
Start the Windows operating system.
12
Insert the diskette into the LMF.
. . . continued on next page
3-10
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Preparing the LMF
– continued
Table 3-2: Copying CBSC CDF or NEC Files to the LMF
n Step
Action
13
Using Windows Explorer (or equivalent program), create a corresponding bts–# folder in the
\cdma directory for each bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or NECB*bts#.xml
and NECJ*bts#.xml file pair copied from the CBSC.
14
Use Windows Explorer (or equivalent program) to transfer the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or
NECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml files from the diskette to the corresponding
\cdma\bts–# folders created in step 13.
Creating a Named
HyperTerminal Connection for
MMI Sessions
Confirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS Field
Replaceable Units (FRUs) requires establishing an MMI communication
session between the LMF and the FRU. Using features of the Windows
operating system, the connection properties for an MMI session can be
saved on the LMF computer as a named Windows HyperTerminal
connection. This eliminates the need for setting up connection
parameters each time an MMI session is required to support
optimization.
Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created on
the Windows desktop. Double clicking the shortcut icon will start the
connection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-3 to establish a named HyperTerminal
connection and create a WIndows desktop shortcut for it.
Table 3-3: Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Sessions
Step
Action
From the Windows Start menu, select:
Programs>Accessories
Select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click on the
Hyperterm.exe icon in the window that opens.
NOTE
S If a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click Close.
(This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)
S If a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click NO.
5/21/04
When the Connection Description box opens:
– Type a name for the connection being defined (for example, MMI Session) in the Name: window.
– Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window.
– Click OK.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-11
Preparing the LMF
– continued
Table 3-3: Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Sessions
Step
Action
NOTE
For LMF configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test equipment and a
physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 to prevent conflicts.
From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select the RS–232 port to be used
for the connection (e.g., COM1 or COM2 (Win NT) – or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 (Win
98), and click OK.
In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS–232 port
settings as follows:
Bits per second: 9600
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: None
Click OK.
Save the defined connection by selecting:
File>Save
Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:
File>Exit
Click Yes to disconnect when prompted.
10
Perform one of the following:
S If the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win 98) proceed to step 12
S From the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories
11
Perform one of the following:
S For Win NT, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.
S For Win 98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.
12
Highlight the newly created connection icon by moving the cursor over it (Win NT) or clicking on it
(Win 98).
13
Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the right
mouse button.
14
From the pop–up menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.
15
If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on the
Windows desktop.
3-12
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Span Lines – Interface & Isolation
T1/E1 Span Interface
NOTE
At active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and
place it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the 50–pin
TELCO cable connected to the BTS frame site I/O board
J1 connector until the OMC/CBSC has disabled the BTS!
Each frame is equipped with one Site I/O and two Span I/O boards. The
Span I/O J1 connector provides connection for 25 wire pairs. A GLI card
can support up to six spans. In SC4812T BTS frames, spans A, C, and E
terminate on the Span “A” I/O; and spans B, D, and F terminate on the
Span “B” I/O.
NOTE
Span Lines will interface to the BTS through the Span I/O
cards only in circuit mode with either circuit or split
backhaul.
Before connecting the LMF to the frame LAN, the OMC–R must disable
the BTS and place it OOS to allow the LMF to control the CDMA BTS.
This prevents the OMC–R from inadvertently sending control
information to the BTS during LMF–controlled tests. Refer toFigure 3-2
and Figure 3-3 as required.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-13
Span Lines – Interface & Isolation
– continued
Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans
To ensure the LMF will maintain control of the BTS, disable the BTS
and isolate the spans as described in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4: T1/E1 Span Isolation
Step
Action
Have the OMC/CBSC place the BTS OOS.
Remove the T1/E1 span 50–pin TELCO cable connected to the SPAN I/O cards
(Figure 3-2).
NOTE
– If a third party is used for span connectivity, the third party must be informed
before disconnecting the span line.
– Verify that the SPAN cable connector is removed, not the “MODEM/TELCO”
connector.
Figure 3-2: Span I/O Board Span Isolation
50–PIN TELCO
CONNECTORS
REMOVED
SPAN A CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
SPAN B CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
RS–232 9–PIN SUB D
CONNECTOR SERIAL
PORT FOR EXTERNAL
DIAL UP MODEM
CONNECTION (IF USED)
TOP of Frame
(Site I/O and Span I/O boards)
FW00299
3-14
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
LMF to BTS Connection
Connect the LMF to the BTS
The LMF is connected to the LAN A or B connector located on the left
side of the frame’s lower air intake grill, behind the LAN Cable Access
door (see Figure 3-3).
Table 3-5: LMF to BTS Connection
Step
Action
To gain access to the connectors on the BTS, open the LAN Cable Access door, then pull apart the
Velcro® tape covering the BNC “T” connector (see Figure 3-3).
Connect the LMF to the LAN A BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter with an unshielded
twisted–pair (UTP) Adapter and 10BaseT/10Base2 converter (powered by an external AC/DC
transformer).
Start the LMF application (see Table 3-6 or Table 3-7) and test the connection.
– If there is no login response, connect the LMF to the LAN B connector.
– If there is still no login response, see Table 6-1, Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures.
NOTE
– Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the LMF Ethernet
connection to the frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DC
transformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed 91 cm (3 ft) in length.
– The LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC
connector) must not touch the chassis during optimization.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-15
LMF to BTS Connection
– continued
Figure 3-3: LMF Connection Detail
NOTE:
Open LAN CABLE ACCESS
door. Pull apart Velcro tape and
gain access to the LAN A or LAN
B LMF BNC connector.
ÁÁÁÁ
LMF BNC “T” CONNECTIONS
ON LEFT SIDE OF FRAME
(ETHERNET “A” SHOWN;
ETHERNET “B” COVERED
WITH VELCRO TAPE)
10BASE–T/10BASE–2
CONVERTER CONNECTS
DIRECTLY TO BNC T
LMF COMPUTER
TERMINAL WITH
MOUSE
3-16
PCMCIA ETHERNET
ADAPTER & ETHERNET
UTP ADAPTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)
CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)
115 VAC POWER
CONNECTION
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
ti-CDMA-WP-00076-v01-ildoc-ftw
5/21/04
Using the LMF
Basic LMF Operation
LMF Coverage in This Publication – There are LMF application
programs to support maintenance of both CDMA and SAS BTSs. All
references to the LMF in this publication are for the CDMA application
program.
Operating Environments – The LMF application program allows the
user to work in the two following operating environments which are
accessed using the specified desktop icons:
S Graphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF icon
S Command Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CLI icon
The GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operating
environment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to the
user to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit the
results of optimization and calibration actions.
Basic Operation – Basic operation of the LMF in either environment
includes performing the following:
Selecting and deselecting BTS devices
Enabling devices
Disabling devices
Resetting devices
Obtaining device status
The following additional basic operation can be performed in a GUI
environment:
S Sorting a status report window
For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,
refer to the LMF On-Line Help, Software Release 2.16.4.x .
NOTE
Unless otherwise noted, LMF procedures in this manual
are performed using the GUI environment.
Online Help – Task oriented online help is available in the LMF by
clicking on Help from the menu bar.
The LMF Display and the BTS
BTS Display – When the LMF is logged into a BTS, a frame tab is
displayed for each BTS frames. The frame tab will be labeled with
“CDMA” and the BTS number, a dash, and the frame number (for
example, BTS–812–1 for BTS 812, RFMF 1). If there is only one frame
for the BTS, there will only be one tab.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-17
Using the LMF
– continued
CDF or NEC file Requirements – For the LMF to recognize the
devices installed in the BTS, a BTS CDF or NEC files which include
equipage information for all the devices in the BTS must be located in
the applicable :\\cdma\bts–# folder. To
provide the necessary channel assignment data for circuit BTS operation,
a CBSC CDF file which includes channel data for all BTS RFMFs is
also required in the folder.
RFDS Display – If an RFDS is included in the CDF or NEC files, an
RFDS tab labeled with “RFDS,” a dash and the BTS number–frame
number combination (for example, RFDS–812–1) will be displayed.
Graphical User Interface
Overview
The LMF uses a Graphical User Interface (GUI), which supports the
following functions:
S Selecting a device or devices.
S Selecting an action to apply to selected device(s).
S Status report window displaying progress of actions taking place and
related information.
S Notification when an action is complete and related information such
as indication of success or failure
S An OK button to close the status report window.
Understanding GUI Operation
The following screen captures are provided to help understand how the
GUI operates:
– Figure 3-4 shows the differences between packet and circuit BTS
representations on the LMF login screen. If there is a packet
configuration file (NEC) for the BTS, the “(P)” is added as a suffix
to the BTS number.
– Figure 3-5 shows the Self-Managed Network Elements (NE) state
of a packet–mode BTS (SC4812T shown). An “X” is displayed on
the front of each card that is under Self–Managed NE control by the
GLI3 card.
– Figure 3-6 shows three of the available packet mode commands.
Normally the GLI3 has Self-Managed NE control of all cards as
shown inFigure 3-6 identified with an “X”. In that state, the LMF
may only status a card. In order to download code or test a card, the
LMF must request Self-Managed NE control of the card by using
the dropdown menu shown. The LMF also uses this menu to release
control of the card back to the GLI3. The GLI3 will also assume
control of the cards after the LMF logs out of the BTS. The packet
mode GLI3 normally is loaded with a tape release and NECB and
NECJ files which point to a tape release stored on the GLI3. When
the GLI3 has control of a card it will maintain that card with the
code on that tape release.
3-18
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Using the LMF
– continued
– Figure 3-7 depicts a packet–mode BTS that has the MCC–1 and the
BBX–1 cards under LMF control. Notice that the “X” is missing
from the front of these two cards.
Figure 3-4: BTS Login screen – identifying circuit and packet BTS files
For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,
refer to the LMF Help function on–line documentation.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-19
Using the LMF
– continued
Figure 3-5: Self–Managed Network Elements (NEs) state of a packet mode SC4812T
3-20
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Using the LMF
– continued
Figure 3-6: Available packet mode commands
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-21
Using the LMF
– continued
Figure 3-7: cket mode BTS with MCC–1 and BBX–1 under LMF control
Command Line Interface
Overview
The LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.
Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLI
cannot be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.
Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only one
handler can be running at one time. Due to architectural limitations, the
GUI must be started before the CLI if it is desired that the GUI and CLI
to use the same handler. When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the
CLI automatically finds and uses an in–progress login session with a
BTS initiated under the GUI. This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI
in the same BTS login session. If a CLI handler is already running when
the GUI is launched (this happens if the CLI window is already running
when the user starts the GUI, or if another copy of the GUI is already
running when the user starts the GUI), a dialog window displays the
following warning message:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF.
3-22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Using the LMF
– continued
Are you sure that you want to start the application?
Yes
No
Selecting the yes button starts the application. Selecting the no button
terminates the application.
CLI Format Conventions
The CLI command can be broken down in the following way:
S verb
S device including device identifier parameters
S switch
S option parameters consisting of:
– keywords
– equals signs (=) between the keywords and the parameter values
– parameter values
Spaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and option
parameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.
Following is an example of a CLI command.
measure bbx–– rssi channel=6 sector=5
Refer to the LMF CDMA CLI Reference, Software Release 2.16.4.x
manual for a complete explanation of the CLI commands and their use.
Logging into a BTS
Logging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTS
and the LMF. An LMF session can be logged into only one BTS at a
time.
Prerequisites
Before attempting to log into the BTS,
Before attempting to login to a BTS, ensure the following have been
completed:
S The LMF is properly connected to the BTS (see Figure 3-3).
S The LMF application program is correctly installed and prepared.
S A bts-# folder with the correct CDF and CBSC files or NEC files
exists.
S The LMF computer was connected to the BTS before starting the
Windows operating system and LMF software. If necessary, restart the
computer after connecting it to the BTS in accordance with Table 3-5
and Figure 3-3.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-23
Using the LMF
– continued
NOTE
Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or
NECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml files are used for the
BTS. These should be the CDF or NEC files that are
provided for the BTS by the OMC–R. Failure to use the
correct CDF or NEC files can result in invalid
optimization. Failure to use the correct CDF or NEC
files to log into a live (traffic carrying) site can shut
down the site.
BTS Login from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-6 to log into a BTS when using the GUI
environment.
Table 3-6: BTS GUI Login Procedure
n Step
Action
Start the CDMA LMF GUI environment by double clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the
LMF is not running).
NOTE
If a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions which
may be running, and start the CDMA LMF GUI environment again:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF
Are you sure you want to start the application?
Yes
No
Click on the Login tab (if not displayed).
If no base stations are displayed in the Available Base Stations pick list, double click on the
CDMA icon.
Click on the desired BTS number.
Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).
Enter the correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2 for a field BTS) if not correctly displayed in the
IP Address box.
NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI–1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IP
address for MGLI–2.
3-24
Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Using the LMF
– continued
Table 3-6: BTS GUI Login Procedure
n Step
Action
Click on Ping.
– If the connection is successful, the Ping Display window shows text similar to the following:
Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255
– If there is no response the following is displayed:
128.0.0.2:9216:Timed out
If the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI still fails to
respond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter–frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B
link cables, missing 50–Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.
Change the Multi-Channel Preselector (from the Multi-Channel Preselector pick list) selection,
normally MPC, to correspond to the BTS configuration, if required.
NOTE
When performing RX tests on expansion frames, do not choose EMPC if the test equipment is
connected to the starter frame.
NOTE
“Use a Tower Top Amplifier” is not applicable to the SC4812T–MC.
10
Click on Login.
A BTS tab with a graphical representation of the BTS CCP cage is displayed.
NOTE
S If login is attempted to a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.
S For Software Release 2.16.4.0 and earlier, a Mode Selection box asking if the BTS is Trunked
or Multicarrier will pop up. Multicarrier must be selected for the SC4812T–MC BTS.
S There may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (than is, a device
failure).
S If the MGLI is OOS_ROM (blue), it will have to be downloaded with code before other devices
can be seen.
S If the MGLI is OOS_RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be
seen.
BTS Login from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using the CLI
environment.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-25
Using the LMF
– continued
NOTE
If the CLI and GUI environments are to be used at the
same time, the GUI must be started first and BTS login
must be performed from the GUI. Refer to Table 3-6 to
start the GUI environment and log into a BTS.
Table 3-7: BTS CLI Login Procedure
n Step
Action
Double click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI
environment is not already running).
NOTE
If a BTS was logged into under a GUI session when the CLI
environment was started, the CLI session will be logged into the same
BTS, and step 2 is not required.
At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:
login bts– host= port=
where:
host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for
this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this is first login to this BTS).
port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for this
BTS or 9216 if this is first login to this BTS).
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
LMF>
13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted
COMMAND=login bts–33
13:08:18.882 Command In Progress
13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
Logging Out
Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and the
CLI operating environments.
3-26
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Using the LMF
– continued
NOTE
The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to
a BTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the
same BTS at the same time, logging out of the BTS in
either environment will log out of it for both. When either
a login or logout is performed in the CLI window, there is
no GUI indication that logout has occurred.
Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-8 to logout of a BTS when using the
GUI environment.
Table 3-8: BTS GUI Logout Procedure
n Step
Action
Click on BTS on the BTS tab menu bar.
Click the Logout item in the pull–down menu (a Confirm Logout
pop–up message appears).
Click on Yes or press the  key to confirm logout.
The screen display returns to the Login tab.
NOTE
If a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window
running at the same time as the GUI, a Logout Error pop–up
message appears stating the system should not log out of the BTS.
When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can
be used for further operations.
If a Logout Error pop–up message appears stating that the system
could not log out of the Base Station because the given BTS is not
logged in, perform the following actions:
– Click OK.
– Select File>Exit in the window menu bar.
– Click Yes in the Confirm Logout pop–up.
– Click Yes in the Logout Error pop–up which appears again.
If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.
NOTE
S The Logout item on the BTS menu bar will only log the LMF out
of the displayed BTS.
S Logging out of all BTS sessions and exiting the LMF can be done
by clicking on the File selection in the menu bar and selecting Exit
from the File menu list. A Confirm Logout pop–up message will
appear.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-27
Using the LMF
– continued
Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using the
CLI environment.
Table 3-9: BTS CLI Logout Procedure
n Step
Action
NOTE
If the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time
and further work must be done with it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.
Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:
logout bts–
A response similar to the following is displayed:
LMF>
12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted
Command=logout bts–33
12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted
12:22:58.028 Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following
command:
exit
A response similar to the following is displayed before the window
closes:
Killing background processes....
Establishing an MMI
Communication Session
For those procedures that require MMI communications between the
LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedure in Table 3-10 to initiate the
communication session.
Table 3-10: Establishing MMI Communication
Step
Action
Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure that requires the
MMI communication session and Figure 3-8 or Figure 3-9.
If the LMF computer has only one serial port (COM1) and the LMF is running, disconnect the LMF
from COM1 by performing the following:
2a
– Click on Tools in the LMF window menu bar, and select Options from the pull–down menu list.
–– An LMF Options dialog box will appear.
2b
– In the Test Equipment tab of the dialog box, select COM1 in the Comm Port pulldown on the
Serial Connection tab.
. . . continued on next page
3-28
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Using the LMF
– continued
Table 3-10: Establishing MMI Communication
Step
2c
Action
– ,Click the Disconnect Port button on the Serial Connection tab.
Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windows
desktop shortcut.
NOTE
If a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from the
Windows Start menu by selecting:
Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > 
Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressing
the LMF computer Enter key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained.
Figure 3-8:CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections – Cable CGDSMMICABLE219112 or
Fabricated MMI Cable
To FRU MMI
Connector
8–PIN
LMF COMPUTER
CABLE PART NUMBEr
CGDSMMICABLE219112
OR
COM1
OR
COM2
FABRICATED MMI CABLE
(SEE APPENDIX J)
DB–9
CONNECTOR
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-29
Using the LMF
– continued
Figure 3-9: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections –
Motorola MMI Interface Kit, SLN2006A
To FRU MMI port
8–PIN
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8–PIN TO 10–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
(P/N 30–09786R01)
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
RS–232 CABLE
COM1
OR
COM2
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
FW00687
Online Help
Task oriented online help is available in the LMF by clicking on Help in
the window menu bar, and selecting LMF Help from the pull–down
menu.
3-30
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Pinging the Processor
Pinging the Processor
For proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B links
must be be verified. Figure 3-10 represents a typical BTS Ethernet
configuration. The drawing depicts one (of two identical) links, A and B.
Ping is a program that routes request packets to the LAN network
modules to obtain a response from the specified “targeted” BTS.
Figure 3-10: BTS LAN Diagram
UNUSED LAN “OUT” PORTS MUST
HAVE NON–GROUNDED 50 OHM BNC
TERMINATORS INSTALLED
OR
BE CONNECTED TO EXPANSION
FRAME (WHERE USED) VIA COAX
CABLES
LAN “IN” PORTS MUST HAVE
GROUNDED 50 OHM TERMINATION
AT ALL TIMES IN A STARTER
FRAME.
IN EXPANSION FRAME AND
LOGICAL BTS, LAN “IN” PORTS ARE
NOT GROUNDED
C–CCP
CAGE
IN
OUT
LMF
CONNECTOR
BTS
(STARTER)
Follow the procedure in Table 3-11 and refer to Figure 3-10, as required,
to ping each processor (on both LAN A and LAN B) and verify LAN
redundancy is operating correctly.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-31
Pinging the Processor
– continued
CAUTION
Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while
handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by
ESD.
NOTE
The Ethernet LAN A and B cables must be installed on
each frame/enclosure before performing this test. All other
processor board LAN connections are made via the
backplanes.
Table 3-11: Pinging the Processors
n Step
Action
If it has not already been done, connect the LMF to the BTS (see Table 3-5 on page
3-15).
From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.
In the Open box, type ping and the  (for example, ping
128.0.0.2).
NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI–1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the
default IP address for MGLI–2.
Click on the OK button.
If the connection is successful, text similar to the following is displayed:
Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255
If there is no response the following is displayed:
Request timed out
If the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI
still fails to respond, typical problems are shorted BNC–to–inter-frame cabling, open
cables, crossed A and B link cables, missing 50–Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.
3-32
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Download the BTS
Overview
Before a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain device
initialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices during
manufacture or factory repair. Device application (RAM) code and data
must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before the BTS
can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.
ROM Code
Downloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routine
maintenance nor a normal part of the optimization process. It is only
done in unusual situations where the resident ROM code in the device
does not match the release level of the site operating software AND the
CBSC cannot communicate with the BTS to perform the download. If
ROM code must be downloaded, refer to Appendix H.
Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROM
code file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer.
ROM code must be manually selected for download.
NOTE
The ROM code file is not available for GLI3s. GLI3s are
ROM code loaded at the factory.
RAM Code
Before RAM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correct
RAM code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM
code can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Device
menu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is stored
in the CDMA LMF file structure. The RAM code file is selected
automatically if the file is in the \lmf\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder
(where n.n.n.n is the version number of the download code). The RAM
code file in the code folder must have the correct hardware bin number.
RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being downloaded changes to OOS-ROM
(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device
changes to OOS-RAM (yellow). When code is downloaded to an MGLI,
the LMF automatically also downloads data, and then enables the MGLI.
When enabled, the MGLI changes to INS (green).
For non–MGLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code is
downloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS–RAM
(yellow).
Prior to downloading a device, a code file must exist. The code file is
selected automatically if the code file is in the /lmf/cdma/n.n.n.n/code
folder (where n.n.n.n is the version number of the download code that
matches the “NextLoad” parameter in the CDF or NEC files). The code
file in the code folder must have the correct hardware bin number. Code
can be automatically or manually selected.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-33
Download the BTS
– continued
The devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are::
S Master Group Line Interface (MGLI)
S Group Line Interface (GLI)
S Clock Synchronization Module (CSM)
S Multi Channel Card (MCC24E, MCC8E or MCC–1X)
S Broadband Transceiver (BBX)
NOTE
The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with code and
data, and put INS before downloading any other device.
The download code process for an MGLI automatically
downloads data and enables the MGLI before downloading
other devices. The other devices can be downloaded in any
order.
Verify GLI ROM Code Loads
Devices should not be loaded with a RAM code version which is not
compatible with the ROM code with which they are loaded. Before
downloading RAM code and data to the processor cards, follow the
procedure in Table 3-12 to verify the GLI devices are loaded with the
correct ROM code for the software release used by the BSS.
Prerequisite
Identify the correct GLI ROM code load for the software release being
used on the BSS by referring to the Version Matrix section of the SCt
CDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tapes or CD–ROMs containing
the BSS software).
Table 3-12: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads
3-34
Step
Action
If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the
BTS ( refer to Table 3-6).
Select all GLI devices by clicking on them, and select Device > Status
from the BTS menu bar.
In the status report window which opens, note the number in the ROM
Ver column for each GLI.
If the ROM code loaded in the GLIs is not the correct one for the software
release being used on the BSS, perform the following:
4a
– Log out of the BTS as described in Table 3-8 or Table 3-9, as
applicable.
4b
– Disconnect the LMF computer.
4c
– Reconnect the span lines as described in Table 5-7.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Download the BTS
– continued
Table 3-12: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads
Step
Action
4d
– Have the CBSC download the correct ROM code version to the BTS
devices.
When the GLIs have the correct ROM load for the software release being
used, be sure the span lines are disabled as outlined in Table 3-4 and
proceed to downloading RAM code and data.
Download RAM Code and Data
to MGLI Cards
Prerequisite
Prior to performing this procedure, ensure a code file exists for each of
the devices to be downloaded.
Procedure
Follow the procedure in Table 3-13 to download the firmware
application code for the MGLI. The download code action downloads
data and also enables the MGLI.
Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLI
n Step
Action
Note the active LAN to which the LMF computer is connected.
At the top of the frame, remove the 50 Ω termination from the LAN
OUT connector of the LAN to which the LMF is not connected.
Select Tools > Update Next Load > CDMA function to ensure the
Next Load parameter is set to the correct code version level.
Note the LAN IP address in the Network Login section of the LMF
Login tab, and determine which GLI the LMF is logged into based on
the following IP addresses:
– Card in GLI slot 1: 128.0.0.2
– Card in GLI slot 2: 128.0.0.1
Download code to the MGLI which the LMF is logged into by
clicking on the MGLI.
– From the Device pull down menu, select
Download > Code/Data.
A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.
– Click OK to close the status window. (The MGLI should
automatically be downloaded with data and enabled.)
5/21/04
If the card accepts the download and enables, skip to step 10.
If the BTS connection is lost during or after the download process,
click on the LMF Login tab and log into the BTS again using the
same IP address.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-35
Download the BTS
– continued
Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLI
n Step
Action
If the log–in attempt fails, set the LAN IP address to the GLI card
which was not downloaded and log into the BTS through the other
GLI card.
Select the MGLI logged into in step 8, above, and download to it by
repeating step 5 for that card.
Select the remaining GLI card and download to it, but do not enable it
at this time.
Re–install the 50 Ω termination removed from the frame–top LAN
OUT connector in step 2, above.
10
11
Download Code and Data to
Non–GLI Devices
Non–GLI devices can be downloaded individually or all equipped
devices can be downloaded with one action. Follow the procedure in
Table 3-14 to download code and data to the non–GLI devices.
NOTE
When downloading multiple devices, the download may
fail for some of the devices (a time out occurs). These
devices can be downloaded separately after completing the
multiple download.
CSM devices are RAM code–loaded at the factory. RAM
code is downloaded to CSMs only if updating to a newer
software version.
Table 3-14: Download Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices
n Step
3-36
Action
Select all devices to be downloaded.
From the Device pull down menu, select Download>Code/Data.
A status report displays the result of the download for each selected
device.
Click OK to close the status window when downloading is complete.
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Download the BTS
– continued
Table 3-14: Download Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices
n Step
Action
NOTE
– After the download has started, the device being downloaded
changes to blue. If the download is completed successfully, the
device changes to yellow (OOS-RAM with code loaded).
– After a BBX, CSM or MCC is successfully downloaded with
code and has changed to OOS-RAM, the status LED should be
rapidly flashing GREEN.
– The command in Step 2 loads both code and data. Data can be
downloaded without doing a code download anytime a device is
OOS–RAM using the command in Step 4.
To download the firmware application data to each device, select the
target device and select: Device>Download>Data
Select CSM Clock Source and
Enable CSMs
A CSM can have three different clock sources. The Clock Source
function can be used to select the clock source from each of the three
inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs to
be changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clock
source options:
Local GPS
Mate GPS
Remote GPS
HSO (only for sources 2 & 3)
HSOX (only for sources 2 & 3)
10 MHz (only for sources 2 & 3)
NONE (only for sources 2 & 3)
Prerequisites
MGLI=INS_ACT
CSM= OOS_RAM or INS_ACT
Follow the procedure in Table 3-15 to select a CSM Clock Source.
Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock Source
n Step
5/21/04
Action
Select the applicable CSM(s).
Click on Device in the BTS menu bar and select
CSM/MAWI > Select Clock Source... in the pull down menu – a
clock source selection window is displayed.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-37
Download the BTS
– continued
Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock Source
n Step
Action
Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source
pick lists. Uncheck the related check boxes for Clock Reference
Sources 2 and 3 if the displayed pick list items should not be used.
Click on the OK button – a status report window displays the results
of the selection action.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
NOTE
For non–RGPS sites only, verify the CSM configured with
the GPS receiver “daughter board” is installed in the
CSM–1 slot before continuing.
Enable CSMs
NOTE
CSMs are code loaded at the factory. This data is retained
in EEPROM. The download code procedure is required in
the event it becomes necessary to code load CSMs with
updated software versions. Use the status function to
determine the current code load versions.
The CSM(s) to be enabled must have been downloaded
with code (Yellow, OOS–RAM) and data.
Each BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typical
operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop
(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either an
on–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R–GPS).
The CSM2 card is required when using the R–GPS. The GPS receiver
(mounted on CSM–1) is the primary timing reference and synchronizes
the entire cellular system. CSM–2 provides redundancy but does not
have a GPS receiver.
The BTS may be equipped with a remote GPS, LORAN–C, HSO 10
MHz Rubidium source, or HSOX for expansion frames, which the CSM
can use as a secondary timing reference. In all cases, the CSM monitors
and determines what reference to use at a given time.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-16 to enable the CSMs.
3-38
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Download the BTS
– continued
Table 3-16: Enable CSMs
n Step
Action
Verify the CSM(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS–RAM) and data.
Click on the target CSM.
From the Device pull down, select Enable.
NOTE
– If equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM–2 first and then CSM–1. A status report confirms
change in the device(s) status. Click OK to close the status window.
– FAIL may be shown in the status table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown
in the Description field, the CSM changes to the enabled state after phase lock is achieved.
CSM–1 houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour to complete.
– The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and
operated by the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodically
alters satellite orbits; therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that
is INS contains an “almanac” that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.
– If an installed GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to
one hour for the GPS receiver “almanac” to be updated.
– Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3-D
position fix for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in-service. (In some
cases, the GPS receiver needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set
during the data load.)
– If equipped with two CSMs, the LMF should display CSM-1 as bright GREEN (INS–ACT)
and CSM–2 as dark green (INS–STB). After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, the
PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green (alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm
state).
If more than an hour has passed, refer to Table 3-20 to determine the cause.
Enable MCCs
Follow the procedure in Table 3-17 to enable the MCCs.
NOTE
The MGLI, and primary CSM must be downloaded and
enabled (IN–SERVICE ACTIVE), before downloading and
enabling the MCC.
Table 3-17: Enable MCCs
n Step
5/21/04
Action
Verify the MCC(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow,
OOS–RAM) and data.
Select the MCCs to be enabled or from the Select pulldown menu
choose MCCs.
From the Device menu, select Enable – a status report confirms
change in the device(s) status.
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-39
Download the BTS
– continued
Table 3-17: Enable MCCs
n Step
Action
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Enable Redundant GLIs
Follow the procedure in Table 3-18 to enable the redundant GLI(s).
Table 3-18: Enable Redundant GLIs
n Step
3-40
Action
Select the target redundant GLI(s).
From the Device menu, select Enable – a status report window
confirms the change in the device(s) status and the enabled GLI(s) is
green.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification
CSM & HSO Background
The primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)
boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM in
slot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy. The
CSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using the remote
GPS receiver (R–GPS). R–GPS uses a GPS receiver in the antenna head
that has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can have a daughter
card as a local GPS receiver to support an RF–GPS signal.
The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1
and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock Distribution
Cards (CCDs) buffer and distribute even–second reference and 19.6608
MHz clocks. CCD–1 is married to CSM–1 and CCD–2 is married to
CSM 2. A failure on CSM–1 or CCD–1 cause the system to switch to
redundant CSM–2 and CCD–2.
In a typical operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked
Loop (DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by
either an on–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver
(R–GPS). The CSM2 card is required when using the R–GPS. DPLL
circuits employed by the CSM provide switching between the primary
and redundant unit upon request. Synchronization between the primary
and redundant CSM cards, as well as the HSO back–up source, provides
excellent reliability and performance.
Each CSM board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides
19.6608 MHz clock, even second tick reference, and 3 MHz sinewave
reference, referenced to the selected synchronization source (GPS,
Receiver, or High Stability Oscillator (HSO), T1 Span, or external
reference oscillator sources). The 3 MHz signals are also routed to the
RDM EXP 1A & 1B connectors on the top interconnect panel for
distribution to co–located frames at the site.
Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPS
synchronization source and the HSO backup source in the event of a
GPS receiver failure on CSM–1. During normal operation, the CSM–1
board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-20). The source
selection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software.
All boards are mounted in the C–CCP shelf at the top of the BTS frame.
Figure 1-14 illustrates the location of the boards in the BTS frame.
Front Panel LEDs
The status of the LEDs on the CSM boards are as follows:
S Steady Green – Master CSM locked to GPS (INS).
S Rapidly Flashing Green – Standby CSM locked to GPS (STBY).
S Flashing Green/Rapidly Flashing Red – CSM OOS_RAM attempting
to lock on GPS signal.
S Rapidly Flashing Green and Red – Alarm condition exists. Trouble
Notifications (TNs) are currently being reported to the GLI.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-41
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification
– continued
High Stability Oscillator
CSM and HSO – The CSM handles the overall configuration and status
monitoring functions of the HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the HSO
is capable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the
GPS reference signal.
HSO – The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessary
interface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in those
geographical areas not covered by the LORAN–C system. Since the
HSO is a free–standing oscillator, system time can only be maintained
for 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.
Upgrades and Expansions: HSO2/HSOX
HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to the
expansion or logical BTS frames. The associated expansion or logical
frames require an HSO–expansion (HSOX). The HSOX accepts input
from the starter frame and interfaces with the CSM cards in the
expansion frame. HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in
source selection (see Table 3-19).
NOTE
Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for
60 minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM
board warm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and
oscillator frequency to stabilize prior to test. Test
equipment warm-up allows the Rubidium standard
timebase to stabilize in frequency before any measurements
are made.
CSM Frequency Verification
The objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the CSM
boards before performing the RF path verification tests. Parts of this
procedure will be repeated for final verification after the overall
optimization has been completed.
Null Modem Cable
A null modem cable is required. It is connected between the LMF
COM1 port and the RS232–GPIB Interface box. Figure 3-11 shows the
wiring detail for the null modem cable.
3-42
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification
– continued
Figure 3-11: Null Modem Cable Detail
9–PIN D–FEMALE
GND
RX
TX
RTS
CTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
DSR
9–PIN D–FEMALE
ON BOTH CONNECTORS SHORT PINS 7, 8;
SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 6
GND
TX
RX
RTS
CTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
DSR
FW00362
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
S The LMF is NOT logged into the BTS.
S The COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via
a null modem board.
Test Equipment Setup: GPS &
HSO Verification
Follow the procedure in Table 3-19 to set up test equipment while
referring toFigure 3-12 as required.
Table 3-19: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & HSO Verification)
Step
Action
Perform one of the following operations:
– For local GPS (RF–GPS), verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSM
slot 1 and that CSM–1 is INS.
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1.
– For Remote GPS (RGPS), verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM–1 is
INS.
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132ED (or later).
Remove CSM–2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modem
board) to the MMI port on CSM–1.
Reinstall CSM–2.
Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-3)
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
5/21/04
When the terminal screen appears, press the  key until the CSM> prompt appears.
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-43
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification
– continued
Figure 3-12: CSM MMI terminal connection
REFERENCE
OSCILLATOR
CSM board shown
removed from frame
MMI SERIAL
PORT
EVEN SECOND
TICK TEST POINT
REFERENCE
GPS RECEIVER
ANTENNA INPUT
ANTENNA COAX
CABLE
GPS RECEIVER
19.6 MHZ TEST
POINT REFERENCE
(NOTE 1)
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
9–PIN TO 9–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
FW00372
LMF
NOTEBOOK
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
RS–232 SERIAL
MODEM CABLE
COM1
NOTES:
1. One LED on each CSM:
Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVE
Fast Flashing Green = OOS–RAM
Red = Fault Condition
Flashing Green & Red = Fault
GPS Initialization/Verification
Follow the procedure in Table 3-20 to initialize and verify proper GPS
receiver operation.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
S The LMF is not logged into the BTS.
S The COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via
a null modem board (see Figure 3-12).
S The primary CSM and HSO (if equipped) have been warmed up for at
least 15 minutes.
3-44
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification
– continued
CAUTION
Connect the GPS antenna to the GPS RF connector ONLY.
Damage to the GPS antenna and/or receiver can result if
the GPS antenna is inadvertently connected to any other
RF connector.
Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, and
GPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMI
command
bstatus
– Observe the following typical response:
Clock Alarms (0000):
DPLL is locked and has a reference source.
GPS receiver self test result: passed
Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11
Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and the
GPS receivers.
sources
– Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
No
N/A
timed–out*
Timed–out* No
*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not–Present” or
“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the
HSO as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:
ss 1 12
After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and the
LED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED has
changed to green, enter sources  at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a valid
source by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.
The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidium
oscillator is fully warmed.
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
Yes
N/A
xxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx Yes
5/21/04
HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.
If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified in
the database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the edit
csm csmgen refsrc command.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-45
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification
– continued
Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
NOTE
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
– If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillator
temperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !
– If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillator
is defective
– Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):
– GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.
– At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.
Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.
gstatus
– Observe the following typical response:
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
(GPS)
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
24:06:08
GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.
Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.
Recent Change Data:
Antenna cable delay 0 ns.
Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon –350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)
Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.
GPS Receiver Status:
Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites,
Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP):
Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:11
GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x08
Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status:
Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status:
Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status:
Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status:
Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status:
Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status:
Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status:
Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status:
8 satellites visible.
0.
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
0xa8
GPS Receiver Identification:
COPYRIGHT 1991–1996 MOTOROLA INC.
SFTW P/N # 98–P36830P
SOFTWARE VER # 8
SOFTWARE REV # 8
SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996
MODEL #
B3121P1115
HDWR P/N # _
SERIAL #
SSG0217769
MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07
OPTIONS LIST
IB
The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.
. . . continued on next page
3-46
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification
– continued
Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):
– At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.
– GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!
– Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.
Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height reference
to Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).
If steps 1 through 7 pass, the GPS is good.
NOTE
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:
– If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked and
visible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site has
been entered into CDF or NEC files).
– If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed”, position data currently in the CDF or NEC files is
assumed to be accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.
– The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
– GPS antenna connector center conductor measures approximately +5 Vdc with respect to the
shield.
– There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frame
GPS input.
– Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPS
acquisition has taken place.
debug dpllp
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application of
power) (If warmed–up proceed to step 10)
CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left.
...........etc.
NOTE
The warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm–up, but the
reference oscillator will be unstable.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-47
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification
– continued
Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step
10
Action
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.
c:17486
c:17486
c:17470
c:17486
c:17470
c:17470
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
off:
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
–11,
3,
3,
1,
3,
1,
1,
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
TK
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
SRC:0
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S0:
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
S1:–2013175,–2013175
11
Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):
– Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).
– Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).
– TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.
12
Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.
debug dpllp
HSO Initialization/Verification
The HSO module is a full–size card that resides in the C–CCP Shelf.
This completely self contained high stability 10 MHz oscillator
interfaces with the CSM via a serial communications link. The CSM
handles the overall configuration and status monitoring functions of the
HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the HSO is capable of maintaining
synchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal for a
limited time.
The HSO is typically installed in those geographical areas not covered
by the LORAN–C system and provides the following major functions:
S Reference oscillator temperature and phase lock monitor circuitry
S Generates a highly stable 10 MHz sine wave.
S Reference divider circuitry converts 10 MHz sine wave to 10 MHz
TTL signal, which is divided to provide a 1 PPS strobe to the CSM.
Prerequisites
S The LMF is not logged into the BTS.
S The COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via
a null modem board.
S The primary CSM and the HSO (if equipped) have warmed up for 15
minutes.
If the BTS is equipped with an HSO, follow the procedure in Table 3-21
to configure the HSO.
3-48
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
CSM System Time/GPS and HSO Verification
– continued
Table 3-21: HSO Initialization/Verification
Step
Action
At the BTS, slide the HSO card into the cage.
NOTE
The LED on the HSO should light red for no longer than 15-minutes, then switch to green. The CSM
must be locked to GPS.
On the LMF at the CSM> prompt, enter sources .
– Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:
Num Source Name Type
TO Good
Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Local GPS
Primary 4
Yes
Good
Yes
HSO
Backup
Yes
N/A
xxxxxxx
–69532
Yes
Not used
Current reference source number: 0
When the CSM is locked to GPS, verify that the HSO “Good” field is Yes and the “Valid” field is Yes.
If source “1” is not configured as HSO, enter at the CSM> prompt: ss 1 12 
Check for Good in the Status field.
At the CSM> prompt, enter sources .
Verify the HSO valid field is Yes. If not, repeat this step until the “Valid” status of Yes is returned. The
HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO Rubidium
oscillator is fully warmed.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-49
Test Equipment Set Up
Connecting Test Equipment to
the BTS
The following equipment is required to perform optimization:
LMF
Test set
Directional coupler and attenuator
RF cables and connectors
Null modem cable (see Figure 3-11)
GPIB interface box
Refer to Table 3-22 and Table 3-23 for an overview of connections for
test equipment currently supported by the LMF. In addition, see the
following figures:
S Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the test set connections for TX
calibration.
S Figure 3-18 and Figure 3-19 show test set connections for IS–95 A/B
optimization/ATP tests.
S Figure 3-20 shows test set connections for IS–95 A/B and
CDMA 2000 optimization/ATP tests.
S Figure 3-22 and Figure 3-23 show typical TX and RX ATP setup with
a directional coupler.
Test Equipment GPIB Address
Settings
All test equipment is controlled by the LMF through an IEEE–488/GPIB
bus. To communicate on the bus, each piece of test equipment must have
a GPIB address set which the LMF will recognize. The standard address
settings used by the LMF for the various types of test equipment items
are as follows:
Signal generator address: 1
Power meter address: 13
Communications system analyzer: 18
Signal generator address: 19
Using the procedures included in the Setting GPIB Addresses section of
Appendix F, verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB address of each
piece of test equipment used to match the above
Supported Test Equipment
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all TX test
connections must be through the directional coupler and
in-line attenuator as shown in the test setup illustrations.
3-50
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
IS–95 A/B Testing
Optimization and ATP testing for IS–95A/B may be performed using
one of the following test sets:
S CyberTest
S Hewlett–Packard HP 8935
S Hewlett–Packard HP 8921 and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
S Advantest R3465 and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
The equipment listed above cannot be used for CDMA 2000 testing.
CDMA 2000 Testing
NOTE
IS–95 C is the same as CDMA 2000.
Optimization and ATP testing for IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X sites or
carriers may be performed using the following test equipment:
S Advantest R3267 Analyzer with Advantest R3562 Signal Generator
S Agilent E4406A with E4432B Signal Generator
S Agilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP
8935) with option 200 or R2K and with E4432B signal generator for
1X FER
S Agilent E7495A communications test set
The E4406A/E4432B pair, or the R3267/R3562 pair, should be
connected together using a GPIB cable. In addition, the R3562 and
R3267 should be connected with a serial cable from the Serial I/O to the
Serial I/O. This test equipment is capable of performing tests in both
IS–95 A/B mode and CDMA 2000 mode if the required options are
installed.
Optional test equipment
S Spectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – can be used to perform cable
calibration.
Test Equipment Preparation
See Appendix F for specific steps to prepare each type of test set and
power meter to perform calibration and ATP.
The Agilent E7495A communications test set requires additional setup
and preparation. This is described in detail in Appendix F.
Test Equipment Connection
Charts
To use the following charts to identify necessary test equipment
connections, locate the communications system analyzer being used in
the COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER columns, and read
down the column. Where a dot appears in the column, connect one end
of the test cable to that connector. Follow the horizontal line to locate the
end connection(s), reading up the column to identify the appropriate
equipment and/or BTS connector.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-51
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment Connections
Table 3-22 depicts the interconnection requirements for currently
available test equipment supporting IS–95A/B only which meets
Motorola standards and is supported by the LMF.
Table 3-22: IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment Interconnection
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER
SIGNAL
EVEN SECOND
SYNCHRONIZATION
19.6608 MHZ
CLOCK
CONTROL
IEEE 488 BUS
Cyber–Test
EVEN
SEC REF
TIME
BASE IN
Advantest
R3465
HP 8921A
HP 8921
W/PCS
ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
Power
Meter
GPIB
Interface
LMF
Attenuator
Directional
Coupler
BTS
EVEN SEC
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
SYNC
MONITOR
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
FREQ
MONITOR
IEEE
488
GPIB
HP–I
HP–IB
TX TEST
CABLES
RF
IN/OUT
INPUT
50W
RF
IN/OUT
RF
IN/OUT
RX TEST
CABLES
RF
GEN OUT
RF OUT
50W
DUPLEX
OUT
RF OUT
ONLY
HP–IB
GPIB
SERIAL
PORT
20 DB
BTS
ATTEN. PORT
TX1–6
RX1–6
NOTE
TX Test cables are set up as follows: TX 1–3 for 3-sector
BTS and TX 1–6 for 6-sector.
RX Test Cables are set up as follows: RX 1–6 for 3-sector
and RX 1–12 for 6-sector.
3-52
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B–capable Test Equipment
Connections
Table 3-23 depicts the interconnection requirements for currently
available test equipment supporting both CDMA 2000 1X and IS–95A/B
which meets Motorola standards and is supported by the LMF.
Table 3-23: CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B Test Equipment Interconnection
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER
ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
SIGNAL
EVEN SECOND
SYNCHRONIZATION
19.6608 MHZ
CLOCK
CONTROL
IEEE 488 BUS
10 MHZ
Agilent
8935 (Option 200
or R2K)
EXT
TRIG IN
Agilent
E7495A
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
RX TEST
CABLES
EXT
TRIG
MOD TIME
BASE IN
Agilent
E4406A
TRIGGER
IN
Agilent
E4432B
Signal
Generator
PATTERN
TRIG IN
EXT REF
IN
IEEE
488
GPIB
10 MHZ
OUT
10 MHZ IN
HP–IB
10 MHZ OUT
(SWITCHED)
RF
IN/OUT
DUPLEX
OUT *
PORT 2
RF IN
RF IN
PORT 1
RF OUT
RF OUT
50–OHM
Power
Meter
GPIB
Interface
LMF
GPIB
10 MHZ IN
HP–IB
30 dB
Directional
Coupler &
20 dB Pad*
BTS
SYNC
MONI
TOR
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EXT REF
IN
SERIAL
I/O
SIGNAL SOURCE
CONTROLLED
SERIAL I/O
TX TEST
CABLES
Advan
test
R3267
Advantest
R3562
Signal
Generator
FREQ
MONITOR
HP–IB
GPIB
SERIAL
PORT
SYNTHE
REF IN
SERIAL
I/O
RF INPUT
50 OHM
RF OUT
ONLY
RF OUTPUT
50 OHM
RF OUTPUT
50–OHM
RF IN/OUT
RF OUT
50 OHM
30 DB COUPLER
AND
TX1–6
20 DB ATTEN
RX1–6
* WHEN USED ALONE, THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K SUPPORTS IS–95A/B RX TESTING BUT NOT CDMA2000 1X RX TESTING.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-53
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
Equipment Warm-up
NOTE
Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes
prior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. This
assures BTS site stability and contributes to optimization
accuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up,
hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as
warm-up time.)
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS
TX OUT connector, verify there are NO CDMA BBX
channels keyed. At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC
place the antenna (sector) assigned to the PA under test
OOS. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
Automatic Cable Calibration
Set–up
Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show the cable calibration setup for various
supported test sets. The left side of the diagram depicts the location of
the input and output ports of each test set, and the right side details the
set up for each test.
Manual Cable Calibration
If manual cable calibration is required, refer to the procedures in
Appendix F.
3-54
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
Figure 3-13: Cable Calibration Test Setup
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
CALIBRATION SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
A. SHORT CABLE CAL
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÏ
ANT IN
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
RF GEN OUT
Note: The Directional Coupler is not used with the
Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is connected
directly to the Cybertest Test Set.
B. RX TEST SETUP
A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short test
cable for cable calibration with the CyberTest Test
Set. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cable
calibration procedure, not with the test cables for
TX calibration and ATP tests.
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
RX
CABLE
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ANT
IN
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
DUPLEX
OUT
Advantest Model R3465
RF OUTPUT
50–OHM
C. TX TEST SETUP
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
(30 DB)
RF INPUT
50–OHM
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A
TX
CABLE
SHORT
CABLE
RF IN/OUT
TX
CABLE
DUPLEX
OUT
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
TEST
SET
FW00089
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-55
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
Figure 3-14: Cable Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267, Agilent E4406A)
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
CALIBRATION SET UP
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
A. SHORT CABLE CAL
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
RF IN
EXT TRIG IN
B. RX TEST SETUP
MOD TIME BASE IN
(EXT REF IN)
RF OUT
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
RX
CABLE
Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)
SHORT
CABLE
TEST
SET
RF
OUTPUT
50 OHM
RF
INPUT 50
OHM
C. TX TEST SETUP
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
(30 DB)
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
TX
CABLE
SHORT
CABLE
TX
CABLE
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
TEST
SET
REF FW00089
3-56
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
Set-up for TX Calibration
Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the test set connections for TX
calibration.
Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest, HP 8935, and Advantest)
TEST SETS
Motorola CyberTest
POWER
SENSOR
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÏ
FRONT PANEL
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
POWER
METER
(OPTIONAL)*
OUT
RF
IN/OUT
TX TEST
CABLE
NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THE
CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY
TO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.
TX
TEST
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
CONTROL
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
IN
* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACE
OF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TX
CALIBRATION/AUDIT
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
Á
GPIB
CABLE
TX ANTENNA
PORT
RF IN/OUT
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
Advantest Model R3465
LAN
LAN
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
GPIB
CONNECTS TO
BACK OF UNIT
G MODE
CDMA
LMF
INPUT
50–OHM
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00094
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-57
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
Figure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267 and Agilent E4406A)
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
Advantest Model R3267
POWER
SENSOR
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
POWER
METER
(OPTIONAL)*
OUT
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX TEST
CABLE
CONTROL
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
IN
RF IN
TX
TEST
CABLE
Agilent E4406A
* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACE
OF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TX
CALIBRATION/AUDIT
GPIB
CABLE
RF INPUT
50 Ω
TX ANTENNA
PORT
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
BTS
GPIB ADRS
LAN
LAN
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
G MODE
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00094
3-58
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
Figure 3-17: TX Calibration Test Setup – Agilent E7495A (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)
TEST SETS
TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
Agilent E7495A
POWER
SENSOR
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED
WITH DUPLEXED RX/TX
SIGNALS, CONNECT THE TX
TEST CABLE TO THE
DUPLEXED ANTENNA
CONNECTOR.
POWER METER
PORT 1
RF OUT
100–WATT (MIN.)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
TX TEST
CABLE
COMMUNIC
ATIONS
INTERNAL
PORTsystem
ETHERNET
RF IN
analyzer CARD
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
2O DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
GPIO
Port 2
RF In
Serial 1
Sensor
Use only
Agilent supplied
power adapter
Ext Ref
In
Power REF
50 MHz
Even Second
Sync In
Serial 2
TX TEST
CABLE
Port 1
RF Out / SWR
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
GPS
Antenna
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
ETHERNET HUB
PORT 2
RF IN
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
PORT 1
RF OUT
BTS
SYNC
MONITOR
CSM
LAN
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)
CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
3-59
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
Setup for Optimization/ATP
Figure 3-18 and Figure 3-19 show test set connections for IS–95 A/B
optimization/ATP tests. Figure 3-20 shows test set connections for
IS–95 A/B and CDMA 2000 optimization/ATP tests.
3-60
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
Figure 3-18: IS–95 A/B Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration Using Directional Coupler
(CyberTest, HP 8935 and Advantest)
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Motorola CyberTest
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX
TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
OUT
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÏ
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
RX
TEST
CABLE
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
Communica
tions test
set EVEN
CDMA
TIMEBASE
IN
SECOND/SYNC
IN
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
RF
IN/OUT
RF
OUT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
NOTE: The Directional Coupler is not used
with the Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is
connected directly to the Cybertest Test set.
10 DB PAD
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
TX
TEST
CABLE
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
RX ANTENNA
PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT
BTS
DUPLEX OUT
FREQ
MONITOR
RF IN/OUT
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
LAN
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
LAN
ADVANTEST NOT SUPPORTED
GPIB ADRS
CSM
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INPUT
50–OHM
5/21/04
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
RF OUT
GPIB CONNECTS
TO BACK OF UNIT
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
Advantest Model R3465
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00096
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-61
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
Figure 3-19: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921A
TEST SET
Optimization/ATP SET UP
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX
TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
OUT
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
RX
TEST
CABLE
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNIT
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
IN
Communica
tions test
EVEN
set SECOND/SYNC
CDMA
TIMEBASE
IN
IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RF
IN/OUT
10 DB PAD
RF OUT
ONLY
GPIB
CABLE
TX
TEST
CABLE
RX ANTENNA
PORT
TX ANTENNA
PORT
BTS
FREQ
MONITOR
LAN
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
SYNC
MONITOR
LAN
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
GPIB ADRS
CSM
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
CDMA
LMF
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00097
3-62
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
Figure 3-20: IS–95 A/B and CDMA 2000 Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using Directional Coupler
TEST SETS
Optimization/ATP SET UP
Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)
TO EXT TRIG
ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
10 MHZ
REF OUT
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
OUT
RF IN
BNC
“T”
EXT TRIG IN
SYNTHE
REF IN
MOD TIME BASE IN
(EXT REF IN)
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
RX
TEST
CABLE
IN
sIGNAL
GENERATOR
Communications
test set
EVEN
EXT
REF
IN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
RF OUT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
NOTE:
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
10 DB PAD
SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS
CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OF
SPECTRUM ANALYZER.
BNC
“T”
TX
TEST
CABLE
GPIB
CABLE
Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)
TX ANTENNA
PORT
RX ANTENNA
PORT
RF
OUTPUT
50 Ω
10
MHZ
IN
BTS
10
MHZ
OUT
FREQ
MONITOR
RF
INPUT
50 Ω
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
19.6608
MHZ
CLOCK
SYNC
MONITOR
TO PATTERN TRIG IN
ON REAR OF SIGNAL
GENERATOR
EXT REF IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
ON
GPIB ADRS
CSM
TO TRIGGER IN
ON REAR OF
TRANSMITTER
TESTER
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
LAN
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
CDMA
LMF
BNC
“T”
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
REF FW00758
NOTE:
FOR MANUAL TESTING, GPIB MUST BE CONNECTED
BETWEEN THE ANALYZER AND THE SIGNAL
GENERATOR
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-63
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
Figure 3-21: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup – Agilent E7495A
ATP TEST SET UP
TEST SET
POWER METER
Agilent E7495A
NOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPED
WITH DUPLEXED RX/TX
SIGNALS, CONNECT THE TX
TEST CABLE TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA CONNECTOR.
RX TEST
RF INPUT 50 Ω
OR INPUT 50 Ω
100–WATT (MIN.)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
TX TEST
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(30 DB)
50 Ω
TERM
PORT 1
RF OUT
COMMUNIC
ATIONS
INTERNAL
PORTsystem
ETHERNET
RF IN
analyzer CARD
NOTE: USE THE SAME
CABLE SET FOR TX AND RX
ATP. SWITCH THE CABLES
DURING ALL ATP TESTS AS
SHOWN.
2O DB IN–LINE
ATTENUATOR
GPIO
Port 2
RF In
Serial 1
Sensor
Even Second
Sync In
Serial 2
Port 1
RF Out / SWR
TX TEST
GPS
Antenna
RX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
PORT 2
RF IN
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
TEST
CABLES
RX TEST
Use only
Agilent supplied
power adapter
Ext Ref
In
Power REF
50 MHz
PORT 1
RF OUT
TX
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
ETHERNET HUB
BTS
SYNC
MONITOR
CSM
LAN
LAN
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
UNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)
CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)
CDMA
LMF
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
TX ATP Setup
Figure 3-22 shows a typical TX ATP setup and Figure 3-23 shows a
typical RX ATP setup.
3-64
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
Figure 3-22: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with and without RFDS)
TX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS
RX
(RFM TX)
TX RF FROM BTS FRAME
COBRA RFDS Detail
TX
(RFM RX)
RF FEED LINE TO
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
REMOVED
RFDS RX (RFM TX) COUPLER
OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)
ASU2 (SHADED) CONNECTORS
Connect TX test cable between
the directional coupler input port
and the appropriate TX antenna
directional coupler connector.
Appropriate test sets and the port
names for all model test sets are
described in Table 3-22.
Communica
tions test
set
40W NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
IN
RVS (REFLECTED)
PORT 50–OHM
TERMINATION
OUTPUT
PORT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
BTS INPUT
PORT
TEST
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
NOTE:
THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH
STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.
5/21/04
TX
TEST
CABLE
TX TEST
CABLE
FWD
(INCIDENT)
PORT
ti-CDMA-WP-00121-v01-ildoc-ftw
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-65
Test Equipment Set Up
– continued
Figure 3-23: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with or without RFDS)
COBRA RFDS Detail
RX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS
RX RF FROM BTS
FRAME
RX
(RFM TX)
TX
(RFM RX)
RFDS TX (RFM RX) COUPLER
OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)
ASU1 (SHADED) CONNECTORS
RF FEED LINE TO
TX ANTENNA
REMOVED
Connect RX test cable between
the test set and the appropriate
RX antenna directional coupler.
Appropriate test sets and the port
names for all model test sets are
described in Table 3-22.
Communica
tions test
set
OUT
RX Test
Cable
NOTE:
THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH
STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.
3-66
FW00115
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Set Calibration
Test Set Calibration
Background
Proper test equipment calibration ensures that the test equipment and
associated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and that
measurements are correct.
NOTE
If the test set being used to interface with the BTS has been
calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does not
need to be performed. (Test Set includes LMF terminal,
communications test set, additional test equipment,
associated test cables, and adapters.)
This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.
Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables and
adapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) has
been calibrated and maintained as a set.
CAUTION
If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter,
that makes up the calibrated test equipment set, has been
replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so
can introduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrect
measurements and degradation to system performance.
NOTE
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent
test equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment
after it has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
Calibration Procedures
Included
Automatic
Procedures included in this section use the LMF automated calibration
routine to determine path losses of the supported communications
analyzer, power meter, associated test cables, adapters, and (if used)
antenna switch that make up the overall calibrated test equipment set.
After calibration, the gain/loss offset values are stored in a test
measurement offset file on the LMF computer.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-67
Test Set Calibration
– continued
Manual
Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester – The E4406A does not support
the power level zeroing calibration performed by the LMF. If this
instrument is to be used for Bay Level Offset calibration and calibration
is attempted with the LMF Calibrate Test Equipment function, the
LMF will return a status window failure message stating that zeroing
power is not supported by the E4406A. Refer to the Equipment
Calibration section of Appendix F for instructions on using the
instrument’s self–alignment (calibration) function prior to performing
Bay Level Offset calibration.
Power Meters – Manual power meter calibration procedures to be
performed prior to automated calibration are included in the Equipment
Calibration section of Appendix F.
Cable Calibration – Manual cable calibration procedures using the HP
8921A and Advantest R3465 communications system analyzers are
provided in the Manual Cable Calibration section of Appendix F, if
needed.
GPIB Addresses
GPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any
address in that range, but the numbers entered in the LMF Options
window GPIB address box must match the addresses of the test
equipment. Motorola recommends using 1 for a CDMA signal generator,
13 for a power meter, and 18 for a communications system analyzer. To
verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the test
equipment, refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F.
IP Addresses
The E7495A communications test set uses IP over Ethernet connections
for communication rather than the GPIB. For the Agilent E7495A, set
the IP address and complete initial setup as described in Appendix F,
Table F-1.
Selecting Test Equipment
Other Than Agilent E7495A
Open the LMF Options window from the Tools > Options menu list to
select test equipment automatically (using the autodetect feature) or
manually.
Serial Connection and Network Connection tabs are provided in the
LMF Options window to specify the test equipment connection method.
The Serial Connection tab is used when the test equipment items are
connected directly to the LMF computer through a GPIB box (normal
setup). The Network Connection tab is used when the test equipment is
to be connected remotely through a network connection.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
3-68
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Set Calibration
– continued
S Test equipment is correctly connected and turned on.
S GPIB addresses set in the test equipment have been verified as correct
using the applicable procedures in Appendix F.
S CDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to
the GPIB box.
Selecting Test Equipment
Test equipment may be selected either manually with operator input or
automatically using the LMF autodetect feature.
Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab –
Test equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the test
equipment is connected. The LMF does not check to see if the test
equipment is actually detected for manual specification. Follow the
procedure in Table 3-24 to select test equipment manually.
Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab
n Step
Action
From the Tools menu, select Options.
The LMF Options window appears.
Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).
Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.
NOTE
GPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any address in that range, but
the numbers in the GPIB address boxes must match the addresses of the test equipment.
Motorola recommends using 1 for a CDMA signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18 for a
CDMA analyzer. To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the test equipment,
refer to Appendix F.
Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box.
Recommended Addresses
1 = CDMA Signal generator
13 = Power Meter
18 = CDMA Analyzer
Click on Apply. (The button darkens until the selection has been committed.)
NOTE
With manual selection, the LMF does not detect the test equipment to see if it is connected and
communicating with the LMF.
To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB address of the test equipment, refer to Appendix
NO TAG.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-69
Test Set Calibration
– continued
Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab
n Step
Action
Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window.
Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in Serial Connection Tab –
When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the LMF
examines which test equipment items are actually communicating with
the LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-25 to use the auto-detect
feature.
Table 3-25: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect
n Step
Action
From the Tools menu, select Options.
The LMF Options window appears.
Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
Click on Auto–Detection (if not enabled).
NOTE
GPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any address in that range, but
the numbers in the GPIB address to search box must match the addresses of the test equipment.
Motorola recommends using 1 for a CDMA signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18 for a
CDMA analyzer. To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the test equipment,
refer to Appendix NO TAG.
Type the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).
NOTE
When both a power meter and an analyzer are selected, the LMF uses the first item that is capable
of performing the test and is listed in the GPIB addresses to search box for RF power
measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a CDMA signal generator is normally 1, the
address for a power meter is normally 13, and the address for a CDMA analyzer is normally 18. If
1,13,18 is included in the GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) is used for RF
power measurements. When the test equipment items are manually selected, the CDMA analyzer
is used only if a power meter is not selected.
Click on Apply.
NOTE
The button darkens until the selection has been committed. A check mark appears in the Manual
Configuration section for detected test equipment items.
3-70
Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Set Calibration
– continued
Detecting Test Equipment
When Using Agilent E7495A
Be sure that no other equipment is connected to the LMF. The Agilent
E7495A must be connected to the LAN to detect it. Then perform the
procedures described in Appendix F, Table F-1, Table F-2, and
Table F-3.
Calibrating Test Equipment
The calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement level
of the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.
If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected, only the power
meter is zeroed.
NOTE
The Agilent E4406A transmitter tester does not support
power measurement level zeroing. Refer to the Equipment
Calibration section of Appendix F for E4406A calibration.
Prerequisites
S LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to the
GPIB box.
S Test equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for tests
that are to be run.
S Test equipment has been selected in the LMF (Table 3-24 or
Table 3-25).
Calibrating test equipment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the test equipment.
Table 3-26: Test Equipment Calibration
n Step
Action
From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment
from the pull–down menu. A Directions window is
displayed.
Follow the directions provided.
Click on Continue to close the Directions window and
start the calibration process. A status report window is
displayed.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Calibrating Cables Overview
The cable calibration function measures the loss (in dB) for the TX and
RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer is used to
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-71
Test Set Calibration
– continued
measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cable configuration and
RX cable configuration). The cable calibration consists of the following:
S Measuring the loss of a short cable – This is required to compensate
for any measurement error of the analyzer. The short cable (used only
for the calibration process) is used in series with both the TX and RX
cable configuration when measuring. The measured loss of the short
cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX cable
configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RX cable
configurations. The result is then adjusted out of both the TX and RX
measurements to compensate for the measured loss.
S Measuring the short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss –
The RX cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable
with type-N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX
port of the test equipment.
S Measuring the short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss –
The TX cable configuration normally consists of two coax cables with
type-N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and an additional
attenuator (if required by the specified BTS). The total loss of the path
loss of the TX cable configuration must be as required for the BTS
(normally 30 or 50 dB).
Calibrate Test Cabling using
Communications System
Analyzer
Cable Calibration is used to calibrate both TX and RX test cables.
Appendix F covers the procedures for manual cable calibration.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
S One of the following:
– LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to the
GPIB box
– For E7495A, the LMF computer network card and the E7495 are
connected to the Ethernet hub (Appendix NO TAG, Agilent
E7495A Test Equipment Setup section, Connections subsection)
S Test equipment is turned on and has warmed up for at least 60
minutes.
S Test equipment has been selected in the LMF (Table 3-24, Table 3-25,
or Table F-2)
Calibrating cables
Refer to Figure 3-13 or Figure 3-14 and follow the procedure in
Table 3-27 to calibrate the test cable configurations.
Table 3-27: Cable Calibration
n Step
3-72
Action
From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration. A Cable
Calibration window is displayed.
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Set Calibration
– continued
Table 3-27: Cable Calibration
n Step
Action
Enter the channel number(s) in the Channels box.
NOTE
Multiple channel numbers must be separated with a
comma and no space (i.e.; 200,800). When two or more
channel numbers are entered, the cables are calibrated for
each channel. Interpolation is accomplished for other
channels as required for TX calibration.
In the Cable Calibration pick list select one of the
following:
– TX and RX Cable Cal
– TX Cable Cal
– RX Cable Cal
Click OK and follow the direction displayed for each
step. A status report window displays the results of the
cable calibration.
Calibrate Test Cabling Using
Signal Generator & Spectrum
Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 3-28 to calibrate the TX/Duplexed RX
cables using a signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to
Figure 3-24, if required. Follow the procedure in Table 3-29 to calibrate
the Non–Duplexed RX cables using the signal generator and spectrum
analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-25, if required.
TX and Duplexed RX Cable Calibration
Table 3-28: Calibrating TX and Duplexed RX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
n Step
Action
Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.
Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of 869–894 MHz.
Use a spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-24, A) and record the
value.
Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point B, (as shown in the lower right portion of the
diagram) to measure cable output at customer frequency of 869–894 MHz. Record the value at
point B.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-73
Test Set Calibration
– continued
Table 3-28: Calibrating TX and Duplexed RX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
n Step
Action
Calibration factor = A – B. Example:
Cal = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dB
NOTE
The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is
completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures
use the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-24: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX BLO and TX ATP Tests
(using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
40W NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO
THE TX PORTS DURING TX BAY LEVEL
OFFSET TEST AND TX ATP TESTS.
50 OHM
TERMINATION
Spectrum
Analyzer
ONE 20DB 20 W IN
LINE ATTENUATOR
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
SHORT TEST CABLE
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE HP8481A POWER
SENSOR DURING TX BAY LEVEL OFFSET TEST AND TO THE
PCS INTERFACE BOX INPUT PORT DURING TX ATP TESTS.
Signal
Generator
CABLE FROM 20 DB @ 20W ATTENUATOR TO THE
PCS INTERFACE OR THE HP8481A POWER SENSOR.
FW00293
Non-Duplexed RX Cable Calibration
Table 3-29: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
n Step
3-74
Action
Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal
Generator.
Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of 824–849 MHz.
Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-25, A) and record the
value for A.
Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram to measure the output at the
customer’s RX frequency of 824–849 MHz. Record the value at point B.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Set Calibration
– continued
Table 3-29: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
n Step
Action
Calibration factor = A – B. Example:
Cal = –12 dBm – (–14 dBm) = 2 dBm
NOTE
The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is
completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures
use the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-25: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test
(using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
Signal
Generator
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
CONNECTION TO THE HP PCS
INTERFACE OUTPUT PORT
DURING RX MEASUREMENTS.
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT TEST
CABLE
CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTS
DURING RX MEASUREMENTS.
Setting Cable Loss Values
BULLET
CONNECTOR
LON
cable
FW00294
Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations are
normally set by accomplishing cable calibration using the applicable test
equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cable loss files. The
cable loss values can also be set/changed manually. Follow the procedure
in Table 3-30 to set cable loss values.
CAUTION
If cable calibration was performed without using the LMF,
cable loss values must be manually entered in the LMF
database. Failure to do this will result in inaccurate BTS
calibration and reduced site performance.
Prerequisites
S Logged into the BTS
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-75
Test Set Calibration
– continued
Table 3-30: Setting Cable Loss Values
n Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit > Cable Loss.
In the data entry pop–up window, select TX Cable Loss or RX Cable Loss.
To add a new channel number, click on the Add Row button, then click in the Channel # and
Loss (dBm) columns and enter the desired values.
To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
To save displayed values, click on the Save button.
To exit the window, click on the Dismiss button.
Values entered/changed after the Save button was used are not saved.
NOTE
S If cable loss values exist for two different channels, the LMF will interpolate for all other
channels.
S Entered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. Logging out and logging in
again is not necessary.
Setting Coupler Loss Values
If an in–service coupler is installed, the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB) must
be manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX calibration
and audit calculations and RX FER Test. Follow the procedure in
Table 3-31 to set coupler loss values.
Prerequisites
S Logged into the BTS.
Table 3-31: Setting Coupler Loss Value
n Step
Action
Click on the Util menu.
Select Edit > Coupler Loss.
In the data entry pop–up window, select one of the
following:
– TX Coupler Loss
– RX Coupler Loss.
Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has
a coupler and enter the appropriate value.
. . . continued on next page
3-76
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Set Calibration
– continued
Table 3-31: Setting Coupler Loss Value
n Step
Action
To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed
and change the value.
Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window.
Values entered/changed after the Save button was used
are not saved.
NOTE
S The In–Service Calibration check box in the
Tools > Options > BTS Options tab must checked
before entered coupler loss values are used by the TX
calibration and audit functions or RX FER test.
S Entered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are
saved. Logging out and logging in again is not
necessary.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-77
Bay Level Offset Calibration
Introduction
Bay Level Offset (BLO) calibration is the central activity of the
optimization process. BLO calibration compensates for normal
equipment variations within the BTS RF paths and assures the correct
transmit power is available at the BTS antenna connectors to meet site
performance requirements.
RF Path Bay Level Offset
Calibration
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX
slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database calibration
table in the LMF. The BLOs are subsequently downloaded to each BBX.
For starter frames, each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port and
terminates at a backplane BBX slot. Each transmit path starts at a BBX
backplane slot, travels through the Power Amplifier (PA), and terminates
at a BTS TX antenna port.
For expansion frames each receive path starts at the BTS RX port of the
cell site starter frame, travels through the frame-to-frame expansion
cable, and terminates at a backplane BBX slot of the expansion frame.
The transmit path starts at a BBX backplane slot of the expansion frame,
travels though the PA, and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port of the
same expansion frame.
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX
slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database. Each
transmit path starts at a C–CCP shelf backplane BBX slot, travels
through the PA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX path
calibration is performed, the RX path BLO is automatically set to the
default value.
At omni sites, BBX slots 1 and 13 (redundant) are tested. At sector sites,
BBX slots 1 through 12, and 13 (redundant) are tested. Only those slots
(sectors) actually equipped in the current CDF or NEC file are tested,
regardless of physical BBX board installation in the slot.
When to Calibrate BLOs
Calibration of BLOs is required:
S After initial BTS installation
S Once each year
S After replacing any of the following components or associated
interconnecting RF cabling:
– BBX board
– C–CCP shelf
– MCIO card
– MCIO to Power Amplifier backplane RF cable
– Parallel Linear Amplifier Combiner
3-78
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Bay Level Offset Calibration
– continued
– Power Amplifier
– TX filter
– Enhanced Trunking Module (ETM)
– TX thru-port cable to the top of frame
TX Path Calibration
The TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and the
first order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper function
of each RF path is verified during calibration. The external test
equipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector you must first verify that there are no
CDMA channels keyed. Have the OMC–R place the sector
assigned to the PA under test OOS. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
CAUTION
Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while
handling any circuit card/module. If this is not done, there
is a high probability that the card/module could be
damaged by ESD.
NOTE
At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of
each CCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated
with BBX boards), move BBX boards from shelves
currently not under test and install them into the empty
BBX slots of the shelf currently being tested to insure that
all BBX TX paths are tested.
This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites that
are due for periodic optimization.
Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the correct
BBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as required to include
BBX slots not currently equipped (per Systems
Engineering documentation).
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-79
Bay Level Offset Calibration
– continued
BLO Calibration Data File
During the calibration process, the LMF creates a bts–#.cal
calibration (BLO) offset data file (CAL file) in the bts–# folder. After
calibration has been completed, this offset data must be downloaded to
the BBXs using the LMF Download BLO function. An explanation of
the file is shown below.
NOTE
Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends printing a
hard copy of a CAL file and refer to it for the following
descriptions.
The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (a
slot Block).
Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX slots. Slot 20
contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX. Each BBX slot
header block contains:
S A creation Date and Time – broken down into separate parameters of
createMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.
S The number of calibration entries – fixed at 720 entries corresponding
to 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header and
actual calibration data.
S The calibration data for a BBX is organized as a large flat array. The
array is organized by branch, sector, and calibration point.
– The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch the
contained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, main
receive and diversity receive offsets as follows:
Table 3-32: BLO BTS.cal File Array Assignments
Range
Assignment
C[1]–C[240]
Transmit
C[241]–C[480]
Main Receive
C[481]–C[720]
Diversity Receive
– The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Configurations
supported are Omni, 3–sector or 6–sector.
3-80
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Bay Level Offset Calibration
– continued
Table 3-33: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)
BBX
Sectorization
TX
RX
RX Diversity
Slot[1] (Primary BBXs 1 through 12)
1 (Omni)
6 Sector,
1st
Carrier
10
11
12
6 Sector,
2nd
Carrier
3–Sector,
1st
C i
Carrier
3–Sector,
3rd
C i
Carrier
3–Sector,
2nd
C i
Carrier
3–Sector,
4th
C i
Carrier
C[1]–C[20]
C[241]–C[260]
C[481]–C[500]
C[21]–C[40]
C[261]–C[280]
C[501]–C[520]
C[41]–C[60]
C[281]–C[300]
C[521]–C[540]
C[61]–C[80]
C[301]–C[320]
C[541]–C[560]
C[81]–C[100]
C[321]–C[340]
C[561]–C[580]
C[101]–C[120]
C[341]–C[360]
C[581]–C[600]
C[121]–C[140]
C[361]–C[380]
C[601]–C[620]
C[141]–C[160]
C[381]–C[400]
C[621]–C[640]
C[161]–C[180]
C[401]–C[420]
C[641]–C[660]
C[181]–C[200]
C[421]–C[440]
C[661]–C[680]
C[201]–C[220]
C[441]–C[460]
C[681]–C[700]
C[221]–C[240]
C[461]–C[480]
C[701]–C[720]
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-81
Bay Level Offset Calibration
– continued
Table 3-33: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)
BBX
Sectorization
TX
RX
RX Diversity
C[1]–C[20]
C[241]–C[260]
C[481]–C[500]
C[21]–C[40]
C[261]–C[280]
C[501]–C[520]
C[41]–C[60]
C[281]–C[300]
C[521]–C[540]
C[61]–C[80]
C[301]–C[320]
C[541]–C[560]
C[81]–C[100]
C[321]–C[340]
C[561]–C[580]
C[101]–C[120]
C[341]–C[360]
C[581]–C[600]
C[121]–C[140]
C[361]–C[380]
C[601]–C[620]
C[141]–C[160]
C[381]–C[400]
C[621]–C[640]
C[161]–C[180]
C[401]–C[420]
C[641]–C[660]
C[181]–C[200]
C[421]–C[440]
C[661]–C[680]
C[201]–C[220]
C[441]–C[460]
C[681]–C[700]
C[221]–C[240]
C[461]–C[480]
C[701]–C[720]
Slot[20] (Redundant BBX–13)
1 (Omni)
6 Sector,
1st
Carrier
10
11
12
6 Sector,
2nd
Carrier
3–Sector,
1st
C i
Carrier
3–Sector,
3rd
C i
Carrier
3–Sector,
2nd
C i
Carrier
3–Sector,
4th
Carrier
S Ten calibration points per sector are supported for each branch. Two
entries are required for each calibration point:
1. The first value (all odd entries) identifies the CDMA channel
(frequency) where the BLO is measured.
2. The second value (all even entries) is the power set level
(PwrLvlAdj). The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from 2500 to
27500 (2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500 corresponds
to +125 dBm).
S The 20 calibration entries for each sector/branch combination must be
stored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points
(frequencies) are calibrated, data for the highest frequency calibrated
is repeated to fill out the remainder of the 10 points.
Example:
C[1]=384,
odd cal entry
= 1 ‘‘calibration point”
C[2]=19102, even cal entry
C[3]=777,
C[4]=19086,
C[19]=777,
C[20]=19086, (Since only two frequencies were calibrated, data for
this one, the highest, is repeated for the last eight
calibration points of the sector/branch)
S When the BBX is loaded with data, the CAL file data for the BBX is
downloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the CAL file.
TxCal data is sent first, C[1] – C[240]. Sector 1’s ten calibration
points are sent (C[1] – C[20]) followed by sector 2’s ten calibration
3-82
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Bay Level Offset Calibration
– continued
points (C[21] – C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next (C[241] –
C[480]), followed by the RxDCal data (C[481] – C[720]).
S Temperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for each
set.
Test Equipment Set-up for
RF Path Calibration
Follow the procedure in Table 3-34 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-34: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration)
n Step
Action
Verify the GPIB controller is properly connected and turned on (does not apply to
the Agilent E7495A).
! CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must
be via the 30 dB directional coupler.
If it has not already been done, connect the LMF computer to the BTS LAN A
connector on the BTS. Refer to the procedure in Table 3–2.
S If required, calibrate the test equipment using the procedure in Table 3-26.
S Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-15 throug Figure 3-17.
Transmit (TX) Path Calibration
Description
The assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the top
of the frame) for transmit calibration are derived from the site CDF files.
For each BBX, the channel frequency is specified in the [CdmaChans]
in the cbsc–#.cdf file and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwr
CDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX (located
under the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF file
parameter).
NOTE
If both the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf or
NECB*bts#.xml and NECJ*bts#.xml files are current,
all information will be correct on the LMF. If not, the
carrier and channel will have to be set for each test.
The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within "0.5
dB of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than
the value set in the “TX Nominal offset” tolerance.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-83
Bay Level Offset Calibration
– continued
Transmit (TX) Bay Level Offset (BLO) Specifications –
SC4812T–MC TX BLO specifications for different BTS sector
configurations are as follows:
Table 3-35: Transmit (TX) Bay Level Offset (BLO) Specification
Single Sided
Double Sided
800 MHz 3–Sector
> 35dB
40dB +/– 5dB
800 MHz 6–Sector
> 38dB
43dB +/– 5dB
1.9 GHz 3–Sector
> 30dB
35dB +/– 5dB
1.9 GHz 6–Sector
> 33dB
38dB +/– 5dB
To set the expected values see Table 3-36.
TX Calibration and the LMF
The LMF Tests > TX > TX Calibration... and Tests > All Cal/Audit...
selections perform TX BLO calibration testing for installed BBX(s). The
All Cal/Audit... selection initiates a series of actions to perform TX
calibration, and, if calibration is successful, download BLO and perform
TX audit. The TX Calibration... selection performs only TX
calibration. When TX Calibration... is used, BLO download and TX
audit must be performed as separate activities. The CDMA Test
Parameters window which opens when TX Calibration... or All
Cal/Audit... is selected contains several user–selectable features which
are described in the following subsections.
Rate Set Drop–down Pick List
The Rate Set drop–down box is enabled if at least one MCC card is
selected for the test. The available options for TX tests are 1 = 9600, and
3 = 9600 1X. Option 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the
test. The available transfer rate options for RX tests are 1 = 9600 and
2 = 14400. Option 2 is only available if no 1X cards are selected.
Verify BLO
In both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a Verify
BLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TX
calibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or All
Cal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared to
a standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,
additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additional
change in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failure
and, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either the
Verify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path losses
should be added into each applicable sector using the
Util > Edit > TX Coupler Loss... function.
3-84
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Bay Level Offset Calibration
– continued
Single–sided BLO Checkbox
Another option that appears in the pull–down menu is Single–sided
BLO. Normally valid BLO values are some value plus–or–minus some
offset. The ranges currently used for calibration are wider than necessary
to accommodate the redundant BBX. The lower half of the allowable
range is where non–redundant BBXs should function. Single–sided BLO
spec is >35dB. Double–sided BLO spec is 40+5dB. To get the more
stringent conditions, the operator checks Single–sided BLO when
calibrating non-redundant transceivers. Single–sided BLO carries the
likelihood of more failures. This option should only be used by
experienced CFEs.
The Tests > TX > TX Calibration... menu window has a Test Pattern
pull–down menu. This menu has the following choices:
S Pilot (default) – performs tests using a pilot signal only. This pattern
should be used when running in–service tests. It only requires a BBX
to do the test.
S Standard – performs the tests using pilot, synch, paging and six
traffic channels. This pattern should be used on all non–in–service
tests. Standard requires a BBX and an MCC. Standard uses gain
values specified by the IS97 standard.
S CDFPilot –performs the tests using the pilot signal, however, the gain
is specified in the CDF file. Advanced users may use CDFPilot to
generate a Pilot pattern using the value specified by the PilotGain
parameter in the CDF file instead of a pre–determined value.
S CDF – performs the tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic
channels, however, the gain for the channel elements is specified in
the CDF file. Advanced users may use CDF to generate a standard
pattern. Instead of using the values specified by IS97, the settings for
the following CDF parameters are used:
– PilotGain
– PchGain
– SchGain
– NomGain1Way
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-85
Bay Level Offset Calibration
– continued
TX Calibration
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
CAUTION
Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while
handling any circuit card or module. If this is not done,
there is a high probability that the card or module could be
damaged by ESD.
3-86
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
TX BLO Calibration for MC
Overview
LMF software release described on page NO TAG may be used to
calibrate the Multicarrier trunked BTS running Software Release
R2.16.4.1 circuit or packet software. These unique procedures are
necessary due to the fact that the SC4812T–MC requires all equipped
PAs to be enabled during TX testing.
TX BLO is obtained with BBXs-under-test having pilot gain set at 262
LSB, while BBXs-not-under–test are keyed at low transmit power
(recommended pilot gain of 127 LSB and XCVR Power Gain set of –25
dBm).
The following procedure assumes that the SC4812T–MC frame is
equipped with 4 carriers and all modules have appropriate software
downloaded. The tasks required are:
Set-up for TX Calibration
TX Calibration
Download TX BLO Data
Copy TX BLO data for CBSC/OMCR
Set-up for TX Calibration
Table 3-36: Initial Set-up for Multicarrier TX Calibration
n Step
Action
On the LMF computer, delete the existing calibration file
(if any) from the BTS folder located at :\ TX Nominal
Offset.
– Change the value based on the BTS frequency band
and configuration in Table 3-35
Download the data, which includes BLO values, to all the
BBXs. From the Device menu, select Download > Data
NOTE
Terminate all sector outputs on the frame, since more than
one sector will be keyed during the calibration procedure.
TX Calibration
Follow the procedures in Table 3-37 to perform TX Calibration. Be sure
to follow the primary If performing TX Calibration option in Step 2a.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-87
TX BLO Calibration for MC
– continued
Table 3-37: Procedure for TX Calibration and TX Audit
n Step
Action
! CAUTION
1. This procedure will not work on an SC4812T–MC BTS operating
with Software Release 2.16.4.0 and earlier. To calibrate an
SC4812T–MC BTS operating on these earlier releases refer to the
manual offset calibration procedure in 1X SC4812T–MC BTS
Optimization/ATP; 68P09259A07.
2. This procedure requires the use of LMF application software
version 2.16.4.0.09 or later.
Select the BBXs for the carrier to be calibrated and the
BBX–R by clicking on each card.
Perform BLO calibration or TX audit by doing the
following:
2a
– Perform one of the following:
–– If performing TX Calibration: Click Tests in
the BTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Calibration from the pull–down menus.
–– If performing TX Audit: Click Tests in the
BTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Audit from
the pull–down menus.
2b
– Select the carrier’s channel number from those
displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
– Select test to perform as TX Cal.
2c
2d
2e
– Enter the selected carrier’s XCVR gain value of 40
(dBm).
– In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use
as Pilot.
–– The LMF will automatically key the designated
BBX and ask the operator to move the test
equipment cable to appropriate TX path.
Download BLO to all the calibrated BBXs. (See
Table 3-38 for details).
Save the carrier’s TX BLO calibration results.
Download TX BLO Data
Select all BBXs including the BBXR. From the Device menu, select
BBX >Download >BLO.
Copy TX BLO data for
CBSC/OMCR
Follow the procedure described in Create Cal file (see Table 3-39).
3-88
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
TX Calibration Audit
Introduction
NOTE
RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data
download to BBXs must have been successfully completed
prior to performing the calibration audit.
The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation
and storage of the BLO calibration offsets. The calibration audit
procedure measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path at
the site. In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the
success or failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is
used.
WARNING
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for a
BBX(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output
connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
NOTE
All PAs must be INS during any TX testing.
CSM–1, GLIs, and BBXs have correct code load and data load.
Primary CSM and MGLI are INS.
All BBXs are OOS_RAM.
Test equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
S LMF is logged into the BTS.
Test Procedure
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-15 or Figure 3-16.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-37 using the If performing TX Audit
alternate Step 1 to perform the BTS TX Path Audit test.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-89
TX Calibration Audit
– continued
Download BLO Procedure
After a successful TX path calibration, download the BLO calibration
file data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from the CAL file for the
BTS and downloaded to the selected BBX devices.
NOTE
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this
procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is
downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
S BBXs being downloaded are OOS–RAM (yellow).
S TX calibration is successfully completed.
Test Procedure
Follow the procedure in Table 3-38 to download the BLO data to the
BBXs.
Table 3-38: Download BLO
n Step
Action
Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.
Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select
Download > BLO from the pull–down menus. A status
report window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is
downloaded.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Create CAL File
After downloading BLO data to the BBXs, the BLO data must also be
saved to a CAL file in the BTS folder on the LMF computer platform.
The CAL file must be created or updated so it can be transferred to the
OMC–R. If no CAL file is stored in the BTS folder (such as after the
first–time calibration of a new BTS), the Create Cal File function gets
the BLO data from the BBXs, creates the CAL file, and stores the BLO
data in it. If the CAL file already exists in the BTS folder, this function
will update it with the new BLO data. Note the following:
S Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted) BBXs.
3-90
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
TX Calibration Audit
– continued
CAUTION
Motorola does not encourage the user to edit the CAL file
as this action can cause interface problems between the
BTS and the LMF. To manually edit the CAL file, the
LMF must first be logged out of the BTS. If the CAL file
is manually edited and then the Create Cal File function is
run, the edited information is lost.
Prerequisites
Before running this procedure, the following should be done:
S LMF is logged into the BTS.
S BBXs are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded.
Creating a CAL File
Table 3-39: Create CAL File
n Step
Action
Select the applicable BBXs.
NOTE
The CAL file is only updated for the selected BBXs.
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Create Cal File menu item.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
Click OK to close the status report window.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-91
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
Objective
This section tests the redundancy options that could be included in the
cell site. These tests verify, under a fault condition, that all modules
equipped with redundancy switch operations to their redundant partner
and resume operation. An example would be to pull the currently active
CSM and verify the standby CSM takes over distribution of the CDMA
reference signal.
Redundancy covers many BTS modules. Confirm the redundant options
included in the BTS, and proceed as required. If the BTS has only basic
power supply redundancy, the tests and procedures detailed in the
following tables should be bypassed.
S Table 3-42. Miscellaneous Alarm Tests (BTS Frame)
S Table 3-43. BBX Redundancy Tests (BTS Frame)
S Table 3-44. CSM, GPS, and HSO Redundancy Alarm Tests
S Table 3-45. MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test
During redundancy verification of the test, alarms reported by the master
GLI (displayed via the alarm monitor) will also be verified/noted.
Test Equipment
The following pieces of test equipment are required to perform this test:
S LMF
S Communications Test Set
Redundancy/Alarm Test
Perform each of the following tests to verify BTS redundancy and to
confirm all alarms are received and reported by the BTS equipment. The
procedures should be performed on the following modules/boards:
S Power supply/converter modules in all frames
S Distribution shelf modules in the BTS frame
S C–CCP shelf modules in the BTS frame (except MCCs)
S PA modules in the BTS frame
S AMR Customer defined input/output tests
Test Equipment Setup
Follow the procedure in Table 3-40 to set up test equipment:
NOTE
All alarm tests are preformed using TX antenna 1
Table 3-40: Test Equipment Setup for Redundancy/Alarm Tests
3-92
Step
Action
Interface the LMF computer to the BTS LAN A connector on
the BTS frame (refer to Table 3-5, page 3-15).
Login to the BTS.
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
– continued
Table 3-40: Test Equipment Setup for Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Step
Action
Set up test equipment for TX Calibration at TXOUT1 (see
Table 3-5).
NOTE
If site is not equipped for redundancy, remove all GLI and
BBX boards installed in any redundant slot positions at this
time.
Display the alarm monitor by selecting Util>Alarm Monitor.
Unequip all customer defined AMR alarms reported via the
AMR Alarm connector (A & B) by clicking on MGLI, then
selecting Device>Set Alarm Relays>Unequipped.
NOTE
During configuration of MGLI alarm reporting, spurious
alarms may report. Allow the BTS to stabilize for 10 seconds.
If any alarms are actively being reported after the BTS has
stabilized, determine the cause before proceeding further.
Power Supply Redundancy
Follow the steps in Table 3-41 to verify redundancy of the power supply
modules. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via the alarm
monitor) are also verified.
Table 3-41: Power Supply/Converter Redundancy (BTS Frame)
Step
Action
Select the BBX–1 (highlight) and from the pulldown menu select:
Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Redundant Sector>Carrier–#–1–1
Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Only>Carrier–#–1-1
Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Gain>Carrier–#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 262
Select (highlight) BBX–1 and from the pulldown menu select Device>BBX/MAWI>Key.
Set XCVR gain to 40 and enter the correct XCVR channel number.
Remove PS–1 from the power distribution shelf (see Figure 3-26).
– Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
– Verify no other modules went OOS.
Re-install PS–1.
Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for PS–2 and PS–3.
Verify that all PWR/ALM LEDs are GREEN.
Select BBX-1 and Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-93
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
– continued
MPC/EMPC–1
MPC/EMPC–2
Switch
BBX–12
BBX–11
BBX–10
BBX–9
BBX–8
BBX–7
MCC–12
MCC–11
MCC–10
MCC–9
MCC–8
MCC–7
GLI–2
NOTE: MCCs may be
MCC24Es, MCC8Es, or
MCC–1Xs. GLIs may be
GLI2s or GLI3s.
AMR–2
38 mm Filler Panel
CCD–2
CSM–2
CCD–1
MCIO
BBX–6
BBX–R
BBX–5
BBX–4
BBX–3
BBX–2
BBX–1
MCC–6
MCC–5
MCC–4
MCC–3
MCC–2
GLI–1
MCC–1
AMR–1
PS–3
PS–2
PS–1
CSM–1
HSO/LFR
19 mm Filler Panel
Figure 3-26: C–CCP Shelf
ti-CDMA-WP-00037-v01-ildoc-ftw
Miscellaneous
Alarm/Redundancy Tests
Follow steps in Table 3-42 to verify that alarms reported by the master
GLI are displayed via the alarm monitor if a BTS frame module failure
occurs.
Table 3-42: Miscellaneous Alarm Tests
Step
Action
Select Util>Alarm Monitor to display the alarm monitor window.
Perform the following to verify fan module alarms:
• Unseat a fan module (see Figure 3-27).
• Observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).
• Replace fan module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.
• Repeat for all other fan modules in the BTS frame.
NOTE
Follow Step 3 for Starter Frames and Step 4 for Expansion Frames.
Starter Frames Only: Perform the following to verify MPC module alarms.
• Unseat MPC modules (see Figure 3-26) one at a time.
• Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
• Replace the MPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports the alarm clears.
3-94
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
– continued
Table 3-42: Miscellaneous Alarm Tests
Step
Action
Expansion Frames Only: Perform the following to verify EMPC module alarms.
• Unseat EMPC modules (see Figure 3-26) one at a time
• Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
• Replace the EMPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.
If equipped with AMR redundancy, perform the following to verify AMR module redundancy/alarms.
• Unseat AMR 2 (see Figure 3-26).
• Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).
• Repeat Steps 1, 2 and 3 (starter frame) or Steps 1, 2 and 4 (expansion frame).
• Replace the AMR module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.
• Unseat AMR 1; observe alarm message was reported via MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).
• Replace the AMR module and verify the LMF reports the alarm has cleared.
NOTE
All PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at the completion of this test.
Figure 3-27: Fan Modules
LATCHES
ti-CDMA-WP-00139-v01-ildoc-ftw
FAN MODULES
BBX Redundancy
Follow the steps in Table 3-43 to verify redundancy of the BBXs in the
C–CCP shelf. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via the
alarm monitor) are also verified. This test can be repeated for additional
sectors at the customer’s discretion.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-95
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
– continued
Table 3-43: BBX Redundancy Alarms
Step
Action
n WARNING
Any BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TX
output assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so could
result in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.
Enable the primary, then the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX and
Device>BBX/MAWI>Key.
Observe that primary BBXs key up, and a carrier is present at each respective frequency.
Remove the primary BBX.
Observe a carrier is still present. The Redundant BBX is now the active BBX for Antenna 1.
Replace the primary BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.
Re-enable the primary BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at each respective
frequency.
Remove the redundant BBX and observe a carrier is still present.
The Primary BBX is now the active BBX for ANT 1.
Replace the redundant BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.
10
Re-enable the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at each
respective frequency:
11
De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey.
12
Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for additional BBXs/antennas, if equipped.
CSM, GPS, & HSO
Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Follow the procedure in Table 3-44 to verify the manual redundancy of
the CSM, GPS, and HSO boards. Verification of alarms reported is also
covered.
NOTE
DO NOT perform the procedure in Table 3-44, unless the
site is configured with a HSO timebase as a backup for the
GPS.
3-96
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
– continued
Table 3-44: CSM, GPS, & HSO, Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Step
Action
n WARNING
Any BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TX
output assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so could
result in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.
Enable the primary, then the redundant BBXs assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX and
Device>BBX/MAWI>Key.
Disconnect the GPS antenna cable, located on top of the BTS frame. This forces the HSO board
timebase to become the CDMA timing source.
Observe a CDMA timing reference alarm and source change is reported by the alarm monitor.
Allow the HSO to become the active timing source.
S Verify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.
S Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to HSO reference.
S Observe the PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panel are steady GREEN.
Reconnect the GPS antenna cable.
Allow the GPS to become the active timing source.
S Verify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.
S Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer back to the GPS reference.
S Observe the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 1 are steady GREEN.
Disable CSM 1 and enable CSM 2.
S Various CSM source and clock alarms are now reported and the site comes down.
S Alarms clear when the site comes back up.
Allow the CSM 2 board to go INS_ACT.
S Verify the BBXs are dekeyed and OOS, and the MCCs are OOS_RAM.
S Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 2 reference.
S Observe the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 2 front panels are steady GREEN.
NOTE
It can take up to 20 minutes for the CSM to re-establish the GPS link and go INS. MCCs go
OOS_RAM.
Key BBXs 1 and R and observe a carrier is present.
10
Repeat Steps 2 through 6 to verify CSM source redundancy with CSM 2.
NOTE
DO NOT ENABLE the redundant CSM.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-97
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
– continued
Table 3-44: CSM, GPS, & HSO, Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Step
11
Action
Disable CSM 2 and enable CSM 1.
S Various CSM Source and Clock alarms are reported and the site comes down.
S Alarms clear when the site comes back up.
12
De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey.
13
Allow the CSM 1 board to go INS_ACT.
S Verify the BBXs are de-keyed and OOS.
S Verify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 1 reference.
S Observe PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panels are steady GREEN.
14
Disable the primary and redundant BBXs.
MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test
CAUTION
This test can only be performed when the MM path is
established by the MM (not just with LAPD link
connected). Attempting to force the GLIs to “hot swap”
under alarm monitor control, when isolated from the MM,
causes MGLIs to hang up.
Table 3-45: MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test (with MM Connection Established)
Step
Action
NOTE
S This test assumes the alarm monitor is NOT connected to the BTS and the T1/E1 span is connected
and communication is established with the MM.
S BOTH GLIs must be INS before continuing.
Verify the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.
Identify the primary and redundant MGLI pairs.
Pull the MGLI that is currently INS–ACT and has cage control.
Observe the BBX remains GREEN, and the redundant MGLI is now active.
Verify no other modules go OOS due to the transfer of control to the redundant module.
Verify that the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.
Reinstall the MGLI and have the OMCR/CBSC place it back in-service.
Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to verify the other MGLI/GLI board.
3-98
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
– continued
Alarms Testing
Alarm Verification
ALARM connectors provide Customer Defined Alarm Inputs and
Outputs. The customer can connect BTS site alarm input sensors and
output devices to the BTS, thus providing alarm reporting of active
sensors as well controlling output devices.
The SC 4812T is capable of concurrently monitoring 35 input signals.
These inputs are divided between 2 Alarm connectors marked ‘ALARM
A’ and ‘ALARM B’ located at the top of the frame (see Figure 3-28).
The ALARM A connector is always functional; ALARM B is
functional when an AMR module is equipped in the AMR 2 slot in the
distribution shelf. ALARM A port monitors input numbers 1 through
18, while ALARM B port monitors input numbers 19, 20, and 22
through 36 (see Figure 3-29). Alarm 21 is reserved for system use. State
transitions on these input lines are reported to the LMF and OMCR as
MGLI Input Relay alarms.
ALARM A and ALARM B connectors each provide 18 inputs and 8
outputs. If both A and B are functional, 36 inputs and 16 outputs are
available. They may be configured as redundant. The configuration is set
by the CBSC.
Alarm Reporting Display
The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur
after the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,
select Util>Alarm Monitor.
The following buttons are included:
S The Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor, and
Major) selection. The default is all levels. To change the level of
alarms reported click on the Options button and highlight the desired
alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press the  key (for
individual selections) or  key (for a range of selections) while
clicking on the desired levels.
S The Pause button pauses/stops the display of alarms. When the Pause
button is clicked the name of the button changes to Continue. When
the Continue button is clicked, the display of alarms continues.
Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is clicked and
the Continue button is clicked are not displayed.
S The Clear button clears the Alarm Monitor display. New alarms that
occur after the Clear button is clicked are displayed.
S The Dismiss button dismisses/closes the Alarm Monitor display.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-99
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
– continued
Figure 3-28: Alarm Connector Location and
Connector Pin Numbering
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
59
59
60
60
ti-CDMA-WP-00041-v01-ildoc-ftw
Purpose
The following procedures verify the customer defined alarms and relay
contacts are functioning properly. These tests are performed on all AMR
alarms/relays in a sequential manner until all have been verified. Perform
these procedures periodically to ensure the external alarms are reported
properly. Following these procedures ensures continued peak system
performance.
Study the site engineering documents and perform the following tests
only after first verifying that the AMR cabling configuration required to
interconnect the BTS frame with external alarm sensors and/or relays
meet requirements called out in the 1X SC 4812T-MC BTS Hardware
Installation .
NOTE
Motorola highly recommends that you read and understand
this procedure in its entirety before starting this procedure.
Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required to perform these tests:
S LMF
S Alarms Test Box (CGDSCMIS00014) –optional
3-100
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
– continued
NOTE
Abbreviations used in the following figures and tables are
defined as:
S NC = normally closed
NO = normally open
COM or C = common
CDO = Customer Defined (Relay) Output
CDI = Customer Defined (Alarm) Input
Figure 3-29: Figure Title Goes Here
A CDI 18
CDI 1
...
Returns
60
26
60
26
59
25
59
25
Returns
ALARM A
(AMR 1)
B CDI 36
19
...
ALARM B
(AMR 2)
B CDI
FW00302
NOTE
The preferred method to verify alarms is to follow the
Alarms Test Box Procedure in Table 3-46. If not using an
Alarm Test Box, follow the procedure in Table 3-47.
CDI Alarm Input Verification
with Alarms Test Box
Table 3-46 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification using
the Alarm Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed and compare results
with the LMF display.
NOTE
It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The
default delay is 5 seconds. Leave the alarms test box
switches in the new position until the alarms have been
reported.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-101
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
– continued
Table 3-46: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.
Select the MGLI.
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
Click on Normally Open.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector (see Figure 3-28).
Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for
each switch setting.
10
Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported
for each switch setting.
11
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.
12
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.
13
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for each
switch setting
14
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported for each
switch setting.
15
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.
16
Select the MGLI.
17
Click on the Device menu.
18
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
19
Click on Normally Closed. A status report window displays the results of the action.
20
Click OK to close the status report window.
Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.
21
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.
22
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.
Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 18.
23
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.
An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
. . . continued on next page
3-102
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
– continued
Table 3-46: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
24
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.
A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
25
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.
NOTE
Input 21 (pins 29 and 30) on the Alarm B connector is reserved for the Power Supply Modules alarm.
26
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.
A clear alarm should be reported for alarm inputs 19 through 36.
27
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.
An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
28
Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.
A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
29
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.
30
Select the MGLI.
31
Click on the Device menu.
32
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
33
Click on Unequipped.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
34
Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
35
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.
36
Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.
No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.
37
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.
38
Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.
39
Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.
No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.
40
Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.
41
Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file.
CDI Alarm Input Verification
without Alarms Test Box
Table 3-47 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification
without the use of the Alarms Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed
and compare results with the LMF display.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
3-103
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
– continued
NOTE
It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The
default delay is 5 seconds. When shorting alarm pins wait
for the alarm report before removing the short.
Table 3-47: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.
Select the MGLI.
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
Click on Normally Open.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Refer to Figure 3-29 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
NOTE
Input 21 (pins 29 and 30) on the Alarm B connector is reserved for the Power Supply Modules alarm.
Refer to Figure 3-29 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
Select the MGLI.
10
Click on the Device menu.
11
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
12
Click on Normally Closed.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
13
Click on OK to close the status report window.
Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.
14
Refer to Figure 3-29 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
. . . continued on next page
3-104
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
– continued
Table 3-47: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box
Step
Action
NOTE
Input 21 (pins 29 and 30) on the Alarm B connector is reserved for the Power Supply Modules alarm.
15
Refer to NO TAG and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
16
Select the MGLI.
17
Click on the Device menu.
18
Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.
19
Click on Unequipped.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
20
Click on OK to close the status report window.
21
Refer to NO TAG and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins (25–26
through 59–60) together.
No alarms should be displayed.
NOTE
Input 21 (pins 29 and 30) on the Alarm B connector is reserved for the Power Supply Modules alarm.
22
Refer to NO TAG and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
No alarms should be displayed.
23
Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file.
Pin and Signal Information for
Alarm Connectors
Table 3-48 lists the pins, wire color codes, and signal names for Alarms
A and B.
Table 3-48: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors
Wire
Pin Color
Blu/Wht
Wht/Blu
Org/Wht
Wht/Org
Grn/Wht
5/21/04
Alarm A
A CDO1 NC
A CDO1 Com
A CDO1 NO
A CDO2 NC
A CDO2 Com
Signal Name
Alarm B
B CDO9 NC
B CDO9 Com
B CDO9 NO
B CDO10 NC
B CDO10 Com
Wire
Pin Color
Signal Name
Alarm A
Alarm B
31
32
33
34
35
Cust Retn 4
A CDI 4
Cust Retn 5
A CDI 5
Cust Retn 6
Blu/Yel
Yel/Blu
Org/Yel
Yel/Org
Grn/Yel
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
B CDI 22
Cust Retn 22
B CDI 23
Cust Retn 23
B CDI 24
3-105
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
– continued
Table 3-48: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors
Wire
Pin Color
Alarm A
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Wht/Grn
Brn/Wht
Wht/Brn
Slt/Wht
Wht/Slt
Blu/Red
Red/Blu
Org/Red
Red/Org
Grn/Red
Red/Grn
Brn/Red
Red/Brn
Slt/Red
Red/Slt
Blu/Blk
Blk/Blu
Org/Blk
Blk/Org
Grn/Blk
Blk/Grn
Brn/Blk
Blk/Brn
Slt/Blk
A CDO2 NO
A CDO3 NC
A CDO3 Com
A CDO3 NO
A CDO4 NC
A CDO4 Com
A CDO4 NO
A CDO5 NC
A CDO5 Com
A CDO5 NO
A CDO6 NC
A CDO6 Com
A CDO6 NO
A CDO7 NC
A CDO7 Com
A CDO7 NO
A CDO8 NC
A CDO8 Com
A CDO8 NO
Cust Retn 1
A CDI 1
Cust Retn 2
A CDI 2
Cust Retn 3
30
Blk/Slt
A CDI 3
Signal Name
Alarm B
B CDO10 NO
B CDO11 NC
B CDO11 Com
B CDO11 NO
B CDO12 NC
B CDO12 Com
B CDO12 NO
B CDO13 NC
B CDO13 Com
B CDO13 NO
B CDO14 NC
B CDO14 Com
B CDO14 NO
B CDO15 NC
B CDO15 Com
B CDO15 NO
B CDO16 NC
B CDO16 Com
B CDO16 NO
B CDI 19
Cust Retn 19
B CDI 20
Cust Retn 20
B CDI 21
*Pwr Conv Alm
Cust Retn 21
*Pwr Conv Retn
+27V
–48V
+27V
–48V
Wire
Pin Color
Signal Name
Alarm A
Alarm B
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Yel/Grn
Brn/Yel
Yel/Brn
Slt/Yel
Yel/Slt
Blu/Vio
Vio/Blu
Org/Vio
Vio/Blu
Grn/Vio
Vio/Grn
Brn/Vio
Vio/Brn
Slt/Vio
Vio/Slt
Red/Wht
Wht/Red
Blk/Wht
Wht/Blk
Yel/Wht
Wht/Yel
Vio/Wht
Wht/Vio
Blk/Red
A CDI 6
Cust Retn 7
A CDI 7
Cust Retn 8
A CDI 8
Cust Retn 9
A CDI 9
Cust Retn 10
A CDI 10
Cust Retn 11
A CDI 11
Cust Retn 12
A CDI 12
Cust Retn 13
A CDI 13
Cust Retn 14
A CDI 14
Cust Retn 15
A CDI 15
Cust Retn 16
A CDI 16
Cust Retn 17
A CDI 17
Cust Retn 18
Cust Retn 24
B CDI 25
Cust Retn 25
B CDI 26
Cust Retn 26
B CDI 27
Cust Retn 27
B CDI 28
Cust Retn 28
B CDI 29
Cust Retn 29
B CDI 30
Cust Retn 30
B CDI 31
Cust Retn 31
B CDI 32
Cust Retn 32
B CDI 33
Cust Retn 33
B CDI 34
Cust Retn 34
B CDI 35
Cust Retn 35
B CDI 36
60
Red/Blk
A CDI 18
Cust Retn 36
NOTE
*For –48V, reserved for Power Supply Module Alarm signal. NOT for use as CDOs or CDIs.
All Cust Rtrn 1–18 are electronically tied together at the RFMF.
All Cust Rtrn 19–36 are electronically tied together at the RFMF.
CDO = Customer Defined Output; CDI = Customer Defined Input;
NC – normally closed, NO – normally open, Com – common
The “A CDI” numbering is from the LMF/OMCR/CBSC perspective. LMF/OMCR/CBSC starts the numbering at 19
(giving 19 – 36). Actual cable hardware starts the numbering at 0 (giving 0–17)
3-106
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Chapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure
Table of Contents
5/21/04
Guide Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is In This Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–2
Book Catalogs and Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Book Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–3
1–5
Physical Page Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Text Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–6
1–6
1–7
1–9
Frame and Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frames With Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Charts and Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Types In This Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item/Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step/Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–13
1–14
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–16
Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–17
1–17
1–17
1–18
1–19
Map Title Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – TX & RX
Introduction
The Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular Field
Engineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTS
subsystem devices using the Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) and
supported test equipment per the current Cell Site Data File (CDF)
assignment.
The results of these tests (at the option of the operator) are written to a
file that can be printed. All tests are controlled from the LMF platform
using the GPIB interface, therefore, only recommended test equipment
supported by the LMF can be used.
This chapter describes the tests run from the GUI environment, which is
the recommended method. The GUI provides the advantages of
simplifying the LMF user interface, reducing the potential for miskeying
commmands and associated parameters, and speeding up the execution
of complex operations involving multiple command strings. If you feel
the command line interface (CLI) will provide additional insight into the
progress of ATPs and problems that could possibly be encountered, refer
to LMF CLI Commands.
CAUTION
Before performing any tests, use an editor to view the
“CAVEATS” section of the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf
folder for any applicable information.
The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service (OOS)
sectors only.
DO NOT substitute test equipment not supported by the
LMF.
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test set
connections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test
set components, if required.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
4-1
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – TX & RX
– continued
Reduced ATP
NOTE
Equipment has been factory–tested for FCC compliance. If
license–governing bodies require documentation
supporting SITE compliance with regulations, a full ATP
may be necessary. Perform the Reduced ATP only if
reports for the specific BTS site are NOT required.
After downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the CFE
must perform these procedures (minimal recommendation):
S Verify the TX/RX paths by performing TX Calibration, TX Audit and
FER tests.
S Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.
Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to the
Basic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining the
failure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected,
refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix (Table C-3, page
C-4) section to determine the applicable test that must be performed.
In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a forward
link problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform the
additional TX tests for troubleshooting: TX spectral mask, TX rho, and
TX code domain.
Required Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required:
S LMF
S Power meter (used with HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)
S Communications system analyzer
S Signal generator for FER testing (required for all communications
system analyzers for 1X FER)
WARNING
S Before installing any test equipment directly to any
BTS TX OUT connector, verify that there are no
CDMA channels keyed.
S At active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrier
assigned to the PAs under test OOS. Failure to do so
can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment
damage.
NOTE
The test equipment must be re–calibrated before using it to
perform the TX Acceptance Tests.
4-2
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – TX & RX
– continued
ATP Test Prerequisites
NOTE
All PAs must be INS during any TX testing.
Before attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following have been
completed:
BTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).
LMF is logged into the BTS.
CSMs, GLIs, BBXs, and MCCs have correct code load and data load.
Primary CSM, GLI, and MCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).
BBXs are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded.
No BBXs are keyed (transmitting).
S BBXs are OOS_RAM (flashing green).
S Test cables are calibrated.
S Test equipment is connected for ATP tests (see Figure 3-18 through
Figure 3-23).
S Test equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated.
S GPIB is on.
S BTS transmit connectors are properly terminated for the test(s) to be
performed.
WARNING
Before performing the FER, be sure that all PAs are turned
OFF (circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter ports
are properly terminated.
All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATP
tests.
Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily
injury or equipment damage.
TX OUT Connection
NOTE
Many of the acceptance test procedures require taking
measurements at the TX OUT connector. All
measurements will be via the BTS TX OUT connector.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
4-3
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – TX & RX
– continued
ATP Test Options
NOTE
All PAs must INS during any TX testing.
The tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:
S All TX/RX: Executes all the TX and RX tests.
S All TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit line up.
These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, and MCIO cards, the PAs and
passive components including ETMs, (S)PLCs, TX filters, and RF
cables.
S All RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receiver line up.
These include the MPC (for starter frames), EMPC (for expansion
frames), MCIO, BBX, MCC, and GLI cards and the passive
components including RX filters (starter frame only), and RF cables.
S Full Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads the BLO,
and executes the TX audit before running all of the TX and RX tests.
NOTE
The Full Optimization test can be run if you want the TX
path calibrated before all the TX and RX tests are run.
If manual testing has been performed with the HP analyzer,
remove the manual control/system memory card from the
card slot and set the I/O Config to the Talk & Lstn mode
before starting the automated testing.
NOTE
The STOP button can be used to stop the testing process.
Individual Acceptance Tests
The following individual tests can be used to verify the results of
specific tests.
Spectral Purity TX Mask (Primary & Redundant BBX)
This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generated
on each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification with
respect to the assigned CDF file values.
Waveform Quality (rho)
This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digital
waveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in
ANSI–J_STD–019. “Rho” represents the correlation between actual and
perfect CDMA modulation spectrum. A rho value of 1.0000 represents
100% (or perfect correlation).
4-4
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – TX & RX
– continued
Pilot Time Offset
The Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzer
measurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and the
incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Pilot
Gain = 262, PN Offset = 0).
Code Domain Power (Primary & Redundant BBX)
This test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set for
all ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is
done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to
10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”
Walsh channels measures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel
power).
Frame Error Rate
The Frame Error Rate (FER) test verifies RX operation of the entire
CDMA Reverse Link using all equipped MCCs assigned to all
respective sectors/antennas. This test verifies the BTS sensitivity on all
traffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs at
an RF input level of –119 dBm (or –116 dBm if using TMPC).
ATP Test Procedure
Follow the procedure in Table 4-1 to perform any ATP test.
Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure
n Step
Action
Be sure that all prerequisites have been met.
Select the device(s) to be tested.
IMPORTANT! Only one carrier can be tested at a time. All PAs must be INS during testing.
NOTE
If the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting than
the one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with
the new Multi–Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false test
failure.
From the Tests menu, select the test you want to run.
Select the appropriate carrier (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier
pick list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the  or  key while making the selections.
Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
The default channel number displayed is determined by the CdmaChans[n] number in the
cbsc–n.cdf file for the BTS.
If applicable, select Verify BLO (default) or Single–sided BLO.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
4-5
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – TX & RX
– continued
Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure
n Step
Action
NOTE
Single–sided BLO is only used when checking non–redundant transceivers.
If applicable, select a test pattern from the Test Pattern pick list.
NOTE
S Selecting Pilot (default) performs tests using only a pilot signal.
S Selecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels. This
requires an MCC to be selected.
S Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using only a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channel
elements is specified in the CDF file.
S Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels, however, the
gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.
10
Click on the OK button.
The status report window and a Directions pop-up are displayed.
Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
The test results are displayed in the status report window.
Click on Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
11
4-6
Refer to Steps NO TAG through sub-step NO TAG of Table 3-37 to dekey.
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
TX Spectral Purity Trasmit Mask Acceptance Test
Tx Mask Test
This test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX carrier keyed up at a
specific frequency, per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are
performed using the external calibrated test set, controlled by the same
command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 541 for each antenna, and all channel elements
from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using
both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only). BBX power output is set to obtain +40 dBm as
measured at the TX OUT connector (on the BTS directional coupler).
NOTE
TX output power is set to +40 dBm by setting BTS power
level to +33.5 dBm to compensate for 6.5 dB increase from
pilot gain set to 541.
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the
attenuation level of all spurious and IM products in a 30 kHz resolution
bandwidth. With respect to the mean power of the CDMA channel
measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth in dB, verify that results meet
system tolerances at the following test points:
– at least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency
– at least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from center frequency
– at least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequency
– at least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequency
The BBX then de-keys, and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated. See Table 4-1 to perform this test.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
4-7
TX Spectral Purity Trasmit Mask Acceptance Test
– continued
Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display
Mean CDMA Bandwidth
Power Reference
.5 MHz Span/Div
Ampl 10 dB/Div
Center Frequency
Reference
Attenuation level of all
spurious and IM products
with respect to the mean
power of the CDMA channel
+ 1980 kHz
– 1980 kHz
– 900 kHz
+ 900 kHz
– 750 kHz
4-8
+750 kHz
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
FW00282
5/21/04
TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test
Rho Test
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveform
quality of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the
current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all channel elements
from the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up using
both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to
40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on the BTS directional
coupler).
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot
channel element digital waveform quality (rho) in dB, verifying that the
result meets system tolerances:
S Waveform quality (rho) should be w 0.912 (–0.4 dB).
The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then be repeated. See Table 4-1 to perform this
test.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
4-9
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test
Pilot Offset Acceptance Test
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offset
of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current
CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all TCH elements from
the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using both
bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to
40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or
RFDS directional coupler).
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot
Time Offset in µs, verifying results meet system tolerances:
S Pilot Time Offset should be within + 3 µs of the target PT
Offset (0 µs).
The BBX then de-keys, and if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated. See Table 4-1 to perform this test.
4-10
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test
Code Domain Power Test
This test verifies the Code Domain Power/Noise of each BBX carrier
keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment.
All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by
the same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT
connector.
For each sector/antenna under test, the Pilot Gain is set to 262. All MCC
channel elements under test are configured to generate Orthogonal
Channel Noise Source (OCNS) on different odd Walsh codes and to be
assigned a full–rate gain of 81. The maximum number of MCC/CEs to
be tested at any one time is 32 (32 odd Walsh codes). If more than 32
CEs exist, then multiple sets of measurements are made; so all channel
elements are verified on all sectors.
BBX power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT
connector.
You verify the code domain power levels, which have been set for all
ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is
done by verifying that Pilot Power (dBm) minus OCNS Power (dBm) is
equal to 10.2 + 2 dB and that the noise floor of all “OFF” Walsh channels
measures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).
NOTE
When performing this test using the LMF and the MCC is
an MCC8E or MCC24E, the redundant BBX may fail or
show marginal performance. This is due to a timing
mismatch that the LMF does not address. Performing this
test from the CBSC will not have this timing problem.
The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated. Upon completion of the test, OCNS
is disabled on the specified MCC/CE.
NOTE
If using Advantest test equipment, Code Domain Test
MUST be configured in RC–1 mode.
See Table 4-1 to perform this test.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
4-11
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test
– continued
Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
MAX
OCNS
CHANNEL
8.2 dB
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
Active channels
MIN OCNS SPEC.
MIN
OCNS
MaxCHANnoise
NEL
floor
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB SPEC.
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
64
Showing all OCNS Passing
Pilot Channel
PILOT LEVEL
failure – exceeds max
ocns spec. Active channels
8.2 dB
failure – does
not meet min
ocns spec.
12.2 dB
MAX OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS SPEC.
failure – exceeds
max noise floor
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
spec.
< –27 dB
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
...
Indicating Failures
4-12
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
64
FW00283
5/21/04
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test
FER Test
This test verifies the BTS FER on all traffic channel elements currently
configured on all equipped MCCs (full rate at 1% FER) at an RF input
level of –119 dBm [or –116 dBm if using Tower Top
Amplifier (TMPC)]. All tests are performed using the external calibrated
test set as the signal source controlled by the same command. All
measurements are via the LMF.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each TX antenna, and all channel
elements from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed
up, using only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with
pilot channel element only). BBX power output is set to –20 dBm as
measured at the TX OUT connector. The BBX must be keyed to enable
the RX receive circuitry.
The LMF prompts the MCC/CE under test to measure all zero longcode
and provide the FER report on the selected active MCC on the reverse
link for both the main and diversity RX antenna paths, verifying that
results meet the following specification:
S FER returned less than 1% and total frames measured is 1500
All MCC/CEs selected are tested on the specified RX antenna path. The
BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to assign
the applicable redundant BBX to the current RX antenna paths under
test. The test is then repeated. See Table 4-1 to perform this test.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
4-13
Generate an ATP Report
Background
Each time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated to include the
results of the most recent ATP tests if the Save Results button is used to
close the status report window. The ATP report is not updated if the
status reports window is closed using the Dismiss button.
ATP Report
Each time an ATP test is run, a separate report is created for each BTS
and includes the following for each test:
Test name
BBX number
Channel number
Carrier number
Sector number
Upper test limit
Lower test limit
Test result
PASS or FAIL
Description information (if applicable)
Time stamp
Details/Warning information (if applicable)
The report can be printed if the LMF computer is connected to a printer.
Follow the procedure in the Table 4-2 to view and/or print the ATP
report for a BTS.
Table 4-2: Generating an ATP Report
n Step
Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).
Select the desired BTS from the available Base Station
pick list.
Click on the Report button.
Click on a column heading to sort the report.
4-14
Action
– If not desiring a printable file copy, click on the
Dismiss button.
– If requiring a printable file copy, select the desired
file type in the picklist and click on the Save button.
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Chapter 5: Prepare to Leave the Site
Table of Contents
5/21/04
Guide Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is In This Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–2
Book Catalogs and Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Book Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–3
1–5
Physical Page Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Text Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–6
1–6
1–7
1–9
Frame and Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frames With Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Charts and Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Types In This Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item/Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step/Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–13
1–14
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–16
Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–17
1–17
1–17
1–18
1–19
Map Title Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Updating Calibration Data Files
Software Release caveats
Software Release R2.16.4.1 allows the user to load the calibration file
from the LMF directly onto the MGLI. The MGLI will then ftp the new
calibration file to the OMC–R, thereby eliminating the need for the user
to place the calibration file at the OMC–R.
Copy and Load Cal File to to
CBSC
Updated calibration (CAL) file information must be moved from the
LMF Windows environment back to the CBSC, which resides in a Unix
environment. The procedures that follow detail how to move files from
one environment to the other.
Backup CAL Data to a Diskette
The BLO calibration files should be backed up to a diskette (per BTS).
Follow the procedure in Table 5-1 to copy CAL files from a CDMA
LMF computer to a diskette.
Table 5-1: Backup CAL Data to a Diskette
Step
5/21/04
Action
With Windows running on the LMF computer, insert a disk
into Drive A:\.
Launch the Windows Explorer application program from the
Start > Programs menu list.
Select the applicable :\).
With Solaris versions of Unix, create a Unix–formatted
version of the bts–#.cal file in the home directory by
performing the following:
9a
– Type in dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts–#.cal bts–#.cal
and press the Enter key.
Where: # = BTS number for which the CAL file was
created
NOTE
Other versions of Unix do not support the dos2unix
command. In these cases, use the Unix cp (copy) command.
The copied files will contain DOS line feed characters which
must be edited out with a Unix text editor.
10
5-2
Type in ls –l *.cal and press the Enter key. Verify the CAL
files have been copied. Verify all CAL files to be transferred
appear in the displayed listing.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Updating Calibration Data Files
– continued
Table 5-2: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
Step
Action
11
Type eject and press the Enter key.
12
Remove the diskette from the workstation.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5-3
Prepare to Leave the Site
External Test Equipment
Removal
Perform the procedure in Table 5-3 to disconnect the test equipment and
configure the BTS for active service.
Table 5-3: External Test Equipment Removal
Step
Action
Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX
connectors on the top of the frame.
Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed
lines at the top of the frame.
CAUTION
Verify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected to
the correct ports on the frame. Crossed antenna cables will
cause system degradation of call processing.
NOTE
Each module or device can be in any state prior to
downloading. Each module or device will be in an
OOS_RAM state after downloading has completed.
S For all LMF commands, information in italics
represents valid ranges for that command field.
S Only those fields requiring an input will be specified.
Default values for other fields will be assumed.
S For more complete command examples (including
system response details), refer to the CDMA LMF User
Guide.
BTS Site Span Configuration
Verification
Perform the procedure in Table 5-4 to verify the current Span Framing
Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI/GLI boards
in all C–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span should be verified.
5-4
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of the
MGLI MMI port (see Figure 5-1).
Start an MMI communication session with MGLI by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-3 on page 3-11).
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
Verify the span parameter settings for frame format, equalization, and linkspeed for the span to be used
by entering the following at the GLI3> prompt:
config ni current
The system will respond with a display similar to the following:
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A – Default (0–131
Span B – Default (0–131
Span C – Default (0–131
Span D – Default (0–131
Span E – Default (0–131
Span F – Default (0–131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)
Currently, the link is running at the default rate
The actual rate is 0
NOTE
S Defaults for span equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.
S Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.
S There is no need to change from defaults unless the provisioned span configuration requires it.
The span parameter settings in the GLI must match those provisioned in the OMC–R database for the
BTS. If they do not, proceed to Table 5-5 to change the span parameter settings.
Repeat steps 1 through 4 for all remaining GLIs.
Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection
window menu bar, and then Exit from the drop–down menu.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5-5
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Figure 5-1: MGLI/GLI MMI Port Connection
RS–232 CABLE
FROM LMF COM 1
PORT
GLI BOARD
NULL MODEM BOARD
(PART# 8484877P01)
SERIAL CABLE
(P/N 3009786R01)
MMI SERIAL PORT
Set BTS Site Span
Configuration
Perform the procedure in Table 5-5 to configure the Span Framing
Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI/GLI boards
in all C–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span must be configured.
CAUTION
Perform the following procedure ONLY if span
configurations loaded in the MGLI/GLIs do not match
those in the OMC–R data base, AND ONLY when the exact
configuration data is available. Loading incorrect span
configuration data will render the site inoperable.
5-6
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Table 5-5: Set GLI3 Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
If it has not been done, start a GLI3 MMI communication session on the LMF computer as described
in Table 3-10.
At the GLI3> prompt, enter the following:
config ni format
The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni format option
Next available options:
LIST –
option : Span Option
E1_1 : E1_1 – E1 HDB3 CRC4
no TS16
E1_2 : E1_2 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 no TS16
E1_3 : E1_3 – E1 HDB3 CRC4
TS16
E1_4 : E1_4 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 TS16
T1_1 : T1_1 – D4, AMI, No ZCS
T1_2 : T1_2 – ESF, B8ZS
J1_1 : J1_1 – ESF, B8ZS (Japan) – Default
J1_2 : J1_2 – ESF, B8ZS
T1_3 : T1_3 – D4, AMI, ZCS
NOTE
With this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same format.
To set or change the span type, enter the correct option from the list at the entry prompt (>), as shown
in the following example:
> T1_2
NOTE
The entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typed
incorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:
CP: Invalid command
01.061980 00:11’59 MGLI–000–2 INS–ACT BTS–CDMA 16.1.68.00
GLI3>
An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:
The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.
GLI3>
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5-7
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Table 5-5: Set GLI3 Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
If the current MGLI/GLI span rate must be changed, enter the following MMI command:
config ni linkspeed
A response similar to the following will be displayed :
Next available options:
LIST – linkspeed : Span Linkspeed
56K : 56K (default for T1_1 and T1_3 systems)
64K : 64K (default for all other span configurations)
NOTE
With this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same linkspeed.
To set or change the span linkspeed, enter the required option from the list at the entry prompt (>), as
shown in the following example:
> 64K
NOTE
The entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typed
incorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:
CP: Invalid command
01.061980 00:12’04 MGLI–000–2 INS–ACT BTS–CDMA 16.1.68.00
GLI3>
An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:
The value has been programmed.
GLI3>
It will take effect after the next reset.
. . . continued on next page
5-8
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Table 5-5: Set GLI3 Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
If the span equalization must be changed, enter the following MMI command:
config ni equal
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal
Next available options:
LIST –
span : Span
a : Span
b : Span
c : Span
d : Span
e : Span
f : Span
span equal
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5-9
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Table 5-5: Set GLI3 Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
At the entry prompt (>), enter the designator from the list for the span to be changed as shown in the
following example:
> a
A response similar to the following will be displayed :
COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal a equal
Next available options:
LIST –
equal : Span Equalization
0 : 0–131 feet (default for T1/J1)
1 : 132–262 feet
2 : 263–393 feet
3 : 394–524 feet
4 : 525–655 feet
5 : LONG HAUL
6 : 75 OHM
7 : 120 OHM (default for E1)
8 : T1 Long Haul mode. No Attenuation
9 : T1 Long Haul mode. 7.5 dB Attenuation
10 : T1 Long Haul mode. 15.0 dB Attenuation
11 : T1 Long Haul mode. 22.5 dB Attenuation
12 : E1 Long Haul mode.
! CAUTION
When selecting span equalization settings, comply with the following or the BTS may operate
erratically or unpredictably:
S For ALL BTS types, do not select any of the following settings if they are displayed:
–
–
–
–
5 LONG HAUL
6 75 OHM
11 T1 Long Haul mode. 22.5 dB Attenuation
12 E1 Long Haul mode
S For four–digit BTSs supported with Channel Service Units (CSU), do not select any of the
following additional settings:
– 8 T1 Long Haul mode. No Attenuation
– 9 T1 Long Haul mode. 7.5 dB Attenuation
– 10 T1 Long Haul mode. 15.0 dB Attenuation
. . . continued on next page
5-10
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Table 5-5: Set GLI3 Span Parameter Configuration
Step
10
Action
At the entry prompt (>), enter the code for the required equalization from the list as shown in the
following example (this should be the distance from the BTS Span I/O to the site demarcation
equipment or CSU, as applicable):
> 0
A response similar to the following will be displayed :
> 0
The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.
GLI2>
11
Repeat steps 8 through 10 for each in–use span.
12
! CAUTION
Do not set the card for loopback as described in this step unless specifically required or requested for
testing.
Enter the following MMI command to turn loopback on or off:
GLI#> config ni loopback 
Loopback commands and responses:
GLI#> config ni loopback on
Loopback request SUCCESSFUL: All framers have been placed in loopback.
They will remain in loopback for 1 hour.
GLI#> config ni loopback off
Loopback request SUCCESSFUL: All framers have been removed from loopback.
13
NOTE
This step must be performed for GLI3 cards operating on a packet image to ensure the span parameter
changes will replace the previous settings.
For a GLI3 card in packet mode, enter the following:
rmfile /nvram00/config/hlp_param.txt
A response similar to the following will be displayed :
GLI3> rmfile /nvram00/config/hlp_param.txt
11.24.2003 23:14:57 MGLI–004–1 CC PRESENT BTS–CDMA 16.40.00.09
Removing file: /nvram00/config/hlp_param.txt
Successfully removed file: /nvram00/config/hlp_param.txt
GLI3>
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5-11
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Table 5-5: Set GLI3 Span Parameter Configuration
Step
Action
14
* IMPORTANT
S After executing the config ni format, config ni linkspeed, and/or config ni equal commands,
the affected MGLI/GLI board MUST be reset and reloaded for changes to take effect.
S Although defaults are shown in the software, always consult site–specific documentation for span
type, equalization, and linkspeed used at the site where the cards are to be installed.
Reset the card using the MMI reset command.
15
Once the card has completed resetting, execute the following command to verify span settings are as
required:
config ni current
A response similar to the following will be displayed :
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A – 0–131 feet
Span B – 0–131 feet
Span C – Default (0–131
Span D – Default (0–131
Span E – Default (0–131
Span F – Default (0–131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: 64K
Currently, the link is running at 64K
The actual rate is 0
16
If the span configuration is not correct, perform the applicable step from this table to change it and
repeat steps 14 and 15 to verify required changes have been programmed.
17
Repeat steps 1 through 16 for each GLI card requiring changes in the span parameter settings.
18
If no other MMI actions are required for the card, terminate the MMI communication session and
disconnect the LMF computer from the card.
LMF Removal
NOTE
DO NOT power down the LMF without performing the
procedure below. Corrupted/lost data files may result, and
in some cases, the LMF may lock up.
Follow the procedure in Table 5-6 to terminate the LMF session and
remove the terminal.
5-12
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Table 5-6: LMF Termination and Removal
n Step
Action
From the CDMA window select File>Exit.
NOTE
The “File > Exit” command will prompt you to confirm the logout proce
and Exit” command will not prompt you and continues to shut down LM
From the Windows Task Bar click Start>Shutdown.
Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows message appears.
Disconnect the LMF terminal Ethernet connector from the BTS cabinet.
Disconnect the LMF serial port, the RS-232 to GPIB interface box, and
required for equipment transport.
Re–connect BTS T1/E1 Spans
and Integrated Frame Modem
Before leaving the site, connect any T1 span TELCO connectors that
were removed to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-7
and Figure 5-2 as required.
Table 5-7: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections
Step
Action
Connect the 50–pin TELCO cables to the BTS span I/O board 50–pin TELCO connectors.
If used, connect the dial–up modem RS–232 serial cable to the Site I/O board RS–232 9–pin
sub D connector.
* IMPORTANT
Verify that you connect both SPAN cables (if removed previously), and the Integrated Frame
Modem (IFM) “TELCO” connector.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5-13
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Figure 5-2: Site and Span I/O Boards T1 Span Connections
50–PIN TELCO
CONNECTORS
REMOVED
SPAN A CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
SPAN B CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
RS–232 9–PIN SUB D
CONNECTOR SERIAL
PORT FOR EXTERNAL
DIAL UP MODEM
CONNECTION (IF USED)
TOP of Frame
(Site I/O and Span I/O boards)
FW00299
Reset All Devices and Initialize
Site Remotely
Devices in the BTS should not be left with data and code loaded from
the LMF. The configuration data and code loads used for normal
operation could be different from those stored in the LMF files. Perform
the procedure in Table 5-8 to reset all devices and initialize site remotely.
Table 5-8: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site Initialization
Step
Action
Terminate the LMF session by following the procedures in Table 5-6.
Reconnect spans by following the procedure in Table 5-7.
– If BTS is configured for circuit operation, go to Step 4.
– If BTS is configured for packet operation, go to Step 5.
Circuit BTS Procedure:
4a
From the BTS site, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to perform a BTS reset.
or
At the BTS site:
– unseat one GLI card at a time and wait for 30 seconds;
– reseat the GLI and wait for it to complete its initialization (this takes about one minute);
– repeat for the second GLI.
. . . continued on next page
5-14
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Table 5-8: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site Initialization
Step
4b
Action
Depending on the number of installed operational GLI cards, perform one of the following:
– With fully redundant GLIs, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to run the ACTIVATE
command for the BTS.
– For a non–redundant GLI or a frame where the redundant GLI is not operational, contact the
OMC–R and request the operator:
S ACTIVATE the GLI to set the Nextload attribute for the GLI to the one for the current BSS
software version;
S Disable the GLI;
S Enable the GLI to allow the MM to load the software version specified by the Nextload
attribute;
S Once the GLI is INS_ACT, contact the OMC–R and request the operator ACTIVATE the BTS.
– Once the GLI cards are loaded with the specified code version, the active GLI will verify and
update, as required, the RAM and, if it is necessary, ROM code loads for the installed CSM,
MCC, and BBX cards using the DLM.
Packet BTS procedure:
5a
From the BTS site, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to PREACTIVATE the BTS to the
required software version for the BSS. There are two types of PREACTIVATE load processes:
– Rolling Upgrade: This load process is only available when the BTS cards are populated for full
redundancy as applicable.
– Quick Reboot: This process is used when there is not full redundancy for the BTS cards. The
GLI3 will disable and reboot to the new load. This will cause all the other cards to go out of
service. Once it is rebooted, the GLI3 determines which cards require a new load and then
downloads the cards in the order which they establish communication with the GLI3 following
their reboot. The GLI3 can reload up to 16 devices simultaneously.
Account for all tools used and parts removed from the frame during the operations, being sure none
were left inside the frame.
Visually inspect the frame for any foreign objects left inside, and remove any discovered.
Visually inspect all cable connections, ensuring they are connected as required for normal BTS
operation.
Be sure all internal frame cables are routed and secured to prevent damage to them when the frame
doors are closed.
10
Close and secure the cabinet doors.
11
Verify no alarm conditions are being reported to the OMC–R with the frame doors closed.
12
After all activities at the site have been completed, contact the OMC–R and confirm that the BTS is
under OMC–R control.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5-15
Prepare to Leave the Site
– continued
Notes
5-16
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Chapter 6: Basic Troubleshooting
Table of Contents
5/21/04
Guide Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is In This Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–2
Book Catalogs and Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Book Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–3
1–5
Physical Page Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Text Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–6
1–6
1–7
1–9
Frame and Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frames With Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Charts and Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Types In This Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item/Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step/Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–13
1–14
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–16
Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–17
1–17
1–17
1–18
1–19
Map Title Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Troubleshooting Overview
Overview
The information in this section addresses some of the scenarios likely to
be encountered by Cellular Field Engineering (CFE) team members.
This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference document
for use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basic
troubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not perform
per the procedure documented in the manual.
Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the field
and information gained form experience in Motorola labs and
classrooms.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-1
Troubleshooting: Installation
Cannot Log into Cell-Site
Follow the procedure in Table 6-1 to troubleshoot a login failure.
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures
n Step
Action
If MGLI LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset MGLI by re-seating it. If this
persists, install a known good MGLI card in MGLI slot and retry. A Red LED may also indicate
no Ethernet termination at top of frame.
Verify that T1 is disconnected (see Table 3-4 on page 3-14).
If T1 is still connected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.
Try pinging the MGLI (see Table 3-11 on page 3-32).
Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in the front of the BTS (see
Table 3-5 on page 3-15).
Verify the LMF was configured properly (see Preparing the LMF section starting on page 3–6).
Verify the BTS-LMF cable is RG-58 [flexible black cable of less than 76 cm (2.5 feet) length].
Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly (see Figure 3-10).
Verify a T-adapter is not used on the LMF side port if connected to the BTS front LMF primary
port.
Try connecting to the I/O panel (top of frame). Use BNC T-adapters at the LMF port for this
connection.
10
Re-boot the LMF and retry.
11
Re-seat the MGLI and retry.
12
Verify IP addresses are configured properly.
Cannot Communicate to Power
Meter
Follow the procedure in Table 6-2 to troubleshoot a power meter
communication failure.
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
n Step
Action
Verify the Power Meter is connected to the LMF with a GPIB adapter.
Verify the cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.
Verify the GPIB address of the power meter is set to the same value displayed in the applicable
GPIB address box of the LMF Options window Test Equipment tab. Refer to Table 3-24 or
Table 3-25 and the GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F for details.
Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct.
Refer to the Test Equipment setup section for details.
. . . continued on next page
6-2
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Troubleshooting: Installation
– continued
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
n Step
Action
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be
‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then power-cycle the GPIB Box
and retry.
Verify the LMF computer COM1 port is not used by another application; for example, if a
HyperTerminal window is open for MMI, close it.
Reset all test equipment by clicking Util in the BTS menu bar and selecting
Test Equipment>Reset from the pull–down lists.
Cannot Communicate to
Communications Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 6-3 to troubleshoot a communications
analyzer communication failure.
Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure
n Step
Action
Verify the analyzer is connected to the LMF with GPIB adapter.
Verify the cable setup.
Verify the signal generator GPIB address is set to the same value displayed in the applicable GPIB
address box of the LMF Options window Test Equipment tab. Refer to Table 3-24 or Table 3-25
and the GPIB Address section of Appendix F for details.
Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to the CDMA 2000 Test Equipment
Preparation section of Appendix NO TAG for details.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be
‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle the GPIB box power
and retry.
Verify the LMF computer COM1 port is not used by another application; for example, if a
HyperTerminal window is open for MMI, close it.
Reset all test equipment by clicking Util in the BTS menu bar and selecting
Test Equipment>Reset from the pull–down lists.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-3
Troubleshooting: Download
Cannot Download CODE to Any
Device (card)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-4 to troubleshoot a code download
failure.
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure
n Step
Action
Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS.
Verify the LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.
Communication to the MGLI2 must first be established before trying to talk to any other BTS
device.
The MGLI2 must be INS_ACT state (green).
Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.
If the card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure.
Reset the card by re-seating it.
If the LED remains solid red, replace with a card from another slot & retry.
NOTE
The card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.
Re-seat the card and try again.
If BBX reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK.
If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by selecting the
device and Reset.
If a BBX or an MCC remains OOS_ROM (blue) after code download, use the LMF
Device > Status function to verify that the code load was accepted.
10
If the code load was accepted, use LMF Device > Download > Flash to load RAM code into flash
memory.
Cannot Download DATA to Any
Device (Card)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-5 to troubleshoot a data download
failure.
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure
n Step
6-4
Action
Re-seat the card and repeat code and data load procedure.
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Troubleshooting: Download
– continued
Cannot ENABLE Device
Before a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in the
OOS_RAM state (yellow) with data downloaded to the device. The color
of the device changes to green once it is enabled.
The three states that devices can be changed to are as follows:
S Enabled (green, INS)
S Disabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)
S Reset (blue, OOS_ROM)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-6 to troubleshoot a device enable
failure.
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure
n Step
Action
Re-seat the card and repeat the code and data load procedure.
If the CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude data for cell
site location and GPS sync.
Ensure the primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.
NOTE
MCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.
Verify the 19.6608 MHz CSM clock; MCCs will not go INS otherwise.
The BBX should not be enabled for ATP tests.
If MCCs give “invalid or no system time”, verify the CSM is operable.
Miscellaneous Errors
Perform the procedure in Table 6-7 to troubleshoot miscellaneous
failures.
Table 6-7: Miscellaneous Failures
n Step
Action
If PAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers, then connect an
MMI cable to the PA and set up a Hyperterminal connection (see Table 3-3 on page 3-11).
Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window.
The resulting LMF display may provide an indication of the problem.
(Call Field Support for further assistance.)
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-5
Troubleshooting: Calibration
Bay Level Offset Calibration
Failure
Perform the procedure in Table 6-8 to troubleshoot a BLO calibration
failure.
NOTE
Only one carrier can be tested at a time. All PAs must be
INS during testing. For the carriers not under test, key one
BBX per carrier to a minimum power level. (Refer to
Table 3-37).
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure
n Step
Action
Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup section in Chapter 3)
and connection is made to the proper TX port.
Verify the parameters in the bts–#.cdf file are set correctly for 800MHz:
Bandclass=0; Freq_Band=8; SSType=8
Verify that no PA is in alarm state (flashing red LED).
Reset the PA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensor
head.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.
Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).
If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and
retry.
Verify the sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power Ref
signal.
If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is operatonal, the Meter display will show
“RES”.
Cannot Load BLO
For Load BLO failures see Table 6-7.
6-6
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Troubleshooting: Calibration
– continued
Calibration Audit Failure
Follow the procedure in Table 6-9 to troubleshoot a calibration audit
failure.
NOTE
Only one carrier can be tested at a time. All PAs must be
INS during testing. For the carriers not under test, key one
BBX per carrier to a minimum power level. (Refer to
Table 3-37).
Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure
n Step
Action
Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup section of
Chapter 3).
Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensor
head.
Verify that no PA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED).
Reset the PA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
Verify that no sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power
Ref signal.
After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBXs before auditing.
Click on the BBX(s) and select Device>Download BLO.
Re-try the audit.
Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.
Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be “ON” (Power and Ready).
If any other LED is continuously “ON”, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and
retry.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-7
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP
BTS passed Reduced ATP tests
but has forward link problem
during normal operation
Follow the procedure in Table 6-10 to troubleshoot a Forward Link
problem during normal operation.
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP)
n Step
Action
Perform these additional TX tests to troubleshoot a forward link problem:
– TX mask
– TX rho
– TX code domain
Cannot Perform TX Mask
Measurement
Follow the procedure in Table 6-11 to troubleshoot a TX mask
measurement failure.
NOTE
Only one carrier can be tested at a time. All PAs must be
INS during testing. For the carriers not under test, key one
BBX per carrier to a minimum power level. (Refer to
Table 3-37).
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure
n Step
Action
Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX(s).
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no PA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).
Re-set the PA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot
Time Offset Measurement
Follow the procedure in Table 6-12 to troubleshoot a rho or pilot time
offset measurement failure.
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure
n Step
6-8
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the CDF file.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP
– continued
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure
n Step
Action
Re–load BBX data and repeat the test.
If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
Verify that no PA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the PA by pulling the
circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may indicate that the GPS
is still phasing (i.e., trying to reach and maintain 0 freq. error).
Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz. Press 
and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is an indication the GPS has not stabilized
before going INS and may need to be re-initialized.
Cannot Perform Code Domain
Power and Noise Floor
Measurement
Perform the procedure in Table 6-13 to troubleshoot a code domain and
noise floor measurement failure.
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure
n Step
Action
Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the CDF file.
Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure).
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-9
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP
Multi–FER Test Failure
Perform the procedure in Table 6-14 to troubleshoot a Multi–FER
failure.
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure
n Step
Action
Verify the test equipment set up is correct for an FER test.
Verify the test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks.
On the HP8921A test set, the yellow LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.
Verify the MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS–ACT.
Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on extent of failure).
Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable the MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of
failure).
Verify the antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages.
6-10
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist
Problem Description
Many of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) board failures may
be resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for
repair. This section describes known CSM problems identified in field
returns, some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems before
returning suspect CSM boards.
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz
Reference Clock/GPS Receiver
Operation
If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 or
SGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version
“AB”, then replace with version “BC” or higher, and return model “AB”
to the repair center.
No GPS Reference Source
Check the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. CSM kit
SGLN1145, in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit
SGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any incorrectly
configured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not attempt to
change hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the GPS
antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended guidelines.
Checksum Failure
The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in a
non-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electrical
disturbance or interruption of data during a download. Attempt another
download with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return the CSM
board back to the repair center if the attempt to reload fails.
GPS Bad RX Message Type
This problem is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM
software (3.5 or higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an
earlier version of CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from
the CBSC. Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher.
Return the CSM board back to the repair center if the attempt to reload
fails.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-11
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist
– continued
CSM Reference Source
Configuration Error
This problem is caused by incorrect reference source configuration
performed in the field by software download. CSM kits SGLN1145 and
SGLN4132 must have proper reference sources configured (as shown
below) to function correctly.
CSM Kit
No.
Hardware
Configuration
CSM Slot
No.
Reference Source
Configuration
CDF Value
SGLN1145
With GPS Receiver
Primary = Local GPS
Backup = HSO
2 or 18
SGLN4132
Without GPS Receiver
Primary = Remote GPS
Backup = HSO
2 or 18
Takes Too Long for CSM to
Come INS
This problem may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the
accuracy flag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM system
time/GPS and HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least one
satellite should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and four
satellites should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also,
verify correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.
6-12
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Troubleshooting: C–CCP Backplane
Introduction
The C–CCP backplane is a multi–layer board that interconnects all the
C–CCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possible
improper diagnoses when problems occur.
Connector Functionality
The following connector overview describes the major types of
backplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This
information allows the CFE to:
S Determine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problem
type.
S Isolate problems to a specific cable or connector.
Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Inter Shelf Bus Connectors
The 40 pin Inter Shelf Bus (ISB) connectors provide an interface bus
from the master GLI to all other GLIs in the modem frame. Their basic
function is to provide clock synchronization from the master GLI to all
other GLIs in the frame.
The ISB also provides the following functions:
S Span line grooming when a single span is used for multiple cages.
S MMI connection to/from the master GLI to cell site modem.
S Interface between GLIs and the AMR (for reporting BTS alarms).
Span Line Connector
The 50–pin span line connector provides a primary and secondary (if
used) span line interface to each GLI in the C–CCP shelf. The span line
is used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master GLI and also all the
BBX traffic.
Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Reference Distribution
Module Input/Output
The Reference Distribution Module (RDM) connectors route the 3 MHz
reference signals from the CSMs to the GLIs and all BBXs in the
backplane. The signals are used to phase lock loop all clock circuits on
the GLIs and BBX boards to produce precise clock and signal
frequencies.
Power Input (Return A, B, and C connectors)
For –48 V configuration – Provides a –48 volt input for use by the
power supply modules.
For +27 V configuration – Provides input for regulated +27 Volts.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-13
Troubleshooting: C–CCP Backplane
– continued
Power Supply Interface
Each C–CCP power supply has a series of three different connectors to
provide the needed inputs/outputs to the C–CCP backplane. These
include a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin
interface, and a +15 V/Analog Ground output connector. The C–CCP
Power Supplies convert +27 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, and +5.0
Volts to be used by the C–CCP shelf cards.
For –48V BTS only, the power supply modules convert –48 Volts to a
regulated +27 Volts.
GLI Connector
This connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a
6–conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectors
provide inputs/outputs for the GLIs in the C–CCP backplane.
GLI 10Base–2 Ethernet “A” and “B” Connections
These BNC connectors are located on the C–CCP backplane and routed
to the GLI board. This interface provides all the control and data
communications between the master GLI and the other GLI, between
gateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.
BBX Connector
Each BBX connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connector
and two 6–conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,
digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBXs in the C–CCP backplane.
MCIO Connectors
S RX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri–Filters
(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules –
the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) to
the other. The MPC outputs the low–noise–amplified signals via the
C–CCP backplane to the MCIO where the signals are split and sent to
the appropriate BBX.
S A digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX, to the
backplane, then on to the MCC slots.
S Digital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCCs. Each output
is routed from the MCC slot via the backplane appropriate BBX.
S TX RF path signal originates from the BBX, through the backplane to
the MCIO, through the MCIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial
cabling to the PAs in the PA shelf.
C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 provide procedures for troubleshooting
problems that appear to be related to a defective C–CCP backplane. The
tables are broken down into possible problems and steps that should be
taken in an attempt to find the root cause.
6-14
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Troubleshooting: C–CCP Backplane
– continued
NOTE
IMPORTANT: Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 must be
completed before replacing ANY C–CCP backplane.
Digital Control Problems
No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-15 to troubleshoot a GLI control via
LMF failure.
Table 6-15: No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs)
n Step
Action
Check the 10Base–2 ethernet connector for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.
Verify the C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.
No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (All GLIs)
Follow the procedures in Table 6-16 and Table 6-17 to troubleshoot GLI
control failures.
Table 6-16: No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs)
Step
Action
Verify the C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR/CBSC data base.
Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.
Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the master GLI for proper connection and
damage.
Check the span line configuration on the MGLI (see Table 5-4 on page 5-5).
Table 6-17: MGLI Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLI
Step
Action
Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR CBSC data base.
Check the 10Base–2 ethernet connector for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.
Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-15
Troubleshooting: C–CCP Backplane
– continued
No AMR Control (MGLI good)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-18 to troubleshoot an AMR control
failure when the MGLI control is good.
Table 6-18: MGLI Control Good – No Control over AMR
Step
Action
Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.
Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.
No BBX Control in the Shelf – (No Control over Co–located
GLIs)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-19 to troubleshoot a BBX control in
the shelf failure.
Table 6-19: No BBX Control in the Shelf – No Control over Co–located GLIs
Step
Action
Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.
Visually check BBX connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the BBX with a known good BBX.
No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Perform the procedure in Table 6-20 to troubleshoot a span line traffic
failure.
Table 6-20: MGLI Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Step
Action
Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.
Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage.
If the problem seems to be limited to one BBX, replace the MGLI with a known good MGLI.
Perform the BTS Span Parameter Configuration ( see Table 5-4 on page 5-5).
Ensure that ISB cabling is correct.
No (or Missing) MCC Channel Elements
Perform the procedure in Table 6-21 to troubleshoot a channel elements
failure.
6-16
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Troubleshooting: C–CCP Backplane
– continued
Table 6-21: No MCC Channel Elements
Step
Action
Verify CEs on a co–located MCC (MCC24 TYPE=2).
If the problem seems to be limited to one MCC, replace the MCC with a known good MCC.
– Check connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
If no CEs on any MCC:
– Verify clock reference to MCIO.
Check the CDF for MCCTYPE=2 (MCC24E); MCCTYPE=0 (MCC8E) or MCCTYPE=3 (MCC–1X)
DC Power Problems
Perform the procedure in Table 6-22 to troubleshoot a DC input voltage
to power supply module failure.
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to
the BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a
second person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all
rings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to beginning this
test.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-17
Troubleshooting: C–CCP Backplane
– continued
No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Table 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Step
Action
Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame.
Verify there are no breakers tripped.
* IMPORTANT
If a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the applicable shelf supplied by the breaker and
attempt to reset it.
– If the breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.
– If the breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or sub–assembly within the shelf.
Verify that the C–CCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breaker panel is functional.
Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to the C–CCP backplane by
measuring the DC voltage level on the PWR_IN cable.
– If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.
– If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and measure the level at the “VCC” power
feed clip on the distribution backplane.
– If the voltage is correct at the power clip, inspect the clip for damage.
–48 V configuration only – If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power supply
module and verify LEDs are green.
–48 V configuration only – If LED is red, then replace the power suppy module with a known good
module and verify LEDs are green.
If steps 1 through 5 fail to indicate a problem, a C–CCP backplane failure (possibly an open trace) has
occurred.
No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI, BBX,
or Switchboard
Perform the procedure in Table 6-23 to troubleshoot a DC input voltage
to GLI, BBX, or Switchboard failure.
Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf Module
Step
Action
Verify the steps in Table 6-22 have been performed.
Inspect the defective board/module (both board and backplane) connector for damage.
Replace suspect board/module with known good board/module.
TX and RX Signal Routing
Problems
Perform the procedure in Table 6-24 to troubleshoot TX and RX signal
routing problems.
6-18
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Troubleshooting: C–CCP Backplane
– continued
Table 6-24: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems
Step
Action
Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back–plane connectors for damage in all the affected board
slots.
Perform steps in the RF path troubleshooting flowchart in this manual.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-19
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link
Span Problems (No Control
Link)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-25 to troubleshoot a control link
failure.
Table 6-25: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure
n Step
Action
Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable MGLI/GLI as shown in
Figure 6-1 or Figure 6-2.
Start an MMI communication session with the applicable MGLI/GLI by using the Windows
desktop shortcut icon.
Once the connection window opens, press the CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the GLI
prompt is obtained.
At the GLI prompt, enter:
config ni current  (equivalent of span view command)
The system will respond with a display similar to the following:
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A – Default (0–131
Span B – Default (0–131
Span C – Default (0–131
Span D – Default (0–131
Span E – Default (0–131
Span F – Default (0–131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)
Currently, the link is running at the default rate
The actual rate is 0
NOTE
Defaults for span equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.
Default linkspeed is 56 kbps for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64 kbps for all other types.
There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC–R/CBSC span configuration requires it.
The span configurations loaded in the GLI must match those in the OMCR/CBSC database for the
BTS. If they do not, proceed to Table 6-26.
Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining GLIs.
If the span settings are correct, verify the edlc parameters using the show command.
Any alarm conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly.
S Try looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the MM, and verify that the looped
signal is good.
S Listen for control tone on the appropriate timeslot from the Base Site and MM.
6-20
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link
– continued
Table 6-25: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure
n Step
Action
Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection
window menu bar, and then Exit from the dropdown menu.
If no TCHs in groomed MCCs (or in whole SCCP shelf) can process calls, verify that the ISB
cabling is correct and that ISB A and ISB B cables are not swapped.
Figure 6-1: GLI2 Board MMI Connection Detail
STATUS LED
RESET
Pushbutton
GLI2
ALARM LED
SPANS LED
MASTER LED
To MMI port
MMI Port
Connector
ACTIVE LED
8–PIN
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
Span (LED)
Alarm (LED)
MMI Port
Active (LED)
Status (LED)
8–PIN TO 10–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
(P/N 30–09786R01)
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
RS–232
CABLE
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
COM1 or COM2
ti-CDMA-WP-00079-v01-ildoc-ftw
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-21
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link
– continued
Figure 6-2: GLI3 Board MMI Connection Detail
BPR A
BPR B
100BASE–T to
BTS Packet Router
or Expansion cage
AUX
100BASE–T
Auxiliary Monitor
Port
GLI
Dual 100BASE–T
in a single RJ45
to Redundant
(Mate) GLI3
Span (LED)
Alarm (LED)
MMI Port
MMI
To MMI port
Reset Switch
SPAN
ALARM
RESET
GLI3
ACT
STA
Active (LED)
Status (LED)
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8–PIN
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
8–PIN TO 10–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
(P/N 30–09786R01)
RS–232
CABLE
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
COM1 or COM2
REF
ti-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftw
Set BTS Site Span
Configuration
Perform the procedure in Table 6-26 to set the span parameter
configuration.
6-22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link
– continued
NOTE
IMPORTANT: Perform the following procedure ONLY if
span configurations loaded in the MGLI/GLIs do not
match those in the OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY
when the exact configuration data is available. Loading
incorrect span configuration data will render the site
inoperable.
Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
n Step
Action
If not previously done, connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable
MGLI/GLI as shown in Figure 6-1.
If there is no MMI communication session in progress with the applicable MGLI/GLI, initiate one
by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon.
At the GLI prompt, enter:
config ni format


The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni format option
Next available options:
LIST –
option : Span Option
E1_1 : E1_1 – E1 HDB3 CRC4
no TS16
E1_2 : E1_2 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 no TS16
E1_3 : E1_3 – E1 HDB3 CRC4
TS16
E1_4 : E1_4 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 TS16
T1_1 : T1_1 – D4, AMI, No ZCS
T1_2 : T1_2 – ESF, B8ZS
J1_1 : J1_1 – ESF, B8ZS (Japan) – Default
J1_2 : J1_2 – ESF, B8ZS
T1_3 : T1_3 – D4, AMI, ZCS
NOTE
With this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same format.
To set or change the span type, enter the correct option from the list at the entry prompt (>), as
shown in the following example:
> T1_2

NOTE
The entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typed
incorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:
CP: Invalid command
GLI>
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-23
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link
– continued
Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
n Step
Action
An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:
The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.
GLI>
If the current MGLI/GLI span rate must be changed, enter the following MMI command:
config ni linkspeed

The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
Next available options:
LIST – linkspeed : Span Linkspeed
56K : 56K (default for T1_1 and T1_3 systems)
64K : 64K (default for all other span configurations)
NOTE
With this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same linkspeed.
To set or change the span linkspeed, enter the required option from the list at the entry prompt (>),
as shown in the following example:
> 64K

NOTE
The entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typed
incorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:
CP: Invalid command
GLI>
An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:
The value has been programmed.
set.
GLI>
It will take effect after the next re-
. . . continued on next page
6-24
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link
– continued
Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
n Step
Action
If the span equalization must be changed, enter the following MMI command:
config ni equal

The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal
Next available options:
LIST –
span : Span
a : Span
b : Span
c : Span
d : Span
e : Span
f : Span
10
span equal
At the entry prompt (>), enter the designator from the list for the span to be changed as shown in
the following example:
> a

The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal a equal
Next available options:
LIST –
equal : Span Equalization
0 : 0–131 feet (default for T1/J1)
1 : 132–262 feet
2 : 263–393 feet
3 : 394–524 feet
4 : 525–655 feet
5 : LONG HAUL
6 : 75 OHM
7 : 120 OHM (default for E1)
11
At the entry prompt (>), enter the code for the required equalization from the list as shown in the
following example:
> 0

The terminal will display a response similar to the following:
> 0
The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.
GLI>
12
Repeat steps 9 through 11 for each in–use span.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-25
Troubleshooting: Span Control Link
– continued
Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
n Step
13
Action
NOTE
After executing the config ni format, config ni linkspeed, and/or config ni equal
commands, the affected MGLI/GLI board MUST be reset and reloaded for changes to take effect.
Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and
linkspeed used at the site.
Press the RESET button on the MGLI/GLI for changes to take effect.
14
Once the MGLI/GLI has reset, execute the following command to verify span settings are as
required:
config ni current  (equivalent of span view command)
The system will respond with a display similar to the following:
The frame format in flash
Equalization:
Span A – 0–131 feet
Span B – 0–131 feet
Span C – Default (0–131
Span D – Default (0–131
Span E – Default (0–131
Span F – Default (0–131
is set to use T1_2.
feet
feet
feet
feet
for
for
for
for
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
T1/J1,
120
120
120
120
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
Ohm
for
for
for
for
E1)
E1)
E1)
E1)
Linkspeed: 64K
Currently, the link is running at 64K
The actual rate is 0
6-26
15
If the span configuration is not correct, perform the applicable step from this table to change it and
repeat steps 13 and 14 to verify required changes have been programmed.
16
Return to step 6 of Table 6-25.
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
Module Status Indicators
Each of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)
LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator is
labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.
Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm
(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.
Based on the status of this signal, the AMR controls the state of the
PWR/ALM LED on the fan module.
LED Status Combinations for
All Modules (except GLI, CSM,
BBX, MCC)
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the module status indicator.
S Solid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
S Solid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware failure.
Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a complete
module failure and normal service may or may not be reduced or
interrupted.
DC/DC Converter LED Status
Combinations
The PWR CNVTR has alarm (fault) detection circuitry that controls the
state of the PWR/ALM LED. This is true for both the C–CCP and PA
power converters.
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.
S Solid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
S Solid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware problem.
CSM LED Status Combinations
The CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware and
software/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators (see
Figure 6-3).
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-27
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
Figure 6-3: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports
SYNC
MONITOR
PWR/ALM
Indicator
FREQ
MONITOR
FW00303
PWR/ALM LED
After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS–RAM code from the Flash
EPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS–ROM code is loaded
from the Flash EPROM.
S Solid GREEN – module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.
S Solid RED – Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)
condition.
S Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
S Long RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm.
S Rapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm or INS_ACT in
DUMB mode.
S Short RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm.
S Long GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.
S Off – no DC power or on-board fuse is open.
S Solid YELLOW – After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. During
SRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (If
SRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED and
the CSM attempts to reboot.)
FREQ Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. When
both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2
clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.
6-28
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm
(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.
SYNC Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by the
CSMs.
At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulse
width of 153 nanoseconds.
MMI Connector
Only accessible behind front panel. The RS–232 MMI port connector is
intended to be used primarily in the development or factory
environment, but may be used in the field for debug/maintenance
purposes.
GLI LED Status Combinations
NOTE
GLIs may be GLI2 or GLI3. Either supports the 1X
SCt4812T–MC BTS.
GLI
The GLI module has indicators, controls and connectors as described
below and shown in Table 6-27 (GLI2) and Table 6-28 (GLI3).
The operating states of the LEDs are:
ACTIVE
Solid GREEN – GLI is active. This means that the GLI has shelf
control and is providing control of the digital interfaces.
Off – GLI is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI should be active.
MASTER (not on GLI3)
S Solid GREEN – GLI is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI).
S Off – GLI is non-master (i.e., Slave).
ALARM
S Solid RED – GLI is in a fault condition or in reset.
S While in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI is
performing ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).
S While in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI is
performing RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).
S Off – No Alarm.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-29
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
STATUS
S Flashing GREEN– GLI is in service (INS), in a stable operating
condition.
S On – GLI is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.
S Off – GLI is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.
SPANS
S Solid GREEN – Span line is connected and operating.
S Solid RED – Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.
GLI Pushbuttons and
Connectors
RESET Pushbutton – Depressing the RESET pushbutton causes a
partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices. The GLI2 is
placed in the OOS_ROM state
MMI Connector – The RS–232MMI port connector is intended to be
used primarily in the development or factory environment but may be
used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.
LAN Connectors (A & B) – The two 10BASE2 Ethernet circuit board
mounted BNC connectors are located on the bottom front edge of the
GLI2; one for each LAN interface, A & B. Ethernet cabling is connected
to tee connectors fastened to these BNC connectors.
GLI2 Front Panel
Table 6-27 shows the front panel of the GLI2 card and includes a
description of the components.
6-30
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
Table 6-27: GLI2 Front Panel
LED
Operating Status
ALARM
OFF – operating normally
ON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turns OFF
SLOW GREEN – when the GLI2 is INS (in-service)
SPANS
OFF – card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby
GREEN – operating normally
YELLOW – one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving
a remote alarm indication signal from the far end
RED – one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm
state
MASTER
ALARM LED
SPANS LED
MASTER LED
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
MM
MMI
ACTIVE
An RS-232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as an
MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of 115,200
baud communications.
RESET
PUSHBUTTON
MASTER
MMI
The pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The card in the top
shelf is designated by hardware as the active card; the card in the
bottom shelf is in the standby mode.
ON – operating normally in active card
OFF – operating normally in standby card
STATUS LED
SPA
PANS
Pressing and releasing the switch resets all functions on the GLI2.
ALARM
RESET
RESET
OFF – operating normally
ON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turns OFF
SLOW GREEN – when the GLI2 is INS (in-service)
STATUS
STATUS
Diagram
Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant card
toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails
ON – active card operating normally
OFF – standby card operating normally
GLI3 Front Panel
Table 6-28 shows the front panel of the GLI3 card and includes a
description of the components.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-31
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
Table 6-28: GLI3 Front Panel
LED
Operating Status
GLI
Supports the cross–coupled ethernet circuits to the mate GLI using
a double crossover cable.
RESET
Pressing and releasing the switch resets all functions on the GLI3.
ALARM
OFF – operating normally
ON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turns OFF
SLOW GREEN – when the GLI3 is INS (in-service)
SPAN
OFF – card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby
GREEN – operating normally
YELLOW – one or more of the equipped initialized spans is
receiving a remote alarm indication signal from the far end
RED – one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm
state
OFF – operating normally
ON – briefly during power-up when the Alarm LED turns OFF
SLOW GREEN – when the GLI3 is INS (in-service)
ACTIVE
Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant
card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails
ON – active card operating normally
OFF – standby card operating normally
Dual 100BASE–T in a single
RJ45 to Redundant (Mate)
GLI3
Reset Switch
Span (LED)
Alarm (LED)
Ala
MMI Port
ACT
STATUS
STA
An RS-232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as an
MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of
115,200 baud communications.
100BASE–T Auxiliary
Monitor Port
MMI
MMI
100BASE T to BTS Packet
100BASE–T
Router or Expansion cage
SPAN
Wired as an ethernet client for direct connection to a personal
computer with a standard ethernet cable. It allows connection of
ethernet “sniffer” when the ethernet switch is properly configured
for port monitoring.
ALARM
RESET
AUX
GLI
Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as an
ethernet client.
AUX
BPR B
BPR
RB
Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as an
ethernet client.
BPR A
BPR A
Diagram
Active (LED)
Status (LED)
ti-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftw
BBX LED Status Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that
controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:
S Solid GREEN – INS_ACT no alarm
6-32
Solid RED Red – initializing or power-up alarm
Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm
Long RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm
Rapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
S Short RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm
S Long GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT alarm
PA Shelf LED Status
Combinations
PA Module LED
Each PA module contains a bi–color LED just above the MMI connector
on the front panel of the module. Interpret this LED as follows:
S GREEN — PA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normal
condition).
S Flashing GREEN/RED — PA module is active but is reporting an low
input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal and does
not constitute a failure.
MCC LED Status Combinations
The MCC module has LED indicators and connectors as described
below (see Figure 6-4). Note that the figure does not show the
connectors as they are concealed by the removable lens.
The LED indicators and their states are as follows:
PWR/ALM LED
S RED – fault on module
ACTIVE LED
S Off – module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.
S Slowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
S Rapidly Flashing Green – OOS_RAM no alarm.
S Solid GREEN – module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.
PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs
S Solid RED – module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.
MMI Connectors
S The RS–232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development or factory environment but may be used
in the field for debugging purposes.
S The RJ–11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development environment but may be used in the field
for high data rate debugging purposes.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
6-33
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
– continued
Figure 6-4: MCC Front Panel
LED
PWR/ALM
LENS
(REMOVABLE)
RED
ACTIVE
ACTIVE LED
OPERATING STATUS
OFF – operating normally
ON – briefly during power-up and during failure conditions
An alarm is generated in the event of a failACTIVE ure GREEN
RAPIDLY BLINKING – Card is codeloaded but not enabled
SLOW BLINKING – Card is not codeloaded
ON – card is code-loaded and enabled
ON(INS_ACTIVE)
– fault condition
RED
SLOW FLASHING (alternating with
green) – CHI bus inactive on power-up
PWR/ALM
PWR/ALM LED
COLOR
6-34
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
A
Appendix A: Chapter Title Goes Here
Appendix Content
THIS IS A SPECIAL APPENDIX TOC.
THIS APPENDIX TOC MUST BE USED FOR APPENDIX A.
AUTONUMBER STREAMS ARE RESET HERE.
DO NOT USE THIS APPENDIX TOC FOR ANY OTHER
APPENDIX.
5/21/04
Guide Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is In This Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–2
Book Catalogs and Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Book Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–3
1–5
Physical Page Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Text Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–6
1–6
1–7
1–9
Frame and Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frames With Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Charts and Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Types In This Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item/Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step/Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–13
1–14
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–16
Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–17
1–17
1–17
1–18
1–19
Map Title Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
A
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
Verification of Test Equipment
Used
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used
Manufacturer
Model
Serial Number
Comments:
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
A-1
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
– continued
Site Checklist
Table A-2: Site Checklist
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
Deliveries
Per established procedures
−
Floor Plan
Verified
−
−
−
Inter Frame Cables:
Ethernet
Frame Ground
Power
Per procedure
Per procedure
Per procedure
−
−
Factory Data:
BBX
Test Panel
Per procedure
Per procedure
−
Site Temperature
−
Dress Covers/Brackets
Comments
Comments:
Preliminary Operations
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
Shelf ID Dip Switches
Per site equipage
−
BBX Jumpers
Verified per procedure
−
Ethernet LAN verification
Verified per procedure
Comments
Comments:
A-2
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
– continued
Pre–Power and Initial Power Tests
Table A-4: Pre–power Checklist
OK
−
Parameter
Specification
Pre–power–up tests
Verify power supply
output voltage at the top
of each BTS frame is
within specifications
−
−
−
−
−
Internal Cables:
ISB (all cages)
CSM (all cages)
Power (all cages)
Ethernet Connectors
LAN A ohms
LAN B ohms
LAN A shield
LAN B shield
Ethernet Boots
−
Air Impedance Cage (single cage)
installed
−
Initial power–up tests
Verify power supply
output voltage at the top
of each BTS frame is
within specifications:
−
−
−
Comments
verified
verified
verified
verified
verified
isolated
isolated
installed
Comments:
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
A-3
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
– continued
General Optimization Checklist
Table A-5: Pre–power Checklist
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
−
LEDs
Frame fans
illuminated
operational
−
−
−
−
−
−
LMF to BTS Connection
Preparing the LMF
Log into the LMF PC
Create site specific BTS directory
Create master–bts–cdma directory
Download device loads
Moving/Linking files
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
−
−
Ping LAN A
Ping LAN B
per procedure
per procedure
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Download/Enable MGLIs
Download/Enable GLIs
Set Site Span Configuration
Download CSMs
Download
Enable CSMs
Download/Enable MCCs
Download BBXs
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
−
Test Set Calibration
per procedure
Comments
Comments:
A-4
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
– continued
GPS Receiver Operation
Table A-6: GPS Receiver Operation
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
GPS Receiver Control Task State:
tracking satellites
Verify parameter
−
Initial Position Accuracy:
Verify Estimated
or Surveyed
−
Current Position:
lat
lon
height
RECORD in ms
and cm also
convert to deg
min sec
−
Current Position: satellites tracked
Estimated:
(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Surveyed:
(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Verify parameter
as appropriate:
−
GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution of
Precision
(PDOP or HDOP): (<30)
Verify parameter
−
Current reference source:
Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes
Verify parameter
Comments
Comments:
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
A-5
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
– continued
PA IM Reduction
Table A-7: PA IM Reduction – TX Filter
Carrier
3–Sector
6–Sector
OK
PA
−
1A
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
1B
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
1C
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
1D
C1
C1
No Alarms
−
2A
C2
C2
No Alarms
−
2B
C2
C2
No Alarms
−
2C
C2
C2
No Alarms
−
2D
C2
C2
No Alarms
−
3A
C3
C1
No Alarms
−
3B
C3
C1
No Alarms
−
3C
C3
C1
No Alarms
−
3D
C3
C1
No Alarms
−
4A
C4
C2
No Alarms
−
4B
C4
C2
No Alarms
−
4C
C4
C2
No Alarms
−
4D
C4
C2
No Alarms
Comments
Specification
Comments:
A-6
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
– continued
PA Convergence
OK
−
PA # Converged
1A
−
2A
−
3A
−
4A
−
1B
−
2B
−
3B
−
4B
−
1C
−
2C
−
3C
−
4C
−
1D
−
2D
−
3D
−
4D
Table A-8: PA Convergence (Multicarrier grouping)
Specification
Verify per procedure & upload
convergence data
d t
Data
Verify per procedure & upload
convergence data
d t
Verify per procedure & upload
convergence data
d t
Verify per procedure & upload
convergence data
d t
Comments:
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
A-7
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
– continued
TX Bay Level Offset/Power Output Verification for 3–Sector Configurations
1–Carrier
2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
Table A-9: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1; 2; and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–4, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–5, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–6, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–10, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–11, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–12, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
−
−
−
−
−
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibrate
carrier 3
Calibrate
carrier 4
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
TX Bay
y Level Offset =
40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz
35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHz
prior to calibration
TX Bay
y Level Offset =
40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz
35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHz
prior to calibration
TX Bay
y Level Offset =
40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz
35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHz
prior to calibration
TX Bay
y Level Offset =
40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz
35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHz
prior to calibration
TX Bay
y Level Offset =
40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz
35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHz
prior to calibration
−
. . . continued on next page
A-8
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
– continued
Table A-9: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1; 2; and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–4, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–5, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–6, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–10, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–11, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–12, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
−
−
−
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
Calibration
Audit
carrier 3
Calibration
Audit
carrier 4
0 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
−
Comments:
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
A-9
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
– continued
2–Carrier Adjacent Channel
Table A-10: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–7, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–9, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–7, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX–9, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
−
−
−
−
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
TX Bay
y Level Offset =
40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz
35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHz
prior to calibration
TX Bay
y Level Offset =
40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz
35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHz
prior to calibration
0 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
−
Comments:
A-10
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
– continued
3–Carrier Adjacent Channels
4–Carrier Adjacent Channels
Table A-11: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 3 or 4–Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–4, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–5, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–6, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–10, ANT–4 =
BBX–3, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–11, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–12, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
−
−
−
−
−
Calibrate
carrier 1
Calibrate
carrier 2
Calibrate
carrier 3
Calibrate
carrier 4
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
TX Bay
y Level Offset =
40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz
35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHz
prior to calibration
TX Bay
y Level Offset =
40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz
35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHz
prior to calibration
TX Bay
y Level Offset =
40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz
35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHz
prior to calibration
TX Bay
y Level Offset =
40 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz
35 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHz
prior to calibration
0 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
−
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
dB
dB
. . . continued on next page
A-11
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
– continued
Table A-11: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 3 or 4–Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–4, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–5, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–6, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–10, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
BBX–11, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
BBX–12, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
−
−
−
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
Calibration
Audit
carrier 3
Calibration
Audit
carrier 4
0 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+1.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
−
Comments:
A-12
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
– continued
TX Bay Level Offset/Power Output Verification for 6–Sector Configurations
1–Carrier
2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
Table A-12: TX BLO Calibration (6–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
−
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–4, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–5, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–6, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–10, ANT–4 =
BBX–3, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–11, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–12, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
Calibrate
carrier 1
−
−
−
Calibrate
carrier 2
TX Bay Level Offset =
43 dB +/– 5 for 800 MHz
38 dB +/–5 for 1.9 GHz
prior to calibration
TX Bay Level Offset = 43 dB +/– 5 for
800 MHz 38 dB +/–5 for 11.9
9 GHz prior
to calibration
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
A-13
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
– continued
Table A-12: TX BLO Calibration (6–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK
Parameter
Specification
Comments
−
BBX–1, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–2, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
BBX–3, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–4, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–5, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–6, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–7, ANT–1 =
BBX–r, ANT–1 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–8, ANT–2 =
BBX–r, ANT–2 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–9, ANT–3 =
BBX–r, ANT–3 =
dB
dB
BBX–10, ANT–4 =
BBX–r, ANT–4 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–11, ANT–5 =
BBX–r, ANT–5 =
dB
dB
−
BBX–12, ANT–6 =
BBX–r, ANT–6 =
dB
dB
−
−
−
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
0 dB (+1.5
dB)) for gain
g set resolution
post calibration
0 dB (+1.5
dB)) for gain
g set resolution
post calibration
Comments:
A-14
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
– continued
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Table A-13: BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
SIF: Misc. alarm tests
Verify per procedure
−
MGLI redundancy test
Verify per procedure
−
GLI redundancy test
Verify per procedure
−
Power supply/converter
redundancy
Verify per procedure
−
Misc. alarm tests
Verify per procedure
−
CSM & GPS
redundancy/alarm tests
Verify per procedure
−
PA redundancy test
Verify per procedure
Data
Comments:
TX Antenna VSWR
Table A-14: TX Antenna VSWR
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
VSWR –
Antenna 1
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 2
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 3
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 4
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 5
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 6
< (1.5 : 1)
Data
Comments:
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
A-15
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets for Multi–Carrier
– continued
RX Antenna VSWR
Table A-15: RX Antenna VSWR
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
VSWR –
Antenna 1
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 2
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 3
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 4
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 5
< (1.5 : 1)
−
VSWR –
Antenna 6
< (1.5 : 1)
Data
Comments:
AMR Verification
Table A-16: AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification
OK
Parameter
Specification
−
Verify CDI alarm input
operation (“ALARM A”
(numbers 1 –18)
BTS Relay #XX –
Contact Alarm
Sets/Clears
−
Verify CDI alarm input
operation (“ALARM B”
(numbers 19 –36)
BTS Relay #XX –
Contact Alarm
Sets/Clears
Data
Comments:
A-16
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Site Serial Number Checklist
Date
Site
C–CCP Shelf
Site I/O A & B
C–CCP Shelf
CSM–1
CSM–2
HSO
CCD–1
CCD–2
AMR–1
AMR–2
MPC–1
MPC–2
Fans 1–3
GLI–1
GLI–2
BBX–1
BBX–2
BBX–3
BBX–4
BBX–5
BBX–6
BBX–7
BBX–8
BBX–9
BBX–10
BBX–11
BBX–12
BBX–r
MCC–1
MCC–2
MCC–3
MCC–4
MCC–5
MCC–6
MCC–7
MCC–8
MCC–9
MCC–10
MCC–11
MCC–12
MCIO
SWITCH
C–CCP PS–1
C–CCP PS–2
C–CCP PS–3
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
A-17
A
Site Serial Number Checklist
– continued
Notes
A-18
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Appendix B: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information
Appendix Content
THIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALL
APPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.
5/21/04
Guide Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is In This Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–2
Book Catalogs and Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Book Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–3
1–5
Physical Page Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Text Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–6
1–6
1–7
1–9
Frame and Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frames With Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Charts and Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Types In This Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item/Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step/Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–13
1–14
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–16
Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–17
1–17
1–17
1–18
1–19
Map Title Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
PN Offset Programming Information
PN Offset Background
All channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHz
CDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 128 possible Walsh
code functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair of
PN sequences unique to each sector.
Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmitted
from the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronize
to the next strongest sector.
The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBXs, where the corresponding
I & Q registers reside.
The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)
basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown of
this information is found in Table B-1.
PN Offset Usage
Only the 14–chip delay is currently in use. It is important to determine
the RF chip delay to be able to test the BTS functionality. This can be
done by ascertaining if the CDF file FineTxAdj value was set to “on”
when the MCC was downloaded with “image data”. The FineTxAdj
value is used to compensate for the processing delay (approximately
20 mS) in the BTS using any type of mobile meeting IS–97
specifications.
If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj has
been set for the 14 chip table.
NOTE
CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMAL
or HEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. If
necessary, convert HEX values in Table B-1 to decimal
before comparing them to cdf file I & Q value
assignments.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
B-1
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
17523
32292
4700
14406
14899
17025
14745
2783
5832
12407
31295
7581
18523
29920
25184
26282
30623
15540
23026
20019
4050
1557
30262
18000
20056
12143
17437
17438
5102
9302
17154
5198
4606
24804
17180
10507
10157
23850
31425
4075
10030
16984
14225
26519
27775
30100
7922
14199
17637
23081
5099
23459
32589
17398
26333
4011
2256
18651
1094
21202
13841
31767
18890
30999
22420
20168
12354
11187
11834
10395
28035
27399
22087
2077
13758
11778
3543
7184
2362
25840
12177
10402
1917
17708
10630
6812
14350
10999
25003
2652
19898
2010
25936
28531
11952
31947
25589
11345
28198
13947
8462
9595
(Hex.)
4473
7E24
125C
3846
3A33
4281
3999
0ADF
16C8
3077
7A3F
1D9D
485B
74E0
6260
66AA
779F
3CB4
59F2
4E33
0FD2
0615
7636
4650
4E58
2F6F
441D
441E
13EE
2456
4302
144E
11FE
60E4
431C
290B
27AD
5D2A
7AC1
0FEB
272E
4258
3791
6797
6C7F
7594
1EF2
3777
44E5
5A29
13EB
5BA3
7F4D
43F6
66DD
0FAB
08D0
48DB
0446
52D2
3611
7C17
49CA
7917
5794
4EC8
3042
2BB3
2E3A
289B
6D83
6B07
5647
081D
35BE
2E02
0DD7
1C10
093A
64F0
2F91
28A2
077D
452C
2986
1A9C
380E
2AF7
61AB
0A5C
4DBA
07DA
6550
6F73
2EB0
7CCB
63F5
2C51
6E26
367B
210E
257B
. . . continued on next page
B-2
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
32743
7114
7699
19339
28212
29587
19715
14901
20160
22249
26582
7153
15127
15274
23149
16340
27052
13519
10620
15978
27966
12479
1536
3199
4549
17888
13117
7506
27626
31109
29755
26711
20397
18608
7391
23168
23466
15932
25798
28134
28024
6335
21508
26338
17186
22462
3908
25390
27891
9620
4670
14672
29415
20610
6479
10957
18426
22726
5247
29953
5796
16829
4528
5415
10294
17046
7846
10762
13814
16854
795
9774
24291
3172
2229
21283
16905
7062
7532
25575
14244
28053
30408
5094
16222
7159
174
25530
2320
23113
23985
2604
1826
30853
15699
2589
25000
18163
12555
8670
(Hex.)
7FE7
1BCA
1E13
4B8B
6E34
7393
4D03
3A35
4EC0
56E9
67D6
1BF1
3B17
3BAA
5A6D
3FD4
69AC
34CF
297C
3E6A
6D3E
30BF
0600
0C7F
11C5
45E0
333D
1D52
6BEA
7985
743B
6857
4FAD
48B0
1CDF
5A80
5BAA
3E3C
64C6
6DE6
6D78
18BF
5404
66E2
4322
57BE
0F44
632E
6CF3
2594
123E
3950
72E7
5082
194F
2ACD
47FA
58C6
147F
7501
16A4
41BD
11B0
1527
2836
4296
1EA6
2A0A
35F6
41D6
031B
262E
5EE3
0C64
08B5
5323
4209
1B96
1D6C
63E7
37A4
6D95
76C8
13E6
3F5E
1BF7
00AE
63BA
0910
5A49
5DB1
0A2C
0722
7885
3D53
0A1D
61A8
46F3
310B
21DE
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
B-3
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
6491
16876
17034
32405
27417
8382
5624
1424
13034
15682
27101
8521
30232
6429
27116
4238
5128
14846
13024
10625
31724
13811
24915
1213
2290
31551
12088
7722
27312
23130
594
25804
31013
32585
3077
17231
31554
8764
15375
13428
17658
13475
22095
24805
4307
23292
1377
28654
6350
16770
1290
4407
1163
12215
7253
8978
25547
3130
31406
6222
20340
25094
23380
10926
22821
31634
4403
689
27045
27557
16307
22338
27550
22096
23136
12199
1213
936
6272
32446
13555
8789
24821
21068
31891
5321
551
12115
4902
1991
14404
17982
19566
2970
23055
15158
29094
653
19155
23588
(Hex.)
195B
41EC
428A
7E95
6B19
20BE
15F8
0590
32EA
3D42
69DD
2149
7618
191D
69EC
108E
1408
39FE
32E0
2981
7BEC
35F3
6153
04BD
08F2
7B3F
2F38
1E2A
6AB0
5A5A
0252
64CC
7925
7F49
0C05
434F
7B42
223C
3C0F
3474
44FA
34A3
564F
60E5
10D3
5AFC
0561
6FEE
18CE
4182
050A
1137
048B
2FB7
1C55
2312
63CB
0C3A
7AAE
184E
4F74
6206
5B54
2AAE
5925
7B92
1133
02B1
69A5
6BA5
3FB3
5742
6B9E
5650
5A60
2FA7
04BD
03A8
1880
7EBE
34F3
2255
60F5
524C
7C93
14C9
0227
2F53
1326
07C7
3844
463E
4C6E
0B9A
5A0F
3B36
71A6
028D
4AD3
5C24
. . . continued on next page
B-4
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
14726
25685
21356
12149
28966
22898
1713
30010
2365
27179
29740
5665
23671
1680
25861
25712
19245
26887
30897
11496
1278
31555
29171
20472
5816
30270
22188
6182
32333
14046
15873
19843
29367
13352
22977
31691
10637
25454
18610
6368
7887
7730
23476
889
21141
20520
21669
15967
21639
31120
10878
31060
30875
11496
24545
9586
20984
30389
7298
18934
23137
24597
23301
7764
14518
21634
11546
26454
15938
9050
3103
758
16528
20375
10208
17698
8405
28634
1951
20344
26696
3355
11975
31942
9737
9638
30643
13230
22185
2055
8767
15852
16125
6074
31245
15880
20371
8666
816
22309
(Hex.)
3986
6455
536C
2F75
7126
5972
06B1
753A
093D
6A2B
742C
1621
5C77
0690
6505
6470
4B2D
6907
78B1
2CE8
04FE
7B43
71F3
4FF8
16B8
763E
56AC
1826
7E4D
36DE
3E01
4D83
72B7
3428
59C1
7BCB
298D
636E
48B2
18E0
1ECF
1E32
5BB4
0379
5295
5028
54A5
3E5F
5487
7990
2A7E
7954
789B
2CE8
5FE1
2572
51F8
76B5
1C82
49F6
5A61
6015
5B05
1E54
38B6
5482
2D1A
6756
3E42
235A
0C1F
02F6
4090
4F97
27E0
4522
20D5
6FDA
079F
4F78
6848
0D1B
2EC7
7CC6
2609
25A6
77B3
33AE
56A9
0807
223F
3DEC
3EFD
17BA
7A0D
3E08
4F93
21DA
0330
5725
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
B-5
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
3698
16322
17429
21730
17808
30068
12737
28241
20371
13829
13366
25732
19864
5187
23219
28242
6243
445
21346
13256
18472
25945
31051
1093
5829
31546
29833
18146
24813
47
3202
21571
7469
25297
8175
28519
4991
7907
17728
14415
30976
26376
19063
19160
3800
8307
12918
19642
24873
22071
29563
13078
10460
17590
20277
19988
6781
32501
6024
20520
31951
26063
27203
6614
10970
5511
17119
16064
31614
4660
13881
16819
6371
24673
6055
10009
5957
11597
22155
15050
16450
27899
2016
17153
15849
30581
3600
4097
671
20774
24471
27341
19388
25278
9505
26143
13359
2154
13747
27646
(Hex.)
0E72
3FC2
4415
54E2
4590
7574
31C1
6E51
4F93
3605
3436
6484
4D98
1443
5AB3
6E52
1863
01BD
5362
33C8
4828
6559
794B
0445
16C5
7B3A
7489
46E2
60ED
002F
0C82
5443
1D2D
62D1
1FEF
6F67
137F
1EE3
4540
384F
7900
6708
4A77
4AD8
0ED8
2073
3276
4CBA
6129
5637
737B
3316
28DC
44B6
4F35
4E14
1A7D
7EF5
1788
5028
7CCF
65CF
6A43
19D6
2ADA
1587
42DF
3EC0
7B7E
1234
3639
41B3
18E3
6061
17A7
2719
1745
2D4D
568B
3ACA
4042
6CFB
07E0
4301
3DE9
7775
0E10
1001
029F
5126
5F97
6ACD
4BBC
62BE
2521
661F
342F
086A
35B3
6BFE
. . . continued on next page
B-6
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
13904
27198
3685
16820
22479
6850
15434
19332
8518
14698
21476
30475
23984
1912
26735
15705
3881
20434
16779
31413
16860
8322
28530
26934
18806
20216
9245
8271
18684
8220
6837
9613
31632
27448
12417
30901
9366
12225
21458
6466
8999
26718
3230
27961
28465
6791
17338
11832
11407
15553
1056
1413
3311
4951
749
6307
961
2358
28350
31198
11467
8862
6327
7443
28574
25093
6139
22047
32545
7112
28535
10378
15065
5125
12528
23215
20959
3568
26453
29421
24555
10779
25260
16084
26028
29852
14978
12182
25143
15838
5336
21885
20561
30097
21877
23589
26060
9964
25959
3294
(Hex.)
3650
6A3E
0E65
41B4
57CF
1AC2
3C4A
4B84
2146
396A
53E4
770B
5DB0
0778
686F
3D59
0F29
4FD2
418B
7AB5
41DC
2082
6F72
6936
4976
4EF8
241D
204F
48FC
201C
1AB5
258D
7B90
6B38
3081
78B5
2496
2FC1
53D2
1942
2327
685E
0C9E
6D39
6F31
1A87
43BA
2E38
2C8F
3CC1
0420
0585
0CEF
1357
02ED
18A3
03C1
0936
6EBE
79DE
2CCB
229E
18B7
1D13
6F9E
6205
17FB
561F
7F21
1BC8
6F77
288A
3AD9
1405
30F0
5AAF
51DF
0DF0
6755
72ED
5FEB
2A1B
62AC
3ED4
65AC
749C
3A82
2F96
6237
3DDE
14D8
557D
5051
7591
5575
5C25
65CC
26EC
6567
0CDE
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
B-7
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
17418
14952
52
27254
15064
10942
377
14303
24427
26629
20011
16086
24374
9969
29364
25560
28281
7327
32449
26334
14760
15128
29912
4244
8499
9362
10175
30957
12755
19350
1153
29304
6041
21668
28048
10096
23388
15542
24013
2684
19018
25501
4489
31011
29448
25461
11846
30331
10588
32154
30173
15515
5371
10242
28052
14714
19550
8866
15297
10898
31315
19475
1278
11431
31392
4381
14898
23959
16091
9037
24162
6383
27183
16872
9072
12966
28886
25118
20424
6729
20983
12372
13948
27547
8152
17354
17835
14378
7453
26317
5955
10346
13200
30402
7311
3082
21398
31104
24272
27123
(Hex.)
440A
3A68
0034
6A76
3AD8
2ABE
0179
37DF
5F6B
6805
4E2B
3ED6
5F36
26F1
72B4
63D8
6E79
1C9F
7EC1
66DE
39A8
3B18
74D8
1094
2133
2492
27BF
78ED
31D3
4B96
0481
7278
1799
54A4
6D90
2770
5B5C
3CB6
5DCD
0A7C
4A4A
639D
1189
7923
7308
6375
2E46
767B
295C
7D9A
75DD
3C9B
14FB
2802
6D94
397A
4C5E
22A2
3BC1
2A92
7A53
4C13
04FE
2CA7
7AA0
111D
3A32
5D97
3EDB
234D
5E62
18EF
6A2F
41E8
2370
32A6
70D6
621E
4FC8
1A49
51F7
3054
367C
6B9B
1FD8
43CA
45AB
382A
1D1D
66CD
1743
286A
3390
76C2
1C8F
0C0A
5396
7980
5ED0
69F3
. . . continued on next page
B-8
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
29572
13173
10735
224
12083
22822
2934
27692
10205
7011
22098
2640
4408
102
27632
19646
26967
32008
7873
655
25274
16210
11631
8535
19293
12110
21538
10579
13032
14717
11666
25809
5008
32418
22175
11742
22546
21413
133
4915
8736
1397
18024
15532
26870
5904
24341
13041
23478
1862
5578
25731
10662
11084
31098
16408
6362
2719
14732
22744
1476
8445
21118
22198
22030
10363
25802
2496
31288
24248
14327
23154
13394
1806
17179
10856
25755
15674
7083
29096
3038
16277
25525
20465
28855
32732
20373
9469
26155
6957
12214
21479
31914
32311
11276
20626
423
2679
15537
10818
(Hex.)
7384
3375
29EF
00E0
2F33
5926
0B76
6C2C
27DD
1B63
5652
0A50
1138
0066
6BF0
4CBE
6957
7D08
1EC1
028F
62BA
3F52
2D6F
2157
4B5D
2F4E
5422
2953
32E8
397D
2D92
64D1
1390
7EA2
569F
2DDE
5812
53A5
0085
1333
2220
0575
4668
3CAC
68F6
1710
5F15
32F1
5BB6
0746
15CA
6483
29A6
2B4C
797A
4018
18DA
0A9F
398C
58D8
05C4
20FD
527E
56B6
560E
287B
64CA
09C0
7A38
5EB8
37F7
5A72
3452
070E
431B
2A68
649B
3D3A
1BAB
71A8
0BDE
3F95
63B5
4FF1
70B7
7FDC
4F95
24FD
662B
1B2D
2FB6
53E7
7CAA
7E37
2C0C
5092
01A7
0A77
3CB1
2A42
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
B-9
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
5850
5552
12589
23008
27636
17600
17000
21913
30320
28240
7260
17906
5882
22080
12183
23082
17435
18527
31902
18783
20027
7982
20587
10004
13459
13383
28930
4860
13108
24161
20067
2667
13372
28743
24489
249
19960
29682
31101
27148
26706
5148
4216
5762
245
21882
3763
206
28798
32402
23074
20250
14629
29175
13943
11072
29492
5719
7347
12156
25623
27725
28870
31478
28530
24834
9075
32265
3175
17434
12178
25613
31692
25384
18908
25816
4661
31115
7691
1311
16471
15771
16112
21062
29690
10141
19014
22141
11852
26404
30663
32524
28644
10228
23536
18045
25441
27066
13740
13815
(Hex.)
16DA
15B0
312D
59E0
6BF4
44C0
4268
5599
7670
6E50
1C5C
45F2
16FA
5640
2F97
5A2A
441B
485F
7C9E
495F
4E3B
1F2E
506B
2714
3493
3447
7102
12FC
3334
5E61
4E63
0A6B
343C
7047
5FA9
00F9
4DF8
73F2
797D
6A0C
6852
141C
1078
1682
00F5
557A
0EB3
00CE
707E
7E92
5A22
4F1A
3925
71F7
3677
2B40
7334
1657
1CB3
2F7C
6417
6C4D
70C6
7AF6
6F72
6102
2373
7E09
0C67
441A
2F92
640D
7BCC
6328
49DC
64D8
1235
798B
1E0B
051F
4057
3D9B
3EF0
5246
73FA
279D
4A46
567D
2E4C
6724
77C7
7F0C
6FE4
27F4
5BF0
467D
6361
69BA
35AC
35F7
. . . continued on next page
B-10
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
13463
15417
23101
14957
23429
12990
12421
28875
4009
1872
15203
30109
24001
4862
14091
6702
3067
28643
21379
20276
25337
19683
10147
16791
17359
13248
22740
13095
10345
30342
27866
9559
8808
12744
11618
27162
17899
29745
31892
23964
23562
2964
18208
15028
21901
24566
18994
13608
27492
11706
3684
23715
15314
32469
9816
4444
5664
7358
27264
28128
30168
29971
3409
16910
20739
10191
12819
19295
10072
15191
27748
720
29799
27640
263
24734
16615
20378
25116
19669
14656
27151
28728
25092
22601
2471
25309
15358
17739
12643
32730
19122
16870
10787
18400
20295
1937
17963
7438
12938
(Hex.)
3497
3C39
5A3D
3A6D
5B85
32BE
3085
70CB
0FA9
0750
3B63
759D
5DC1
12FE
370B
1A2E
0BFB
6FE3
5383
4F34
62F9
4CE3
27A3
4197
43CF
33C0
58D4
3327
2869
7686
6CDA
2557
2268
31C8
2D62
6A1A
45EB
7431
7C94
5D9C
5C0A
0B94
4720
3AB4
558D
5FF6
4A32
3528
6B64
2DBA
0E64
5CA3
3BD2
7ED5
2658
115C
1620
1CBE
6A80
6DE0
75D8
7513
0D51
420E
5103
27CF
3213
4B5F
2758
3B57
6C64
02D0
7467
6BF8
0107
609E
40E7
4F9A
621C
4CD5
3940
6A0F
7038
6204
5849
09A7
62DD
3BFE
454B
3163
7FDA
4AB2
41E6
2A23
47E0
4F47
0791
462B
1D0E
328A
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
B-11
PN Offset Programming Information
– continued
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
Pilot
PN
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
B-12
14–Chip Delay
(Dec.)
14301
23380
11338
2995
23390
14473
6530
20452
12226
1058
12026
19272
29989
8526
18139
3247
28919
7292
20740
27994
2224
6827
(Hex.)
37DD
5B54
2C4A
0BB3
5B5E
3889
1982
4FE4
2FC2
0422
2EFA
4B48
7525
214E
46DB
0CAF
70F7
1C7C
5104
6D5A
08B0
1AAB
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Appendix C: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Appendix Content
THIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALL
APPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.
5/21/04
Guide Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is In This Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–2
Book Catalogs and Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Book Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–3
1–5
Physical Page Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Text Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–6
1–6
1–7
1–9
Frame and Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frames With Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Charts and Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Types In This Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item/Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step/Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–13
1–14
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–16
Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–17
1–17
1–17
1–18
1–19
Map Title Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Usage & Background
Periodic maintenance of a site may also may mandate re–optimization of
specific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines is
included in the following tables.
NOTE
Re–optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed in
the tables below must be performed anytime an RF cable
associated with it is replaced.
BTS Frame
Table C-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS
Item Replaced
Optimize:
C–CCP Shelf
All sector TX and RX paths to all
Combined CDMA Channel Processor
(C–CCP) shelves.
Multicoupler/
Preselector Card
The three or six affected sector RX paths for
the C–CCP shelf in the BTS frames.
BBX board
RX and TX paths of the affected C–CCP
shelf / BBX board.
MCIO Card
All RX and TX paths of the affected
CDMA carrier.
Any PA Module
All sector/carrier TX paths.
Parallel PA Combiner
All sector/carrier TX paths.
TX Filter
The affected sector TX path.
Enhanced Trunking
Module
All sector/carrier TX paths.
Ancillary Frame
Optimize:
Item Replaced
Directional Coupler
All affected sector RX and TX paths to all
BTS frame shelves.
Site filter
All affected RX sector paths in all shelves
in all BTS frames.
Inter-frame Cabling
Optimization must be performed after the replacement of any RF cabling
between BTS frames.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
C-1
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
– continued
Table C-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame Cabling
Item Replaced
Optimize:
Ancillary frame to BTS
frame (RX) cables
The affected sector/antenna RX
paths.
BTS frame to ancillary frame
(TX) cables
The affected sector/antenna TX paths.
Detailed Optimization/ATP Test
Matrix
Table C-3 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to be
performed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. It
is also assumed that all modules are placed OOS–ROM via the LMF
until full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.
The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.
IMPORTANT
Not every procedure required to bring the site back on line
is indicated in Table C-3. It is meant to be used as a
guideline ONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiar
enough with the BTS Optimization/ATP procedure to
understand which test equipment set ups, calibrations, and
BTS site preparation will be required before performing the
Table # procedures referenced.
Various passive BTS components (such as the TX and RX directional
couplers, Preselector IO, MCIO, etc.) only call for a TX or RX
calibration audit to be performed in lieu of a full path calibration. If the
RX or TX path calibration audit fails, the entire RF path calibration will
need to be repeated. If the RF path calibration fails, further
troubleshooting is warranted.
Whenever any C–CCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed that
only power to the C–CCP shelf being replaced is turned off via the
breaker supplying that shelf.
Whenever any DISTRIBUTION BACKPLANE is replaced it is assumed
that the power to the entire RFM frame is removed and the Preselector
I/O is replaced. The modem frame should be brought up as if it were a
new installation.
NOTE
If any significant change in signal level results from any
component being replaced in the RX or TX signal flow
paths, it would be identified by re–running the RX and TX
calibration audit command.
C-2
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
– continued
When the MCIO is replaced, the C–CCP shelf remains powered up. The
BBX boards may need to be removed, then re–installed into their
original slots, and re–downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TX
calibration audits should then be performed.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
C-3
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
– continued
Table 2-1
2-2
Initial Boards/ Modules Install,
Preliminary Operations, CDF Site
Equipage; etc.
Table 2-2
Table 2-4
2-1
2-6
DC Power Pre-Test Physical Inspect
Table 2-5
2-7
Initial Power-up
Table 3-11
3-32
Ping Processors
Table 3-13
3-35
Download/Enable
MGLIs
Table 3-13
3-35
Download/Enable
GLIs
Table 3-14
3-36
Download CSMs
Table 3-14
3-36
Download MCCs,
Table 3-14
3-36
Download BBXs
Table 3-16
3-39
Enable CSMs
Table 3-17
3-39
Enable MCCs
Table 3-20
3-45
GPS Initialization / Verification
Table 3-21
3-49
HSO Initialization/ Verification
Table 3-38
3-90
Download Offsets
to BBX
Table 4-1
4-5
Spectral Purity
TX Mask ATP
Table 4-1
4-5
Waveform Quality
(rho) ATP
Table 4-1
4-5
Pilot Time Offset
ATP
Table 4-1
4-5
Code Domain
Power/Noise Floor
Table 4-1
4-5
FER Test
PLC
Description
TX Filter
Doc Tbl # Page
Enhanced Trunking Module
Power Converters (See Note)
Switch Card
Power Amplifier
GLI
GPS
CSM
LFR/HSO
MCC
BBX
TX Cables
C–CCP Backplane
RX Cables
Multicoupler/Preselector
RX Filter
MCIO
Directional Coupler (TX)
Directional Coupler (RX)
Table C-3: SC 4812T–MC BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix
NOTE
Replace power converters one card at a time so that power to the C–CCP or PA shelf is not lost. If power to the
C–CCP shelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.
C-4
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Appendix D: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output
Appendix Content
THIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALL
APPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.
5/21/04
Guide Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is In This Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–2
Book Catalogs and Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Book Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–3
1–5
Physical Page Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Text Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–6
1–6
1–7
1–9
Frame and Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frames With Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Charts and Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Types In This Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item/Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step/Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–13
1–14
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–16
Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–17
1–17
1–17
1–18
1–19
Map Title Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
Usage & Background
Table D-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domain
channel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and the
BBX Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant RF
output (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in the table.
The table assumes that the BBX Bay Level Offset (BLO) values have
been calculated.
As an illustration, consider a BBX keyed up to produce a CDMA carrier
with only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled). Pilot gain
is set to 262. In this case, the BBX Gain Set Point is shown to correlate
exactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44 dBm output
range. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).
Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm’
Gainb
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
541
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
533
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
525
–
–
–
–
–
–
44
43
42
41
40
39
517
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.9
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
509
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.8
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
501
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
493
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
485
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
477
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
469
–
–
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
461
–
–
–
–
–
43.9
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
453
–
–
–
–
–
43.8
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
445
–
–
–
–
–
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
437
–
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
429
–
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
421
–
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
413
–
–
–
–
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
405
–
–
–
–
43.8
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
36.8
397
–
–
–
–
43.6
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
36.6
389
–
–
–
–
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
36.4
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
D-1
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
– continued
Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm’
Gainb
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
381
–
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
374
–
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
36.1
366
–
–
–
43.9
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
358
–
–
–
43.7
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
350
–
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
342
–
–
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
35.3
334
–
–
–
43.1
42.1
41.1
40.1
39.1
38.1
37.1
36.1
35.1
326
–
–
43.9
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
34.9
318
–
–
43.7
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
34.7
310
–
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
34.5
302
–
–
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
294
–
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
286
–
43.8
42.8
41.8
40.8
39.8
38.8
37.8
36.8
35.8
34.8
33.8
278
–
43.5
42.5
41.5
40.5
39.5
38.5
37.5
36.5
35.5
34.5
33.5
270
–
43.3
42.3
41.3
40.3
39.3
38.3
37.3
36.3
35.3
34.3
33.3
262
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
254
43.7
42.7
41.7
40.7
39.7
38.7
37.7
36.7
35.7
34.7
33.7
–
246
43.4
42.4
41.4
40.4
39.4
38.4
37.4
36.4
35.4
34.4
33.4
–
238
43.2
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
33.2
–
230
42.9
41.9
40.9
39.9
38.9
37.9
36.9
35.9
34.9
33.9
–
–
222
42.6
41.6
40.6
39.6
38.6
37.6
36.6
35.6
34.6
33.6
–
–
214
42.2
41.2
40.2
39.2
38.2
37.2
36.2
35.2
34.2
33.2
–
–
D-2
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Appendix E: Chapter Title Goes Here
Appendix Content
THIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALL
APPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.
5/21/04
Guide Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is In This Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–2
Book Catalogs and Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Book Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–3
1–5
Physical Page Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Text Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–6
1–6
1–7
1–9
Frame and Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frames With Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Charts and Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Types In This Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item/Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step/Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–13
1–14
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–16
Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–17
1–17
1–17
1–18
1–19
Map Title Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information
Introduction
Programming of each of the BTS BBX synthesizers is performed by the
BTS GLI cards over the Concentration Highway Interface (CHI) bus.
This programming data determines the transmit and receive operating
frequencies (channels) for each BBX.
1900 MHz PCS Channels
Figure E-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS
1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
Figure E-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)
FREQ (MHz)
RX
TX
1851.25 1931.25
CHANNEL
25
275
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1863.75
1943.75
1871.25
1951.25
1883.75
1963.75
1896.25
1976.25
1908.75
1988.75
425
675
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
925
1175
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
FW00463
E-1
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information
– continued
Calculating 1900 MHz Center
Frequencies
Table E-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
S TX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 1930 + 0.05 * 262 = 1943.10 MHz
S RX = TX – 80
Example: Channel 262
RX = 1943.10 – 50 = 1863.10 MHz
Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequency
plan.
Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The
actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band on
both sides of the carrier.
Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier and
the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).
Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
25
0019
50
0032
75
004B
100
0064
125
007D
150
0096
175
00AF
200
00C8
225
00E1
250
00FA
275
0113
300
012C
325
0145
350
015E
375
0177
400
0190
425
01A9
450
01C2
475
01DB
500
01F4
525
020D
550
0226
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1931.25
1932.50
1933.75
1935.00
1936.25
1937.50
1938.75
1940.00
1941.25
1942.50
1943.75
1945.00
1946.25
1947.50
1948.75
1950.00
1951.25
1952.50
1953.75
1955.00
1956.25
1957.50
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1851.25
1852.50
1853.75
1855.00
1856.25
1857.50
1858.75
1860.00
1861.25
1862.50
1863.75
1865.00
1866.25
1867.50
1868.75
1870.00
1871.25
1872.50
1873.75
1875.00
1876.25
1877.50
table continued next page
E-2
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information
– continued
Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal
Hex
575
023F
600
0258
625
0271
650
028A
675
02A3
700
02BC
725
02D5
750
02EE
775
0307
800
0320
825
0339
850
0352
875
036B
900
0384
925
039D
950
03B6
975
03CF
1000
03E8
1025
0401
1050
041A
1075
0433
1100
044C
1125
0465
1150
047E
1175
0497
5/21/04
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1958.75
1960.00
1961.25
1962.50
1963.75
1965.00
1966.25
1967.50
1968.75
1970.00
1971.25
1972.50
1973.75
1975.00
1976.25
1977.50
1978.75
1980.00
1981.25
1982.50
1983.75
1985.00
1986.25
1987.50
1988.75
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1878.75
1880.00
1881.25
1882.50
1883.75
1885.00
1886.25
1887.50
1888.75
1890.00
1891.25
1892.50
1893.75
1895.00
1896.25
1897.50
1898.75
1900.00
1901.25
1902.50
1903.75
1905.00
1906.25
1807.50
1908.75
E-3
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information
– continued
800 MHz CDMA Channels
Figure E-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellular
telephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
893.970
848.970
799
891.480
891.510
846.480
846.510
694
689
777
889.980
890.010
844.980
845.010
666
667
644
356
739
879.990
880.020
834.990
835.020
333
334
311
ËËË
ËËË
ËËË
CDMA NON–WIRELINE (A) BAND
OVERALL NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDS
716
717
870.000
870.030
825.000
825.030
824.040
CHANNEL
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ËËË
ËËË
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ËËË
ËËË ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ËËË
ËËË ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ËË
ÉÉ
ËË
1023
869.040
RX FREQ
(MHz)
1013
TX FREQ
(MHz)
991
Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation).
OVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS
CDMA WIRELINE (B) BAND
FW00402
Calculating 800 MHz Center
Frequencies
Table E-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
S Channels 1–777
TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHz
S Channels 1013–1023
TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# – 1023)
Example: Channel 1015
TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 – 1023) = 869.76 MHz
S RX = TX – 45 MHz
Example: Channel 262
RX = 877.86 –45 = 832.86 MHz
Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
0001
870.0300
825.0300
25
0019
870.7500
825.7500
table continued next page
E-4
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information
– continued
Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
50
0032
871.5000
826.5000
75
004B
872.2500
827.2500
100
0064
873.0000
828.0000
125
007D
873.7500
828.7500
150
0096
874.5000
829.5000
175
00AF
875.2500
830.2500
200
00C8
876.0000
831.0000
225
00E1
876.7500
831.7500
250
00FA
877.5000
832.5000
275
0113
878.2500
833.2500
300
012C
879.0000
834.0000
325
0145
879.7500
834.7500
350
015E
880.5000
835.5000
375
0177
881.2500
836.2500
400
0190
882.0000
837.0000
425
01A9
882.7500
837.7500
450
01C2
883.5000
838.5000
475
01DB
884.2500
839.2500
500
01F4
885.0000
840.0000
525
020D
885.7500
840.7500
550
0226
886.5000
841.5000
575
023F
887.2500
842.2500
600
0258
888.0000
843.0000
625
0271
888.7500
843.7500
650
028A
889.5000
844.5000
675
02A3
890.2500
845.2500
700
02BC
891.0000
846.0000
725
02D5
891.7500
846.7500
750
02EE
892.5000
847.5000
775
0307
893.2500
848.2500
Channel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.
1013
03F5
869.7000
824.7000
NOTE
1023
5/21/04
03FF
870.0000
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
825.0000
E-5
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information
– continued
Notes
E-6
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Appendix F: Test Equipment Preparation
Appendix Content
THIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALL
APPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.
5/21/04
Guide Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is In This Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–2
Book Catalogs and Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Book Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–3
1–5
Physical Page Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Text Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–6
1–6
1–7
1–9
Frame and Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frames With Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Charts and Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Types In This Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item/Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step/Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–13
1–14
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–16
Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–17
1–17
1–17
1–18
1–19
Map Title Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Equipment Preparation
Purpose
Pre–testing set–up information covered includes verification and setting
GPIB addresses, inter–unit cabling, connectivity testing, pre–test control
settings, and equipment calibration for items which are not calibrated
with the Calibrate Test Equipment function of the LMF.
The following procedures include verification and changing GPIB
addresses for the various items of CDMA test equipment supported by
the LMF.
Prepare test sets
This appendix provides information on pre–testing set–up for the
following test equipment items (not required for the Cybertest test set):
S Agilent E7495A test equipment set–up
S Agilent E4406A transmitter test set
S Agilent E4432B signal generator
S Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer
S Advantest R3562 signal generator
S Agilent 8935 analyzer (formerly HP 8935)
S HP 8921 with PCS interface analyzer
S Advantest R3465 analyzer
S Motorola CyberTest
S HP 437 power meter
S Gigatronics 8541C power meter
S GPIB adapter
Test Equipment Set-up
S HP8921A System Connectivity Test
S HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing
S Calibrating Test Cable Set–up using Advantest R3465
Calibrating test sets
S Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester Self-alignment (Calibration)
S HP 437 Power Meter (Calibration)
S Gigatronics 8542 power meter (Calibration)
Agilent E7495A Test Equipment
Setup
This test equipment requires a warm-up period of at least 30 minutes
before BTS testing or calibration begins.
Using the Agilent E7495A with the LMF
The Agilent E7495A does not require the use of the 19MHz frequency
reference; if connected, it will be ignored. The Even Sec SYNC
connection is required.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
F-1
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
The Agilent E7495A signal generator is only calibrated down to –80db.
In order to achieve accurate FER testing, be sure the RX setup includes
at least 40db of attenuation. This will ensure the signal generator will
output sufficient power to operate in the calibrated range.
Set the IP Address as described in Table F-1.
Table F-1: Set IP Address on Agilent E7495A test set
n Step
Action
Use the System Button > Controls >IPAdmin to set an
IP address on the E7495A as 128.0.0.49, and Netmask to
255.255.255.128.
Connections
Motorola recommends using a hub with BNC and RJ–45 connections.
Suggested models: Netgear model EN104 (4 port) or EN108 (8 port). Do
NOT use model numbers ending with “TP”; those have no BNC
connectors.
The LMF will connect to the hub which in turn is connected to the BTS
and to the Agilent E7495A.
Agilent E7495A to Hub – This is an Ethernet cable, RJ–45 to RJ–45.
LMF to Hub – Use one of the following cables to connect the LMF to
the Hub:
– Ethernet cable, RJ–45–to–RJ–45. Be sure the LAN card is set for
either AUTO or to use the RJ–45 only.
– Coax cable between LAN card and Hub. Use a BNC “T” connector
on the hub. If the hub does not have BNC connectors, use a
BNC–to–UTP adapter with the “T” connector. Connect a coaxial
cable between the LAN card and one end of the BNC “T” crossbar.
Hub to BTS – With a BNC “T” connector on the hub, connect a coaxial
cable between the open end of the “T” crossbar and the BTS LAN
connection.
Detecting Test Equipment
Be sure no other equipment is connected to the LMF. The E7495A must
be connected to the LAN, as described above, for the LMF to detect it.
Perform the procedures described in Table F-2.
Table F-2: Detecting Agilent E7495A Test Equipment
n Step
Action
Click the Tools Menu.
Choose Options.
. . . continued on next page
F-2
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
Table F-2: Detecting Agilent E7495A Test Equipment
n Step
Action
Check Agilent E7495A option in non–GPIB Test
Equipment and enter its IP number.
Click Apply and wait a moment.
Click Dismiss.
Power Sensor Calibration
Table F-3 describes the E7495A Power Sensor Calibration.
Table F-3: E7495A Power Sensor Calibration
n Step
5/21/04
Action
Display the power meter screen.
Zero the power meter. Make sure equipment is connected
as shown in Figure F-1.
– Press the Zero softkey.
– Press the Continue softkey.
Calibrate the power meter:
– Press Ref CF.
– Enter the reference cal factor, reading it off the label
on the power sensor head.
– Press Calibrate.
– Connect the power sensor (see Figure F-2).
– Press Continue.
– Press Cal Factor.
– Enter the cal factor from the label on the power
sensor head. Select a cal factor that is within the
operating frequency of the BTS being calibrated.
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
F-3
Test Equipment Preparation
– continued
Figure F-1: Agilent E7495A Pre–Power Sensor Calibration connection
GPIO
Port 2
RF In
Power REF
50 MHz
Serial 1
Sensor
Serial 2
Ext Ref
In
Even Second
Sync In
Use only
Agilent supplied
power adapter
Port 1
RF Out / SWR
GPS
Antenna
POWER SENSOR
NOT CONNECTED
Figure F-2: Agilent E7495A Power Sensor Calibration connection
POWER SENSOR
CONNECTED
GPIO
Port 2
RF In
Power REF
50 MHz
Serial 1
Sensor
Serial 2
Ext Ref
In
Even Second
Sync In
Use only
Agilent supplied
power adapter
Port 1
RF Out / SWR
GPS
Antenna
Cable Calibration
Follow the directions in the LMF application program to calibrate
cables.
– Calibrate the short cable (see Figure 3-13) and two 10 dB
attenuators to establish a baseline and then calibrate the TX and RX
set–ups. Because at least 40 dB of attenuation is needed when
testing the FER, the set–up for RX is the same as for TX.
F-4
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
Agilent E4406A Transmitter
Tester GPIB Address
Follow the procedure in Table F-4 and refer to Figure F-3 to verify and,
if necessary, change the Agilent E4406A GPIB address.
Figure F-3: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address
Active Function Area
Softkey Label Display Area
System Key
Bk Sp Key
Enter Key
Softkey Buttons
Data Entry Keypad
ti-CDMA-WP-00085-v01-ildoc-ftw
Table F-4: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address
Step
Action
In the SYSTEM section of the instrument front panel, press the System key.
– The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.
Press the Config I/O softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.
– The softkey labels will change.
– The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
3a
Press the GPIB Address softkey button. In the on–screen Active Function Area, GPIB Address will
be displayed followed by the current GPIB address.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
F-5
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Table F-4: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address
Step
Action
3b
On the front panel Data Entry keypad, enter the communications system analyzer GPIB address of 18.
– The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.
– Digits entered with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the display.
NOTE
To correct an entry, press the Bk Sp key at the upper right of the keypad to delete one character at a
time.
3c
Press the Enter softkey button or the keypad Enter key to set the new GPIB address.
– The Config I/O softkey labels will reappear.
– The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label.
Agilent E4432B Signal
Generator GPIB Address
Follow the procedure in Table F-5 and refer to Figure F-4 to verify and,
if necessary, change the Agilent E4432B GPIB address.
Figure F-4: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address
Active Entry
Area
Softkey Label
Display Area
Utility Key
Softkey
Buttons
Numeric
Keypad
Backspace
Key
ti-CDMA-WP-00086-v01-ildoc-ftw
F-6
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Table F-5: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address
Step
Action
In the MENUS section of the instrument front panel, press the Utility key.
– The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.
Press the GPIB/RS232 softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.
– The softkey labels will change.
– The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 1, perform the following to change it:
3a
Press the GPIB Address softkey button.
– The GPIB Address label and current GPIB address will change to boldface.
– In the on–screen Active Entry Area, Address: will be displayed followed by the current GPIB
address.
3b
On the front panel Numeric keypad, enter the signal generator GPIB address of 1.
– The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.
– Digits entered with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the Active Entry display.
NOTE
To correct an entry, press the backspace key at the lower right of the keypad to delete one character at
a time.
3c
Press the Enter softkey button to set the new GPIB address.
– The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label.
Advantest R3267 Spectrum
Analyzer GPIB Address
Perform the procedure in Table F-6 and refer to Figure F-5 to verify and,
if necessary, change the Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer GPIB
address.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
F-7
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Figure F-5: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address
Softkey Lable
Display Area
Softkey
Buttons
on
REMOTE LED
LCL Key
CONFIG Key
Keypad
BS Key
ENTR Key
ti-CDMA-WP-00083-v01-ildoc-ftw
Table F-6: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address
Step
Action
If the REMOTE LED is lighted, press the LCL key.
– The LED extinguishes.
Press the CONFIG key.
– The CONFIG softkey labels will appear in the softkey label display area of the instrument
display.
– The current GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
3a
Press the GPIB Address softkey. A GPIB Address entry window will open in the instrument display
showing the current GPIB address.
3b
Enter 18 on the keypad in the ENTRY section of the instrument front panel. Characters typed on the
keypad will replace the address displayed in the GPIB Address entry window.
NOTE
To correct an entry, press the BS (backspace) key at the lower right of the keypad to delete one
character at a time.
3c
F-8
Press the ENTR key to the lower right of the keypad to enter the address.
– The GPIB Address entry window closes.
– The new address is displayed in the bottom portion of the GPIB Address softkey label.
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Advantest R3562 Signal
Generator GPIB Address
Set the GP–IB ADDRESS switch on the rear of the Advantest R3562
signal generator to address 1 as shown in Figure F-6.
Figure F-6: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting
GPIB Address set to “1”
GP–IP ADDRESS
5 4 3 2 1
ti-CDMA-WP-00084-v01-ildoc-ftw
Agilent 8935 Series E6380
(formerly HP 8935) Test Set
GPIB Address
Follow the procedure in Table F-7 and refer to Figure F-7 to verify and,
if necessary, change the HP8935 GPIB address.
Figure F-7: HP8935 Test Set
Preset
Local
Inst Config
Shift
5/21/04
Cursor Control
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
FW00885
F-9
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up
and ready for testing.
Table F-7: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB Address
Step
Action
NOTE
The HP I/O configuration MUST be set to Talk & Listen, or NO device on the GPIB bus will be
accessible. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional information as required.)
To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8935. The
current HP–IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.
NOTE
HP–IB is the same as GPIB.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
– Press Shift and Inst Config.
– Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to the HP–IB Adrs field.
– Press the Cursor Control knob to select the field.
– Turn the Cursor Control knob as required to change the address to 18.
– Press the Cursor Control knob to set the address.
S Press Preset to return to normal operation.
Hewlett Packard HP8921A and
HP83236A/B GPIB Address
Follow the procedure in Table F-8 and refer to Figure F-8, to verify and,
if necessary, change the HP8921A HP83236A GPIB addresses.
F-10
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Figure F-8: HP8921A and HP3236A/B
Local
Preset
Cursor Control
Shift
ti-CDMA-WP-00081-v01-ildoc-ftw
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up
and ready for testing.
Table F-8: Verify and/or Change HP8921A and HP83236A GPIB Addresses
Step
Action
To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8921A. The
current HP–IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.
NOTE
HP–IB is the same as GPIB.
If the current HP–IB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
– Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to More and press the knob to select the field.
– Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to I/O Config and press the knob to select the
field.
– Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to Adrs and press the knob to select the field.
– Turn the Cursor Control knob to change the HP–IB address to 18 and press the knob to set the
address.
– Press Shift and Preset to return to normal operation.
To set the HP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19, set the dip switches as follows:
– A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP–IB/Ser = 1
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
F-11
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Advantest R3465
Communications Test Set GPIB
Address
Follow the steps in Table F-9 and refer to Figure F-9 to verify and, if
necessary, change the GPIB address for the Advantest R3465.
Figure F-9: R3465 Communications Test Set
REF UNLOCK
BNC
“T”
EVEN
SEC/SYNC IN
GPIB and others
CDMA
TIME BASE IN
POWER
OFF
ON
Preset
Vernier Knob
Shift
LCL
REF FW00337
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up
and ready for testing.
Table F-9: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address
Step
Action
To verify that the GPIB address is set correctly, perform the following procedure:
– Press SHIFT then PRESET.
– Press LCL.
– Press the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:
– Turn the vernier knob as required to select 18.
– Press the vernier knob to set the address.
To return to normal operation, press Shift and Preset.
Motorola CyberTest GPIB
Address
Follow the steps in Table F-10 to verify and, if necessary, change the
GPIB address on the Motorola CyberTest. Changing the GPIB address
requires the following items:
S Motorola CyberTest communications analyzer.
S Computer running Windows 3.1/Windows 95.
F-12
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
S Motorola CyberTAME software program “TAME”.
S Parallel printer port cable (shipped with CyberTest).
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up
and ready for testing.
Table F-10: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB A
Step
Action
On the LMF desktop, locate the CyberTAME icon. Double click on the icon
application.
In the CyberTAME window taskbar, under Special, select IEEE.488.2.
CyberTAME software will query the CyberTest Analyzer for its current GPI
open the IEEE 488.2 dialog box. If the current GPIB address is not 18, perfo
procedure to change it:
– Use the up or down increment arrows, or double–click in the field and ty
– Click on the OK button.
The new address will be written to the CyberTest via the parallel port an
NOTE
Verify that the address has been set by repeating steps 2 and 3. The new addr
the IEEE 488.2 dialog box Address field.
HP437 Power Meter GPIB
Address
Follow the steps in Table F-11 and refer to Figure F-10 to verify and, if
necessary, change the HP437 GPIB address.
Figure F-10: HP437 Power Meter
PRESET
SHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON –
ACCESSES FUNCTION AND
DATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIED
WITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ON
THE FRONT PANEL ABOVE
THE BUTTONS
ENTER
NOTE
5/21/04
REF FW00308
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and
ready for testing.
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
F-13
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Table F-11: Verify and/or Change HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address
Step
Action
Press Shift and PRESET.
Use the y arrow key to navigate to HP–IB ADRS and press ENTER.
The HP–IB address is displayed.
NOTE
HP–IB is the same as GPIB.
If the current GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:
– Use the y b arrow keys to change the HP–IB ADRS to 13.
– Press ENTER to set the address.
Press Shift and ENTER to return to a standard configuration.
Gigatronics 8541C Power
Meter GPIB Address
Follow the steps in Table F-12 and refer to Figure F-11 to verify and, if
necessary, change the Gigatronics 8541C power meter GPIB address.
Figure F-11: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail
MENU
ENTER
ARROW
KEYS
REF FW00564
NOTE
This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up
and ready for testing.
Table F-12: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.
Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.
F-14
Press MENU.
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Table F-12: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address
Step
Action
Use the b arrow key to select CONFIG MENU and press ENTER.
Use the b arrow key to select GPIB and press ENTER.
The current Mode and GPIB Address are displayed.
If the Mode is not set to 8541C, perform the following to change it:
Use the a ’ arrow keys as required to select MODE.
Use the by arrow keys as required to set MODE to 8541C.
If the GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:
Use the ’ arrow key to select ADDRESS.
Use the by arrow keys as required to set the GPIB address to 13.
Press ENTER to return to normal operation.
RS232 GPIB Interface Box
Ensure that the RS232 GPIB interface box dip switches are set as shown
in Figure F-12.
Figure F-12: RS232 GPIB Interface Box
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
ON
GPIB ADRS
G MODE
RS232–GPIB
Interface Box
ti-CDMA-WP-00082-v01-ildoc-ftw
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
F-15
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Test Equipment Set-up
Purpose
This section covers other test equipment and peripherals not covered in
Chapter 3. Procedures for the manual testing are covered here, along
with procedures to calibrate the TX and RX cables using the signal
generator and spectrum analyzer.
Equipment Warm up
NOTE
Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes
prior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. This
assures BTS site stability and contributes to optimization
accuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up,
hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as
warm-up time.)
CAUTION
If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter)
has been replaced, re-calibration must be performed.
Failure to do so could introduce measurement errors,
resulting in incorrect measurements and degradation to
system performance..
NOTE
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent
test equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment
after it has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
Prerequisites
Prior to performing any of these procedures, all preparations for
preparing the LMF, updating LMF files, and any other pre-calibration
procedures, as stated in Chapter 3, must have been completed.
HP8921A System Connectivity
Test
Follow the steps in Table F-13 to verify that the connections between the
PCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct, and cables are intact. The
software also performs basic functionality checks of each instrument.
F-16
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
NOTE
Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially system
controllers, from the system before running the
connectivity software.
Table F-13: System Connectivity
Step
Action
NOTE
– Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.
Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.
Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select by pressing the cursor control knob.
In the Choices selection box, select Card.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select by pressing the cursor control knob.
In the Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.
Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it.
The software will prompt you through the connectivity setup.
When the test is complete, position the cursor on STOP TEST and select it; OR press the [K5]
pushbutton.
To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton.
HP PCS Interface Test
Equipment Setup for Manual
Testing
Follow the procedure in Table F-14 to setup the HP PCS Interface Box
for manual testing.
Table F-14: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
n Step
Action
NOTE
Verify GPIB controller is turned off.
Insert HP83236B Manual Control/System card into the memory card slot.
Under Screen Controls, press the [TESTS] push-button to display the TESTS (Main Menu)
screen.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select. In the Choices selection box, select
CARD.
Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select. In the Choices selection box, select
MANUAL.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
F-17
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Table F-14: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
n Step
Action
Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select OR press the K1 push-button.
Set channel number=:
– Position cursor at Channel Number and select.
– Enter the chan# using the numeric keypad and then press [Enter] (the screen will blank).
– When the screen reappears, the chan# will be displayed on the channel number line.
NOTE
– If using a TMPC with Tower Top Amplifier (TTA) skip Step 7.
Set RF Generator level= –119 dBm + Cal factor Example: –119 dBm + 2 dB = –117 dBm
– Continue with Step 9 (skip Step 8).
Set RF Generator level= –116 dBm + Cal factor. Example: –116 dBm + 2 dB = –114 dBm
Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dB:
– Position cursor at RF Generator Level and select.
– Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select.
– Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].
10
Select Back to Previous Menu.
11
Select Quit, then select Yes.
Calibrating Test Cable Setup
using Advantest R3465
NOTE
Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.
Perform the procedure in Table F-15 to calibrate the test cable setup
using the Advantest R3465. Advantest R3465 Manual Test setup and
calibration must be performed at both the TX and RX frequencies.
Table F-15: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step
Action
NOTE
– This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and
stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display.
Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.
Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.
Select the Setup CRT menu key.
. . . continued on next page
F-18
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Table F-15: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step
Action
Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parameters:
NOTE
Fields not listed remain at default.
Generator Mode: SIGNAL
Link: FORWARD
Level Unit: dBm
CalCorrection: ON
Level Offset: OFF
Select the return CRT menu key.
Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area.
Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.
Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.
10
Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle it
OFF.
11
Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.
12
Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.
13
Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561L
CDMA Test Source Unit.
14
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.
15
Record the power meter reading ________________________
16
Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.
NOTE
The Power Meter sensor lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dB
should be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before
connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting the
power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.
17
Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect each
component one–at–a–time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-13,
“Setups A, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each
connection.
Example:
(A) 1st Test Cable
= –0.5 dB
(B) 2nd Test Cable
= –1.4 dB
(C) 20 dB Attenuator
= –20.1 dB
(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler
= –29.8 dB
18
Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
F-19
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Table F-15: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step
Action
19
Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:
Example:
Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dB
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
20
Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area.
21
Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency.
22
Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.
23
Refer to Table 3-30 for assistance in manually setting the cable loss values into the LMF.
F-20
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verifying and Setting GPIB Addresses
– continued
Figure F-13: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465
RF OUT
POWER
SENSOR
(A) & (B)
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
20 DB / 2 WATT
ATTENUATOR
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(D)
100 W
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
5/21/04
FW00320
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
F-21
Test Equipment Calibration
Agilent E4406A Transmitter
Tester Self-alignment
(Calibration)
Refer to Figure F-14 and follow the procedure in Table F-16 to perform
the Agilent E4406A self–alignment (calibration).
Figure F-14: Agilent E4406A
Softkey Label
Display Area
Softkey
Buttons
System
Key
ti-CDMA-WP-00080-v01-ildoc-ftw
Table F-16: Perform Agilent E4406A Self–alignment (Calibration)
Step
Action
In the SYSTEM section of the instrument front panel, press the System key.
– The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.
Press the Alignments softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.
– The softkey labels will change.
Press the Align All Now softkey button.
– All other instrument functions will be suspended during the alignment.
– The display will change to show progress and results of the alignments performed.
– The alignment will take less than one minute.
HP 437 Power Meter
(Calibration)
Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made using
a bolometer–type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.
Follow the steps in Table F-17 to enter information unique to the power
sensor before calibrating the test setup. Refer to Figure F-15 as required.
F-22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Equipment Calibration
– continued
NOTE
This procedure must be done before the automated
calibration to enter power sensor specific calibration
values.
Figure F-15: Power Meter Detail
CONNECT POWER SENSOR
TO POWER REFERENCE
WHEN CALIBRATING UNIT.
POWER REFERENCE IS
ENABLED USING THE SHIFT ’
KEYS
SHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON –
ACCESSES FUNCTION AND
DATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIED
WITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ON
THE FRONT PANEL ABOVE
THE BUTTONS
CONNECT POWER
SENSOR WITH POWER
METER TURNED OFF
FW00
Table F-17: HP 437 Power Meter Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.
Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or mis–calibration.
Make sure the power meter AC LINE pushbutton is OFF.
Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.
Set the AC LINE pushbutton to ON.
NOTE
The calibration should be performed only after the power meter and sensor have been allowed to
warm–up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
Perform the following to set or verify the correct power sensor model:
4a
– Press [SHIFT] then [a] to select SENSOR.
4b
– Identify the power sensor model number from the sensor label.
4c
– Use the [y] or [b] button to select the appropriate model; then press [ENTER].
Refer to the illustration for step 8, and perform the following to ensure the power reference output is
OFF:
5a
– Observe the instrument display and determine if the triangular indicator over PWR REF is
displayed.
5b
– If the triangular indicator is displayed, press [SHIFT] then [’] to turn it off.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
F-23
Test Equipment Calibration
– continued
Table F-17: HP 437 Power Meter Calibration Procedure
Step
Action
Press [ZERO].
– Display will show “Zeroing ******.”
– Wait for process to complete.
Connect the power sensor to the POWER REF output.
Turn on the PWR REF by performing the following:
8a
– Press [SHIFT] then [’].
8b
– Verify that the triangular indicator (B) appears in the display above PWR REF as shown below.
Perform the following to set the REF CF%:
9a
– Press ([SHIFT] then [ZERO]) for CAL.
9b
– Enter the sensor’s REF CF% from the sensor’s decal using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].
(The power meter will display ”CAL *****” for a few seconds.)
NOTE
If the REF CAL FACTOR (REF CF) is not shown on the power sensor, assume it to be 100%.
10
Perform the following to set the CAL FAC %:
10a
– Press [SHIFT] then [FREQ] for CAL FAC.
10b
– On the sensor’s decal, locate an approximate calibration percentage factor (CF%) at the test
frequency.
10c
11
– Enter the sensor’s calibration % (CF%) using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].
–– When complete, the power meter will typically display 0.05 dBm. (Any reading between
0.00 and 0.10 is normal.)
To turn off the PWR REF, perform the following:
11a
– Press [SHIFT] then [’].
11b
– Disconnect the power sensor from the POWER REF output.
Gigatronics 8542 power meter
(Calibration)
Precise transmit output power calibration measurements are made using
a bolometer–type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.
Follow the steps in Table F-18 to enter information unique to the power
sensor. Refer to Figure F-16 as necessary.
F-24
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Test Equipment Calibration
– continued
Table F-18: Calibrate Gigatronics 8542 Power Meter
Step
Action
! CAUTION
Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.
Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.
Make sure the power meter POWER pushbutton is OFF.
Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.
Set the POWER pushbutton to ON.
NOTE
Allow the power meter and sensor to warm up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes before
performing the calibration procedure.
Connect the power sensor to the CALIBRATOR output connector.
Press ZERO.
– Wait for the process to complete. Sensor factory calibration data is read to power meter during this
process.
When the zeroing process is complete, disconnect the power sensor from the CALIBRATOR output.
Figure F-16: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter
CONNECT POWER SENSOR TO
CALIBRATOR POWER REFERENCE
WHEN CALIBRATING/ZEROING UNIT
CONNECT POWER SENSOR
WITH POWER METER
TURNED OFF
AC POWER
FRONT View
GPIB CONNECTION
REAR View
FW00564
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
F-25
Test Equipment Calibration
– continued
Notes
F-26
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Appendix G: VSWR
Appendix Content
THIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALL
APPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.
5/21/04
Guide Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is In This Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–2
Book Catalogs and Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Book Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–3
1–5
Physical Page Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Text Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–6
1–6
1–7
1–9
Frame and Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frames With Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Charts and Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Types In This Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item/Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step/Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–13
1–14
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–16
Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–17
1–17
1–17
1–18
1–19
Map Title Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
Purpose
The following procedures will verify that the Voltage Standing Wave
Ratio (VSWR) of all antennas and associated feed lines fall within
acceptable limits. The tests will be performed on all antennas in a
sequential manner (i.e., ANT 1, then ANT 2) until all antennas/feedlines
have been verified.
These procedures should be performed periodically by measuring each
respective antenna’s VSWR (reflected power) to verify that the antenna
system is within acceptable limits. This will ensure continued peak
system performance.
The antenna VSWR will be calculated at the CDMA carrier frequency
assigned to each antenna. Record and verify that they meet the test
specification of less than or equal to 1.5:1.
NOTE
Motorola recommends that the installer be familiar with
the following procedure in its entirety before beginning the
actual procedure. Ensure that the entire site is currently not
in service.
This test is used to test RX antennas by substituting RX
frequencies for TX frequencies.
Study the site engineering documents and perform the following tests
only after first verifying that the RF cabling configuration required to
interconnect the BTS frames and antennas meet requirements called out
in the BTS Installation Manual.
Test equipment
The following pieces of test equipment will be required to perform this
test:
S LMF
S Directional coupler
S Communications test set
WARNING
Prior to performing antenna tests, insure that no CDMA
BBX channels are keyed. Failure to do so could result in
personal injury or serious equipment damage.
Equipment Setup – HP Test Set
Follow the procedure in Table G-1 to set up test equipment required to
measure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
G-1
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
– continued
Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure – HP Test Set
Step
HP TEST SET
Action
For manual VSWR testing, using external directional coupler, refer to Figure G-1.
– Connect the communications test set RF IN/OUT port to the INPUT port of the directional
coupler.
– Connect the ANT IN port of the communication test set to the reverse (RVS) port on the
directional coupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 ohm load.
– Install the antenna feed line to the output port on the directional coupler.
NOTE
Manual Communications Analyzer test setup (fields not indicated remain at default):
S Set screen to RF GEN.
– Set the RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between 869–894 MHz for
TX and 824–849 MHz for RX.
– Set Amplitude to –30 dBm.
– Set Output Port to RF OUT.
– Set AFGen1 & AFGen2 to OFF.
Remove the antenna feed line and install an “RF short” onto the directional coupler output port.
NOTE
Set–up communication test set as follows (fields not indicated remain at default):
S Set screen to SPEC ANL.
–
–
–
–
G-2
Under Controls, set input port to ANT.
Set Ref Level to –40 dBm.
Under Controls, select Main, select Auxiliary.
Under Controls, select AVG. Set Avg = 20.
– Record the reference level on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference.
– Replace the short with the antenna feedline. Record the reference level on the communications
analyzer and Note for as PA reference.
– Record the difference of the two readings in dB.
Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.
Where:
RL(dB) = PA(dBm) – PS(dBm)
PA = Power reflected from antenna
PS = Power reflected from short
A calculated value of –13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.
ȡ1 ) 10
VSWR +ȧ
Ȣ 1 – 10
ȣ
ȧ
Ȥ
RL
20
RL
20
If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including any
in–line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,
consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacement
information.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
– continued
Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure – HP Test Set
Step
HP TEST SET
Action
Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.
Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas.
Figure G-1: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set
FEED LINE TO
ANTENNA
UNDER TEST
RVS
(REFLECTED)
PORT
INPUT
PORT
RF
SHORT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
OUTPUT
PORT
FWD (INCIDENT)
PORT 50–OHM
TERMINATED LOAD
FW00343
Equipment Setup – Advantest
Test Set
Follow the procedure in Table G-2 to set up test equipment required to
measure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.
Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set
Step
Action
ADVANTEST
If you have not already done so, refer to the procedure in Table 3-5 on page 3-15 to set up test
equipment and interface the LMF computer to the BTS.
For manual VSWR testing using external directional coupler, refer to Figure G-2.
– Connect the communications test set RF OUT port to the input port of the directional coupler.
– Connect the INPUT port of the communication test set to the forward port on the directional
coupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 Ohm load.
– Connect the RF short to the directional coupler output port.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
G-3
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
– continued
Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set
Step
Action
ADVANTEST
Preform the following to instruct the calibrated test set to generate a CDMA RF carrier (RVL call)
with all zero longcode at the assigned RX frequency at –10 dBm:
S Push the ADVANCE Measurement key.
S Push the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.
S Push the FREQ Entry key:
– Set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between 869–894 MHz for TX
and 824–849 MHz for RX.
Push the LEVEL Entry key; set to 0 dBm (by entering 0 and pushing the –dBm key).
Verify that ON is active in the Output CRT menu key.
Verify that OFF is active in the Mod CRT menu key.
Push the CW Measurement key.
Push the FREQ Entry key.
– Push the more 1/2 CRT menu key.
– Set Preselect CRT menu key to 3.0G.
S Push the Transient Measurement key.
– Push the Tx Power CRT menu key.
– Push the LEVEL entry key (set to 7 dBm by entering 7 and pushing the the dBm key).
– Set Avg Times CRT menu key to ON. Set to 20 (by entering 20 and pushing the Hz ENTER
key).
S Push the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.
Record the Burst Power display on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference.
Install the antenna feedline to the output port of the directional coupler.
S Push the Auto Level Set CRT menu key.
S Push the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.
Record the Burst Power on the communications analyzer and Note as PA level for reference.
Record the difference of the two readings in dBm.
Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.
Where:
RL(dB) = PA(dBm) – PS(dBm)
PA = Power reflected from antenna
PS = Power reflected from short
A calculated value of –13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.
ȡ1 ) 10
VSWR +ȧ
Ȣ 1 – 10
ȣ
ȧ
Ȥ
RL
20
RL
20
If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including any
in–line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,
consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacement
information.
. . . continued on next page
G-4
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
– continued
Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set
Step
ADVANTEST
Action
10
Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.
11
Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas.
Figure G-2: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using Advantest R3465
RF OUT
FEED LINE TO
ANTENNA
UNDER TEST
RF IN
RF
SHORT
OUTPUT
PORT
RVS
(REFLECTED)
PORT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
INPUT
PORT
FWD (INCIDENT)
PORT 50–OHM
TERMINATED LOAD
FW00332
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
G-5
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
– continued
Notes
G-6
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Appendix H: Download ROM Code
Appendix Content
THIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALL
APPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.
5/21/04
Guide Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is In This Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–2
Book Catalogs and Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Book Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–3
1–5
Physical Page Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Text Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–6
1–6
1–7
1–9
Frame and Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frames With Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Charts and Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Types In This Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item/Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step/Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–13
1–14
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–16
Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–17
1–17
1–17
1–18
1–19
Map Title Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Download ROM Code
Download ROM Code
ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being downloaded changes to
OOS_ROM (blue) and remains OOS_ROM (blue). The same R–level
RAM code must then be downloaded to the device. This procedure
includes steps for both the ROM code download and the RAM code
download.
ROM code files cannot be selected automatically. The ROM code file
must be selected manually. Follow the procedure in Table H-1 to
download ROM code.
Prerequisite
S ROM and RAM code files exist for the device to be downloaded.
CAUTION
The R–level of the ROM code to be downloaded must be
the same as the R–level of the ROM code for other devices
in the BTS. Code must not be mixed in a BTS. This
procedure should only be used to upgrade replacement
devices for a BTS and it should not be used to upgrade all
devices in a BTS. If a BTS is to be upgraded from one
R–level to another, the optimization and ATP procedures
must first be performed with the BTS in the original
configuration. The upgrade should then be done by the
CBSC.
Table H-1: Download ROM Code
Step
Action
Click on the device to be downloaded.
NOTE
More than one device of the same type can be selected for download by either clicking on each one to
be downloaded or from the BTS menu bar Select pull–down menu, select the device item that applies.
Where: device = the type of device to be loaded (BBX, CSM, GLI, MCC)
Click on the Device menu.
Click on the Status menu item.
A status report window appears.
Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.
NOTE
“HW Bin Type” is the Hardware Binary Type for the device. This code is used as the last four digits in
the filename of a device’s binary ROM code file. Using this part of the filename, the ROM code file
can be matched to the device in which it is to be loaded.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
H-1
Download ROM Code
– continued
Table H-1: Download ROM Code
Step
Action
Click on the OK button to dismiss the status report window.
NOTE
ROM code is automatically selected for download from the :\\version folder>\ specified by the NextLoad property in
the bts–#.cdf file. To check the value of the NextLoad property, click on
Util>Examine>Display Nextload. A pop–up message will show the value of the NextLoad.
Click on the Download Code Manual menu item.
A file selection window appears.
Double–click on the version folder that contains the desired ROM code file.
Double–click on the Code folder.
A list of ROM and RAM code files is displayed.
! CAUTION
A ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type) needs to be chosen. The
hardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4. Unpredictable results
can happen and the device may be damaged (may have to be replaced) if a ROM code file with wrong
binary type is downloaded.
10
11
Choose a ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type).
The hardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4.
Click on the ROM code file that matches the device type and HW Bin Type (e.g., bbx_rom.bin.0604
for a BBX having a HW Bin Type of 0604).
The file should be highlighted.
Click on the Load button.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
If the ROM load failed for some devices, load them individually by clicking on one device, perform
steps 6 through 11 for it, and repeat the process for each remaining device.
12
Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.
13
Click on the Util menu.
14
Select the Tools menu item.
15
Click on the Update NextLoad>CDMA menu item.
16
Select the version number of the folder that was used for the ROM code download.
17
18
Click on the Save button.
A pop–up message indicates that the CDF file has been updated.
Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop–up message.
19
Click on the device that was downloaded with ROM code.
20
Click on the Device menu.
. . . continued on next page
H-2
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Download ROM Code
– continued
Table H-1: Download ROM Code
Step
21
Action
Click on the Download Code menu item to download RAM code.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
Data is automatically downloaded to GLI devices when the RAM code is downloaded. Use the
Download Data procedure to download data to other device types after they have been upgraded.
22
Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.
The downloaded device should be OOS_RAM (yellow) unless it is a GLI in which case it should be
INS (green).
23
Click on the device that was downloaded.
24
Click on the Device menu.
25
Click on the Status menu item.
Verify that the status report window displays the correct ROM and RAM version numbers.
Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.
26
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
H-3
Download ROM Code
– continued
Notes
H-4
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Appendix I: Packet Backhaul Configuration
Appendix Content
THIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALL
APPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.
5/21/04
Guide Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is In This Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–2
Book Catalogs and Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Book Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–3
1–5
Physical Page Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Text Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–6
1–6
1–7
1–9
Frame and Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frames With Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Charts and Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Types In This Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item/Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step/Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–13
1–14
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–16
Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–17
1–17
1–17
1–18
1–19
Map Title Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
BTS Router Initial Configuration
Overview
This appendix contains information and operations related to loading an
MWR 1900 or MWR 1941 BTS router with the minimum standard
(canned) configuration necessary for network communications. Once the
router is communicating on the network, the full, site–specific,
operational configuration can be downloaded to the router over the
network. This appendix includes sections on:
S Setting up communications with a router using a Microsoftr
Windowsr–based computer
S Downloading BTS router canned configuration files from the OMC–R
S Transferring the canned configuration files from the Windows–based
computer to the BTS router
S Verifying and replacing/upgrading the IOS version loaded on the CF
memory card
S Verifying and, if necessary, replacing/upgrading the ROM monitor
low–level operating system version loaded in the BTS router
S Recovery from BTS router initialization with the ROM monitor
low–level operating system and troubleshooting to locate and correct
the cause
S Changing the router FE interface IP addresses
S Sample listings of the BTS router canned configuration files
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-1
Terminal Set Up
Creating a Terminal Session
General – This section provides the procedures to configure and save a
terminal session for communicating with the MWR 1900 BTS router.
Terminal settings are the same as those used for BTS card and module
Man–Machine Interface (MMI) communication sessions. The procedures
are for a Pentiumr processor–based computer operating with either
Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) or Windows 2000.
Using the LMF computer – LMF computer platforms can be used for
communicating with the routers, and the MMI terminal connection
created for BTS card/module optimization actions will operate with the
BTS routers. See the “Establishing a BTS Router Communication
Session” section of this appendix for additional interface hardware
required for BTS router communication.
Terminal Settings
Follow the procedure in Table I-1 to create a named HyperTerminal
connection for BTS router interface and generate a Windows desktop
shortcut for it.
NOTE
There are differences between Windows 2000 and Windows
98 in the menus and screens used for creating a
HyperTerminal connection. In the following procedure,
items applicable to:
S Windows 2000 will be identified with Win2000
S Windows 98 will be identified with Win98
Table I-1: Establish HyperTerminal Connection
Step
Action
From the Windows Start menu, select:
Programs > Accessories
Perform one of the following:
S For Win2000, select Hyperterminal and then click on HyperTerminal
S For Win98, select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click
on the Hypertrm.exe icon in the window which opens.
NOTE
S If a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click on the
Close button. (This is required the first time a HyperTerminal connection is configured, even if a
modem is not to be used.)
S If a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click on NO.
. . . continued on next page
I-2
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Terminal Set Up
– continued
Table I-1: Establish HyperTerminal Connection
Step
Action
When the Connection Description box opens:
– Type a name for the connection being defined (for example, BTSRTR Session, MMI) in the
Name: window,
– Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and
– Click OK.
From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select the RS–232 port to be
used for the connection (e.g., COM1 or COM2 – Win2000 or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 –
Win98), and click OK.
In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS–232 port
settings as follows:
Bits per second: 9600
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: None
Click OK.
With the HyperTerminal window still open and the connection running, select:
File > Properties
Click the Settings tab, click the arrow in the Emulation window, and select VT100 from the
dropdown list.
Click the ASCII Setup button, uncheck all boxes in the ASCII Setup window which appears, and
click OK.
10
Click OK for the connection Properties box.
11
Save the defined connection by selecting:
File > Save
12
Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:
File > Exit
13
Click the Yes button to disconnect when prompted.
14
Perform one of the following:
S If the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win98), proceed to step 16, or
S From the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories
15
Perform one of the following:
S For Win2000, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.
S For Win98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-3
Terminal Set Up
– continued
Table I-1: Establish HyperTerminal Connection
Step
Action
16
Highlight the newly–created connection icon by moving the cursor over it (Win2000) or clicking on it
(Win98).
17
Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the right
mouse button.
18
From the popup menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.
19
If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on the
Windows desktop.
NOTE
The shortcut icon can now be double–clicked to open a BTS router or BTS card/module MMI
HyperTerminal session without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.
I-4
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session
BTS Router Serial
Communication
For those procedures which require serial communication with BTS
routers, follow the procedures in Table I-2 to initiate the communication
session. This procedure calls out the LMF computer platform, but any
VT100–equivalent terminal or computer equipped with terminal
emulation software and a hardware serial connector may be used.
Required Items
The following items are required to perform the verification:
S LMF computer platform or equivalent (see 1X SC4812T BTS
Optimization/ATP; 68P09260A62 for requirements)
S Eight–conductor (four–pair, unshielded twisted pair is acceptable)
rollover cable, two 8–contact modular plugs (see Figure I-1 for cable
wiring requirements)
S Adapter, DB–9 plug–to–8–contact modular plug, Global Computer
Supplies C4717 or equivalent (see Figure I-2 for adapter wiring
requirements)
Figure I-1: Wiring Diagram, BTS Router Communication Rollover Cable
8–contact Plug
Contact Numbering
(Insertion End)
8 76543 21
Locking
Clip
8–contact
Modular
Plug
8–contact
Modular
Plug
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-5
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session
– continued
Figure I-2: Wiring Diagram, DB–9 Plug–to–8–contact Modular Plug Adapter
Adapter
DB–9 Receptacle
Socket Numbering
(Mating Side)
4 3 2 1
DB–9
Receptacle
8–contact
Modular
Receptacle
NC
Adapter
8–contact Receptacle
Contact Numbering
(Mating Side)
12 34567 8
8 7 6
NC
Table I-2: Establishing BTS Router Serial Communication
Step
Action
If it has not been done, start the computer and allow it to complete boot–up.
If a named HyperTerminal connection for BTS router serial communication or BTS card/module MMI
communication has not been created on the LMF computer, create one as described in Table I-1 in the
“Terminal Set–up” section of this appendix.
Connect the computer to the BTS router as shown in Figure I-3.
Start the named HyperTerminal connection for BTS router communication sessions by double clicking
on its Windows desktop shortcut.
NOTE
If a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the communication session, access the connection
from the Windows Start menu by selecting:
Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > 
Once the connection window opens, establish communication with the BTS router by pressing the
computer Enter key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained.
I-6
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session
– continued
Figure I-3: LMF Computer Connections to BTS Router
ROLLOVER
CABLE
To BTS router
CONSOLE
receptacle
DB9–TO–RJ48C
ADAPTER
LMF COMPUTER
OR EQUIVALENT
COM1
OR
COM2
OPTOATP0001–0
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-7
Download Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R
Obtaining BTS Router
Minimum (Canned)
Configuration Files
After they are generated on the OMC–R, the BTS router canned
configuration files must be transfered to another computer platform from
which they can be installed into the BTS routers. A number of
procedures may be used to move the canned configuration files from the
OMC–R to a platform from which they can be loaded into the routers.
Some alternatives are:
1. If a floppy diskette drive is available at the OMC–R, such as the one
for UNO workstations, the configuration files can be transferred to
an LMF computer or similar machine using the CDF file transfer
procedure in the Preparing the LMF section of 1X SC4812T BTS
Optimization/ATP; 68P09260A62. Directories identified in Table I-3
must be used rather than those in the CDF file transfer procedure.
2. If a Windows–based server connection is available in the operator’s
network and it can provide an FTP or telnet connection to the
OMC–R, files may be transferred by either the FTP or telnet
methods.
3. If a dial–up connection is available for accessing the OMC–R, an
FTP or telnet session may be possible to transfer files to the
computer used to load the CF memory cards.
The procedure provided in this section covers FTP transfer using a
Windows–based server in the operator’s network. Coordinate with the
local network administrator to determine the method and procedure to
use on a specific network.
Prerequisites
The following must be obtained from the local network administrator
before performing the canned configuration file FTP procedure in
Table I-3:
S User ID and password to log onto the OMC–R
S Name of the sub–directory where the specific BTS router group
canned configuration files to be downloaded were created
FTP File Transfer from the
OMC–R
This procedure uses the Windows–based LMF computer platform to
download BTS router canned configuration files from the OMC–R.
Follow the procedure in Table I-3.
I-8
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Download Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R
– continued
Table I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
Step
Action
If it has not been done, create a directory on the LMF computer where the BTS router canned
configuration files will be stored.
If it has not been done, obtain the OMC–R logon user ID and password from the local network
administrator.
Connect the LMF computer to the local network and log on.
NOTE
This procedure uses the command line FTP client supplied with Windows 98, Second Edition (Win98
SE) and Windows 2000 (Win2K); however, any commercially available FTP client application can be
used. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for operation of an alternative application.
Open a command line (MS DOS) window by clicking on Start > Programs > Command Prompt.
When the command line window opens, change to the directory where the canned configuration files
will be stored on the LMF computer by entering:
cd pathname
Where pathname = the path to the required directory
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
C:\> cd Can_Cfg
C:\Can_Cfg>
Check the contents of the directory by entering the following:
dir
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
C:\Can_Cfg>dir
Volume in drive C is MAIN
Volume Serial Number is F2AA–1721
Directory of C:\Can_Cfg>
08/22/2002
08/22/2002
08/22/2002
08/22/2002
03:46p

03:46p

..
03:46p
2,223 btsrtr_canned.blue
03:47p
2,223 btsrtr_canned.red
2 File(s)
4,644 bytes
2 Dir(s)
2,556,045,312 bytes free
C:\Can_Cfg>
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-9
Download Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R
– continued
Table I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
Step
Action
If either or both of the following files are found in the directory, delete them or move them to another
directory:
S btsrtr_config.blue
S btsrtr_config.red
Begin the FTP session by entering the following:
ftp hostname
Where hostname = the OMC–R hostname or IP address
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
C:\Can_Cfg> ftp OMCR–1
C:\Can_Cfg>
Connected to OMCR–1.
220 OMCR–1 FTP server (SunOS 5.6) ready.
User (OMCR–1:(none)):
Enter the User ID and password when prompted, pressing the Enter key after each.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
User (OMCR–1:(none)): scadm
331 Password required for scadm.
Password:
230 User scadm logged in.
ftp>
10
Change to the directory where the BTS router canned configuration file sub–directories are created and
verify the present working directory by entering the following, pressing the Enter key after each:
cd /home/scadm/btsrtr_canned_configs
pwd
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
ftp> cd /home/scadm/btsrtr_canned_configs
240 CWD command successful.
ftp> pwd
245 ”/home/scadm/btsrtr_canned_configs” is current directory.
. . . continued on next page
I-10
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Download Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R
– continued
Table I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
Step
11
Action
Enter the following to list the contents of the directory and be sure the specific canned configuration
directory name provided by the administrator exists:
ls
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
ftp> ls
200 PORT command successful.
150 ASCII data connection for /bin/ls (10.182.29.117,80) (0 bytes).
Mon_Jul_2_01:55:07_CDT_2002
Wed_Jul_24_09:35:41_CDT_2002
Tue_Aug_04_10:35:22_CDT_2002
226 ASCII Transfer complete.
ftp: 30 bytes received in 0.02Seconds 1.50Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
NOTE
Directory names where canned configuration files are located will consist of the
weekday_month_day_time_year when the canned configuration files were created on the OMC–R.
12
Change to the directory specified for the BTS router group to be configured and list the directory
contents by entering the following, pressing the Enter key after each command:
cd weekday_month_day_time_year
ls
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
ftp> cd Wed_Jul_24_09:35:41_CDT_2002
250 CWD command successful.
ftp> ls
200 PORT command successful.
150 ASCII data connection for /bin/ls (10.182.29.117,80) (0 bytes).
btsrtr_canned.blue
btsrtr_canned.red
226 ASCII Transfer complete.
ftp: 39 bytes received in 0.05Seconds 0.78Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-11
Download Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R
– continued
Table I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
Step
Action
13
Change to the binary transfer mode and, if desired, turn on hash mark printing for transfer progress by
entering the following, pressing the Enter key after each command:
bin
hash
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
ftp> bin
200 Type set to I.
ftp> hash
Hash mark printing On
ftp>
ftp: (2048 bytes/hash mark) .
NOTE
With Win98 SE, turning on hash mark printing can slow down file transfer in certain circumstances,
but the canned configuration files are quite small (approximately 2.5 KB) so there should be little
noticeable effect.
14
14a
Download the BTS router canned configuration files to the LMF computer by performing the following:
– Enter the following to download the first canned configuration file:
get btsrtr_canned.blue
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
ftp> get btsrtr_canned.blue
200 PORT command successful.
150 Binary data connection for btsrtr_canned.blue (10.182.29.117,80)
(2223 bytes).
226 Binary Transfer complete.
ftp: 2223 bytes received in 0.59Seconds 3.76Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
. . . continued on next page
I-12
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Download Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R
– continued
Table I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
Step
14b
Action
– Enter the following to download the second BTS router canned configuration file:
get btsrtr_canned.red
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
ftp> get btsrtr_canned.red
200 PORT command successful.
150 Binary data connection for btsrtr_canned.red (10.182.29.117,80) (2223
bytes).
226 Binary Transfer complete.
ftp: 2223 bytes received in 0.59Seconds 3.76Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
15
Before terminating the FTP session, open Windows Explorer and view the contents of the directory
where the canned configuration files are to be stored to be sure the files are present. Perform the
following:
15a
– Click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer.
15b
– In the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer, perform one of the following depending on the LMF
computer operating system:
–– Win98 SE: If necessary, expand the directory display for the drive where the canned configuration file storage directory is located by clicking on the + next to the drive icon.
–– Win2K: Expand the user profile and directory display for the drive where the canned configuration file storage directory is located by clicking on the + next to each icon, respectively.
15c
– Expand any sub–directories as required to display the directory folder where the canned
configuration files are to be stored.
15d
– Click on the directory folder icon where the canned configuration files are to be stored.
15e
– In the right–hand pane, verify that the files btsrtr_canned.blue and btsrtr_canned.red
appear.
15f
– If the files appear, proceed to step 16.
15g
– If the files do not appear, repeat step 14, its sub–steps, step 15 and its sub–steps.
16
Close Windows Explorer, and, in the command line window, enter the following to terminate the FTP
session:
bye
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
ftp> bye
221 Goodbye.
C:\Can_Cfg>
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-13
Download Canned Configuration Files from the OMC–R
– continued
Table I-3: BTS Router Canned Configuration File FTP Transfer from the OMC–R
Step
17
Action
Close the command line window by entering the following:
exit
18
BTS router canned configuration files are now ready for transfer to a BTS router.
I-14
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
Introduction
Overview
This section covers the procedures and commands required to verify the
IOS version loaded on BTS router CF memory cards and copy standard
canned configuration files to the routers. Because of the set–up required
and the length of some of the procedures, Motorola recommends
performing the actions covered in this section at a central location to
prepare the BTS routers for installation prior to the site visit.
IOS Version Verification and File Sequence Position
Version verification – The IOS version loaded on the BTS router CF
memory card should be verified as the version required for operation on
the network where the routers will be installed. If the loaded IOS version
is not correct, it can be replaced with a different version. There are
several methods available to accomplish version verification. These
depend on the equipment and software applications the user selects to
use in installing the canned configuration files in the BTS routers.
Appropriate verification procedures are included in each of the two
canned configuration installation methods covered in this section.
Methods to change or upgrade the loaded IOS version are provided in
the Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version section of this appendix
and are referenced at the appropriate places in the canned configuration
installation methods.
File sequence position – During initialization, the MWR 1900 or MWR
1941 router will first search the startup–config file for a boot system
command line telling it in what directory and file to find the boot loader.
If this line is not found, the router will default to attempting to boot from
the first file in its flash memory. Flash memory for the MWR 1900 or
MWR 1941 is the CF memory card (software identifier slot0:). The
canned configuration files used for BTS router installation do not
contain a boot system command line because of the need to maintain
flexibility for IOS version changes. Because of this, it is critical that the
IOS file is the first file listed on the CF memory card. The canned
configuration installation procedures contain steps to assure that this is
the case, and, if it is not, provide guidance to correct the condition. It is
important to remember that, if the router boots and displays a rommon 1
> prompt, the IOS file is missing, out of sequence, has a corrupted flash
memory image or the startup–config file contains a boot system line
which specifies a missing or incorrect IOS pathname/filename.
Canned Configuration File Installation
Filename and installation location requirements – The canned
configuration files for the BTS routers must be copied to the CF memory
card. The filename of the file on the CF memory card must be
canned–config. Canned configuration file location and filename
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-15
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
requirements are a result of Mobile Wireless Center (MWC) actions
during the process of switching a BTS from packet to circuit mode or
during BTS re–parenting to another OMC–R. In this process, the MWC
will query the BTS routers’ slot0: directory for a file named
canned–config. A missing or mis–named file will cause problems
with execution of the mode–switching process.
Installation Method – The startup–config configuration file used
by the BTS router during initialization is stored in NVRAM. This is a
memory device internal to the router and is separate from the CF
memory card. To install the canned configuration file so the router will
use it during boot–up, the file must be copied into the
startup–config file in NVRAM. This requires copying the canned
configuration file from the Windows–based LMF computer to the CF
memory card installed in a router, and then copying it to the
startup–config file in the router’s NVRAM. The only
Motorola–supported method to copy files to the BTS router CF memory
card is through tftp file transfer.
CAUTION
Motorola does not support using a CF memory card reader
to copy files to the BTS router CF memory card. Do not
use a CF memory card reader for either of the following
actions:
S Formatting a BTS router CF memory card
S Copying files to a BTS router CF memory card
CAUTION
Do not format BTS router CF memory cards using a CF
memory card reader. Only format CF memory cards in a
BTS router. Using a card reader to format the CF memory
card will result in improper BTS router initialization which
requires special recovery procedures.
Using a TFTP Server to Copy
Files to CF Memory Card
Required Equipment and Software
The following items are required to perform this procedure:
S A Windows–based computer which meets the requirements of the
LMF computer platform as specified in 1X SC4812T BTS
Optimization/ATP; 68P09260A62 original design frame, or 1X
SC4812T–CLPA BTS Optimization/ATP; 68P64115A06 for updated
design frames.
S One of the following operating systems for the Windows–based
computer:
I-16
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
– Windows 2000
– Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 file system
CAUTION
BTS router CF memory cards loaded using computers
equipped with Windows 98 versions earlier than Windows
98 SE and using the FAT16 file system will not operate
properly, resulting in a complete site outage.
S One of the following for the Windows–based computer:
– Internal 10/100baseT Network Interface Card (NIC)
– PCMCIA 10/100baseT NIC
Cable, rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS Router
Communication Session section of this Appendix
DB–9 plug–to–8–contact modular plug adapter as described in the
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of this
Appendix
Cable, Ethernet crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twisted
pair, two 8–contact modular plugs, in one of the following lengths, as
determined necessary:
– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C07)
– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola pn 3088643C13)
– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C15)
– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C08)
– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C09)
A +27 Vdc power supply to power the BTS router during
configuration file operations
A tftp server software application (refer to the Setting Up the TFTP
Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMA
OnLine Documentation, 68P09259A20) such as:
– Cisco tftp server
– PumpKIN tftp server
– Any other equivalent tftp server application
A copy of the MWR 1900 or MWR 1941 router IOS version required
for the network where the routers are to be installed (contact the
network administrator or the Motorola account team for information
on obtaining the required MWR 1900 or MWR 1941 IOS version)
Required Materials
The following material is required to perform this method:
S Marking material to identify the BTS router and CF memory card with
the installed configuration (blue or red)
Required Publications
The following publications are required to perform procedures in this
section:
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-17
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
S 1X SC4812T BTS Optimization/ATP; 68P09260A62 original frame
design or 1X SC4812T–CLPA BTS Optimization/ATP; 68P64115A06
for updated design frames
S Cellular System Administration – CDMA OnLine Documentation,
68P09259A20
S MWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01
Preparation for Canned Configuration File TFTP Transfer to CF
Memory Card
Preparation for a canned configuration file tftp transfer consists of the
following activities:
1. Determining the speed of the LMF computer NIC (10 or 100 MHz)
2. Setting the LMF computer NIC IP address
3. Creating a directory (folder) on the LMF computer to be used for all
tftp file transfers
4. Installing the tftp server application on the LMF computer, and
setting the tftp server application root directory to the directory
created in 2, above
5. Connecting the LMF computer to the BTS router for both
HyperTerminal (serial) and Ethernet communication
6. BTS router power–up and initial configuration for Ethernet
communication
The following procedures are used to accomplish all of these preparatory
actions.
Set LMF computer NIC TCP/IP address and create the default
TFTP directory – Follow the procedure in Table I-4 to set the NIC IP
address.
IMPORTANT
If the IP address for the LAN connection on an LMF
computer is being changed to support tftp downloads to a
BTS router, the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP address and subnet
mask for the NIC must be restored before the LMF can log
into a BTS to perform an optimization or ATP.
NOTE
There are differences between Windows 2000 and Windows
98 in the menus and screens used for setting or changing a
NIC connection. In the following procedure, items
applicable to:
S Windows 2000 will be identified with Win2000
S Windows 98 will be identified with Win98
I-18
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
Table I-4: Determine LMF Computer NIC Speed, Set NIC IP Address, and Create a Default TFTP Directory
Step
Action
If it is not known, determine and record the speed of the LMF computer NIC (10 or 100 MHz) for use in
step 7 of Table I-6.
Start the computer.
Login and allow the computer to boot to the desktop.
Depending on the installed operating system, from the Windows Start menu, select one of the
following:
S Win2000: Settings > Network and Dial–up Connections
S Win98: Settings > Control Panel and double–click Network.
Perform one of the following as applicable for the installed operating system:
S For Win2000, in the list of displayed connections, locate the Local Area Network connection for the
NIC to be used for BTS router Ethernet communication.
S For Win98, in the Configuration tab of the Network dialog box, locate the TCP/IP connection for
the installed NIC.
– If TCP/IP does not appear in the displayed list of installed network components, refer to the
operating system documentation and install TCP/IP.
Perform one of the following as applicable for the installed operating system:
S For Win2000, highlight the connection for the NIC and right click the highlighted connection, and
select Properties from the pop–up menu.
S For Win98:
– Highlight the TCP/IP NIC connection in the displayed list of installed network components.
– Click the Properties button.
– Skip to step 9.
For Win2000 , in the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box which appears, if Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) is not showing in the Components checked are used by this connection: listbox,
refer to the operating system documentation and install TCP/IP.
For Win2000, if the checkbox next to the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) entry is not checked, click in the
box to check it.
Perform one of the following:
S Win2000: Highlight the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) entry, and click on the Properties button below
the Components checked are used by this connection: listbox.
S Win98: From the tabs displayed in the TCP/IP Properties dialog box which opens, select the IP
Address tab if it is not at the front.
10
In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box which appears (Win2000) or the IP Address
tab of the TCP/IP Properties dialog box (Win98), perform the following:
10a
– If a black dot is not showing in the the radio button circle next to Use the following IP address:
(Win2000) or Specify an IP address (Win98), click on the radio button.
–– A black dot will appear in the circle.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-19
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
Table I-4: Determine LMF Computer NIC Speed, Set NIC IP Address, and Create a Default TFTP Directory
Step
Action
10b
– If using an LMF computer, record the IP address and subnet mask used for LMF–BTS
communication so they can be re–entered when tftp transfer activities for the BTS router are
completed.
10c
– Enter 100.100.100.1 in the IP address: box.
10d
– Enter 255.255.255.252 in the Subnet mask: box.
11
Click the OK button for the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box (Win2000) or the
TCP/IP Properties box (Win98).
12
Click the OK button for the Local Area Connection Properties box (Win2000) or the Network box
(Win98).
13
In Win98, click File > Close to close the Control Panel window.
14
Click Start > Programs > Windows Explorer to open Windows Explorer.
15
If the default tftp directory will be the same directory in which the files downloaded from the OMC–R
are stored, proceed to step 23.
16
In the left–hand pane of Windows Explorer, locate the icon for the drive where the default tftp
directory is to be created.
17
Highlight the drive icon and click Files > New > Folder.
18
While observing the new folder icon in the right–hand pane, type the name for the folder (for example,
tftp_files), and press the Enter key.
19
In Windows Explorer, locate the directory where the canned configuration files downloaded from the
OMC–R are stored.
20
In the left–hand pane, highlight the directory where the files are stored.
21
Scroll the left–hand pane until the newly–created default tftp directory is visible.
22
In the right–hand pane, highlight the canned configuration files and drag them to the default tftp
directory.
23
In the left–hand pane, click on the default tftp directory, and verify that the canned configuration files
appear in the right–hand pane.
24
Load a copy of the required BTS router IOS version into the default tftp directory using FTP, internet
download, or media such as a Zip disk (file size is over 7 MB).
25
Click Files > Close to close Windows Explorer.
Install and configure tftp server application – To obtain, install, and
configure the Cisco or PumpKIN tftp software applications, refer to the
Setting Up the TFTP Server – Procedure in Cellular System
Administration – CDMA OnLine Documentation, 68P09259A20 For
other tftp server applications, install and configure the application
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
I-20
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
IMPORTANT
When entering the name of the tftp server root directory
while configuring the tftp server application, be sure to use
the name of the directory identified in Table I-4, step 15, or
created in Table I-4, step 18, above.
Connect the LMF computer to the BTS router – Connect the LMF
computer to the BTS router by following the procedure in Table I-5 and
referring to Figure I-4.
Figure I-4: LMF Computer TFTP Connections to BTS Router
FAST ETHERNET PORT FE 0
(SOFTWARE DESIGNATION FA0/0)
CONSOLE
PORT
ETHERNET
CROSSOVER
CABLE
ROLLOVER
CABLE
To BTS router
CONSOLE
receptacle
DB9–TO–RJ48C
ADAPTER
LMF COMPUTER
OR EQUIVALENT
COM1
OR
COM2
10/100BASE T
NIC PORT
BTSRTR0025
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-21
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
Table I-5: Connecting the LMF Computer to the BTS Router for TFTP File Transfer
Step
Action
If the BTS router has not been connected to a power source, be sure the +27 Vdc power source is not
on, and connect it to the router.
Connect the LMF computer to the BTS router as shown in Figure I-4, referring to the list of required
equipment in this section as required.
If the LMF computer has not been started, turn it on, login, and allow it to boot to the desktop.
Refer to the procedure in Table I-2 of this appendix, and start a HyperTerminal communication session
for the BTS router.
Start the tftp server application as specified for the software (refer to the Setting Up the TFTP Server –
Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMA OnLine Documentation, 68P09259A20 or the
manufacturer’s instructions).
BTS router power–up and initial configuration for Ethernet
communication – Follow the procedure in Table I-6 to apply power to
the router and set an initial configuration for Ethernet communication.
S The required version of the IOS is loaded on the CF memory card
S The CF memory card is installed in the BTS router
Table I-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet Configuration
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing this
procedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures in
MWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this
publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
Be sure a CF memory card loaded with the Cisco IOS is installed in the BTS router (refer to the BTS Router
CF Memory Card Removal and Replacement section of this Appendix for instructions to access the CF
memory card slot).
* IMPORTANT
In this step do not touch the computer keyboard until the router completes the boot process. The router
will buffer any keystrokes made during the boot process and interpret them as commands to be
executed immediately following boot completion.
Apply power to the router and allow it to complete boot–up.
If a message similar to the following, is displayed, press the Enter key and proceed to step 5:
Press RETURN to get started!
. . . continued on next page
I-22
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
Table I-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet Configuration
Step
Action
If a message similar to the following, is displayed type no and press the Enter key:
Basic management setup configures only enough connectivity
for management of the system, extended setup will ask you
to configure each interface on the system
Would you like to enter basic management setup? [yes/no]:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Would you like to enter basic management setup? [yes/no]: no
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(20020127:101239
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Sun 27–Jan–02 06:08 by walrobin
Router>
At the Router> user EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the privileged EXEC mode:
enable
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router>enable
Router#
At the Router# privileged EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the configure submode:
configure terminal
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#conf t
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Router(config)#
The router is now in the global configuration mode and ready to accept configuration changes entered
from the keyboard.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-23
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
Table I-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet Configuration
Step
Action
At the global configuration mode prompt, type each of the following commands, pressing the Enter
key after each command:
hostname btsrtr1
interface fa0/0
ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252
speed 100 or 10 depending on the speed of the LMF computer NIC
duplex full
no shutdown
line con 0
exec–timeout 0 0
no login
line vty 0 4
no login
Responses similar to the following will be displayed:
Router(config)#hostname BTSRTR1
BTSRTR1(config)#interface fa0/0
BTSRTR1(config–if)#ip address 100.100.100.2 255.255.255.252
BTSRTR1(config–if)#speed 100
BTSRTR1(config–if)#duplex full
BTSRTR1(config–if)#no shutdown
BTSRTR1(config–if)#line con 0
BTSRTR1(config–line)#exec–timeout 0 0
BTSRTR1(config–line)#no login
BTSRTR1(config–line)#line vty 0 4
BTSRTR1(config–line)#no login
BTSRTR1(config–line)#
Once the correct parameters have been set, return to the privileged EXEC mode prompt by holding
down the Ctrl key and pressing z (Ctrl+z).
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1(config–line)# ^z
01:11:27: %SYS–5–CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
BTSRTR1#
NOTE
Entering exit twice, pressing the Enter key after each entry, will also complete the configuration
process and return the router to the privileged EXEC mode.
. . . continued on next page
I-24
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
Table I-6: BTS Router Power–up and Initial Ethernet Configuration
Step
Action
Verify port FE 0 (fa0/0) is configured with the correct IP address by entering the following:
show ip interface brief
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ip int br
Interface
IP Address
FastEthernet0/0 100.100.100.2
Serial0:0
unassigned
FastEthernet0/1 unassigned
Serial1:0
unassigned
OK?
YES
YES
YES
YES
Method
manual
unset
unset
unset
Status
Protocol
up
up
administratively down down
administratively down down
administratively down down
BTSRTR1#
10
The router is now configured for Ethernet communication on FE 0, and the canned configuration file
can be transferred by tftp. Proceed to Table I-7.
Verifying IOS Version and Canned Configuration File TFTP
Transfer to the BTS Router
Prerequisites – The following is required prior to performing this
procedure:
S A copy of the required MWR 1900 or MWR 1941 router IOS version
file is installed in the default tftp directory (transfer the file to the
LMF computer using FTP, internet download, or media such as a Zip
disk; file size is approximately 7–8 MB)
IMPORTANT
MWR 1941 routers must be loaded with IOS version
mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later. This router
model will not function properly with earlier IOS versions.
IOS verification and canned configuration file transfer – Follow the
procedure in Table I-7 to verify the loaded IOS version and transfer the
canned configuration files from the LMF computer to the BTS router CF
memory card.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-25
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router
operation and programming. Before performing this
procedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and
programming information and procedures in MWR1900
Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this publication
available for reference while performing this procedure.
Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
Step
Action
! CAUTION
If personal firewall and/or intrusion detection software such as Black ICE is running on the LMF computer,
shut it down before performing this procedure. If this is not done, the tftp transfer process will not operate.
On the LMF computer, if it has not been done, start the tftp server according to the manufacturer’s
directions (refer to the Setting Up the TFTP Server – Procedure in the Cellular System Administration
– CDMA OnLine Documentation, 68P09259A20).
If a HyperTerminal communication session with the BTS router is not running, start one following the
procedure in Table I-2.
In the HyperTerminal window, the router must be in the privileged EXEC mode, as indicated by a
number sign at the end of the prompt:
BTSRTR1#
Be sure the Ethernet crossover cable is connected between the LMF computer NIC port and the BTS
router FE 0 port (Figure I-4).
. . . continued on next page
I-26
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
Step
Action
Begin verification that the CF memory card contains the correct version of the Cisco IOS by entering
the following:
dir slot0:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir slot0:
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
7051976
Mar 01 1993 00:11:34
mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
31932416 bytes total (24879104 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
NOTE
1. The IOS defaults to the CF memory card (slot0:) directory unless the present working directory has
been changed using the cd command. Determine the present working directory by entering pwd .
If the present working directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return to the
default setting.
2. If slot0: is included in the command, be sure to include the colon (:) after slot0 when typing the
command.
3. The IOS filename will be similar to the following:
mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-27
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
Step
Action
Direct the router to show the version information by entering the following:
show version
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2a, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)
TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tac
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasa
Image text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000
ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109],
DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE
ROM: 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2a, EARLY DEPLOYMENT
RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)
Router uptime is 1 minute
System returned to ROM by power–on
System image file is ”slot0:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin”
cisco mwr1900 (R7000) processor (revision 0.1) with 121856K/18432K bytes
of memory.
Processor board ID JMX0611K5TS
R7000 CPU at 240Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 3.3, 256KB L2 Cache
Bridging software.
X.25 software, Version 3.0.0.
Primary Rate ISDN software, Version 1.1.
Toaster processor tmc is running.
2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
2 Serial network interface(s)
2 Channelized T1/PRI port(s)
DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.
55K bytes of non–volatile configuration memory.
31360K bytes of ATA Slot0 CompactFlash (Read/Write)
Configuration register is 0x101
BTSRTR1#
Compare the IOS filename returned in step 5 and the second line of the version information in step 6.
Note the correspondence between the filename and IOS version information.
* IMPORTANT
MWR 1941 routers must be loaded with IOS version mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later. This
router model will not function properly with earlier IOS versions.
. . . continued on next page
I-28
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
Step
Action
If the IOS filename from the CF memory card returned in step 5 is different than the filename of the
required IOS version loaded in the LMF computer default tftp directory, perform the procedure in
Table I-8 to load the required version, and then return to step 9, below.
! CAUTION
The file sequence on the CF memory card can not be verified with application programs which place
the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain Unix telnet applications, Unix
directory listing commands, and Windows file managers such as Windows Explorer). This portion of
the procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal, which do not list
directory contents alphabetically.
If the IOS version is correct and there is more than one file loaded on the CF memory card, be sure the
IOS file is the first file listed in the directory content display. If it is not, perform the following:
9a
– Backup all files on the CF memory card to the LMF computer default tftp directory by performing
steps 3 through 10 of Table I-8.
9b
– Perform steps 25 through 29 of Table I-8, as applicable.
9c
– Type the following to delete a possible boot system line in the startup–config file, pressing the
Enter key after the command and at each prompt to confirm the filename and deletion operation:
del nvram:startup–config
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#del nvram:startup–config
Delete filename [startup–config]?
Delete nvram:startup–config? [confirm]
[OK]
BTSRTR1#
NOTE
Be sure to include the colon (:) after nvram when typing the command.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-29
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
Step
9d
Action
– Verify the startup–config file size has been reduced to a minimum by entering the following:
dir nvram:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#dir nvram:
Directory of nvram:/
53
54
–rw–
––––


startup–config
private–config
57336 bytes total (57274 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
10
At the privileged EXEC mode prompt, enter the following:
copy tftp:btsrtr_canned.color slot0:canned–config
Where color = blue or red, as applicable.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–config
Address or name of remote host []?
11
At the prompt for the remote host address or name, enter the IP address of the LMF computer NIC:
100.100.100.1
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–config
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [canned–config]?
12
At the prompt for the destination filename, press the Enter key.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:btsrtr_canned.blue slot0:canned–config
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [canned–config]?
Loading btsrtr_canned.blue from 100.100.100.1 (via Ethernet0/0): !
[OK – 2457/4096 bytes]
2457 bytes copied in 84.724 secs (29 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
. . . continued on next page
I-30
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
Step
13
Action
Verify that the canned configuration file is saved on the CF memory card by entering the following:
dir
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051976
2457
Mar 01 1993 00:11:34
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24877983 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
14
To allow the BTS router to boot using the canned configuration, enter the following:
copy canned–config startup–config
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy canned–config start
Destination filename [startup–config]?
15
When prompted for the destination file name, press the Enter key.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy canned–config start
Destination filename [startup–config]?
2457 bytes copied in 3.52 secs
BTSRTR1#
16
Display and note the file size of startup–config by entering the following:
dir nvram:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Directory of nvram:/
26
27
–rw–
––––
2457


startup–config
private–config
29688 bytes total (24774 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-31
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
Step
Action
17
Scroll the HyperTerminal window back to the slot0: directory display obtained in step 13, above.
18
Compare the file size of startup–config to the canned configuration file to verify the copy operation.
File sizes should be the same.
19
If desired, the contents of the startup–config file may be verified against the file listings at the end of
this appendix for the blue or red canned configuration, as applicable, by entering the following:
show startup–config
NOTE
Pressing the space bar at the MORE prompt will scroll another screen–full of data. Pressing the Enter
key will scroll the screen one line at a time.
20
Verify the router will boot properly on the IOS and revised startup–config files by entering the
following:
reload
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#reload
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
21
If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter key.
22
When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter key to continue the reload operation.
23
NOTE
Reloading the router with the revised startup–config file will change router FE port speed to 100. If
the router FE port speed was changed to 10 to communicate with the LMF computer NIC, the
computer may indicate that the FE LAN connection has been lost at this point.
Verify the router reboots without displaying the rommon 1 > prompt or error messages related to port
configurations. If the router boots to the rommon prompt, proceed to the Recovery from BTS Router
Boot to rommon section of this appendix.
24
Using the tagging materials, tag the router to clearly identify the installed configuration (blue
(BTSRTR1) or red (BTSRTR2)).
25
Remove the CF memory from the router following the procedure in Table I-13, mark the installed
configuration (blue or red) on the card label, and install the card in the router following the procedure
in Table I-14.
26
If an additional router must have the canned configuration installed, perform the following:
. . . continued on next page
I-32
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verify IOS Version and Install Canned Configuration
– continued
Table I-7: Transfer Canned Configuration Files to the BTS Router Using a TFTP Server
Step
Action
26a
– Disconnect the cabling from the BTS router.
26b
– Remove power from the router and disconnect it from the power supply.
26c
– Repeat the procedures in Table I-5, Table I-6, and this table (Table I-7) using the additional router.
27
If no additional routers must be configured, perform steps 26a and 26b.
28
On the LMF computer, shut down the tftp server application and exit the HyperTerminal session.
29
If no additional tftp transfer activities will be performed, change the NIC IP address and subnet mask
back to those for LMF–BTS communication recorded in Table I-4, step 10b.
! CAUTION
If the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP address and subnet mask for the LMF computer’s NIC are not restored,
the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS optimization or ATP.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-33
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version
Background
BTS routers are supplied with CF memory cards pre–loaded with a
version of the IOS. Prior to installing the routers in a BTS, the loaded
IOS version should be verified as being the one required for the network.
It is critical to also verify that the IOS file is the first file on the CF
memory card. If another file precedes the IOS file, the BTS router will
not boot properly and will not function in the network.
Equipment and Software
Required
The following items are required to perform this procedure:
S A Windows–based computer which meets the requirements of the
LMF computer platform as specified in 1X SC4812T BTS
Optimization/ATP; 68P09260A62 for original design frames or 1X
SC4812T–CLPA BTS Optimization/ATP; 68P64115A06 for updated
design frames.
S One of the following operating systems for the Windows–based
computer:
– Windows 2000
– Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 file system
CAUTION
BTS router CF memory cards loaded using computers
equipped with Windows 98 versions earlier than Windows
98 SE and using the FAT16 file system will not operate
properly, resulting in a complete site outage.
S Cable, rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS Router
I-34
Communication Session section of this Appendix
DB–9 plug–to–8–contact modular plug adapter as described in the
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of this
Appendix
Cable, Ethernet crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twisted
pair, two 8–contact modular plugs, in one of the following lengths, as
determined necessary:
– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C07)
– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola pn 3088643C13)
– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C15)
– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C08)
– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C09)
A +27 Vdc power supply to power the BTS router during
configuration file operations
A tftp server software application (refer to the Setting Up the TFTP
Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMA
OnLine Documentation, 68P09259A20) such as:
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version
– continued
– Cisco tftp server
– PumpKIN tftp server
– Any other equivalent tftp server application
S A copy of the MWR 1900 or MWR 1941 router IOS version required
for the network where the routers are to be installed
NOTE
Contact the network administrator or the Motorola Account
Team for assistance in determining and obtaining a copy of
the required IOS version.
IMPORTANT
MWR 1941 routers must be loaded with IOS version
mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2d.bin or later. This router
model will not function properly with earlier IOS versions.
Required Publications
The following publication is required to perform procedures in this
section:
S MWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01
Upgrade/Replace Installed IOS
Version and Verify File
Sequence Position
Description – This procedure covers using an LMF computer equipped
with a tftp server application to perform the following activities:
1. Verify the IOS version loaded on a CF memory card and running on
a BTS router
2. Upgrade or replace the IOS version installed in a BTS router
3. Ensure the IOS file is the first file on the CF memory card
Prerequisites – The following are required prior to performing this
procedure:
S The LMF computer and BTS router have been prepared for tftp file
transfer and are operating as they would be after performing the
procedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, and steps 1 through 8 of
Table I-7
S A copy of the required IOS version is loaded into the tftp default
directory of the LMF computer
Upgrading/replacing installed IOS version and verifying file
sequence position – Follow the procedure in Table I-8 to replace or
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-35
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version
– continued
upgrade the installed IOS version using the tftp server application, and
ensure the IOS file is first in the stored file sequence on the CF memory
card.
Table I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and
Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing this
procedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures in
MWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this
publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
This procedure assumes the LMF computer and BTS router are configured, connected, and operating
as they would be after performing the procedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, and steps 1 through
8 of Table I-7. If necessary, perform these procedures now.
NOTE
The IOS present working directory defaults to the CF memory card (slot0:) directory unless the
present working directory has been changed using the cd command. Determine the present working
directory by entering pwd . If the present working directory has been changed, enter the command cd
slot0: to return to the default setting.
Identify the filename of the currently loaded IOS which must be replaced by entering the following:
dir
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
–rw–
–rw–
7051844
2212
Sep 23 2002 07:15:08
Mar 01 1993 00:11:00
mwr1900–i–mz.07022002.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24878360 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
Begin to backup the currently installed version of the router’s IOS to the LMF computer’s default tftp
directory by entering the following:
copy old_IOS_filename tftp:
Where old_IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS currently loaded on the BTS router CF
memory card.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy mwr1900–i–mz.07022002.bin tftp:
Address or name of remote host []?
. . . continued on next page
I-36
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version
– continued
Table I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and
Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
Action
At the remote host prompt, enter the following:
100.100.100.1
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [mwr1900–i–mz.07022002.bin]?
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Destination filename [mwr1900–i–mz.07022002.bin]?
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7051844 bytes copied in 109.92 secs (64697 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-37
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version
– continued
Table I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and
Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
Action
If additional files are stored on the CF memory card, begin backing them up to the LMF computer’s
default tftp directory by entering the following:
copy additional_filename tftp:
Where additional_filename = the filename of an additional file loaded on the BTS router CF
memory card.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy canned–config tftp:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
If the default IP address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct IP address for the LMF computer.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
Source filename [canned–config]?
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Source filename [canned–config]?
Destination filename [canned–config]?
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Destination filename [canned–config]?
[OK – 2212/4096 bytes]
2212 bytes copied in 0.152 secs
BTSRTR1#
10
I-38
If more files are stored on the CF memory card, repeat steps 6 through 9 until all files have been
backed up to the LMF computer.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version
– continued
Table I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and
Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
11
Action
Delete all files from the CF memory card by entering the following command:
format slot0:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#format slot0:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
12
Press the Enter key to continue the format operation.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
13
Press the Enter key to continue the format operation.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
Format: Drive communication & 1st Sector Write OK...
Writing Monlib
sectors....................................................................
................
Monlib write complete
Format: All system sectors written. OK...
Format: Total sectors in formatted partition: 62560
Format: Total bytes in formatted partition: 32030720
Format: Operation completed successfully.
Format of slot0 complete
BTSRTR1#
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-39
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version
– continued
Table I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and
Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
14
Action
Verify all files have been deleted from the CF memory card by entering the following:
dir
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Directory of slot0:/
No files in directory
31932416 bytes total (31932416 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
15
Begin to copy the required version of the IOS from the LMF computer to the BTS router by entering the
following:
copy tftp:new_IOS_filename slot0:
Where new_IOS_filename = the filename of the required IOS for the BTS router.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin slot0:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
16
If the default IP address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct IP address for the LMF computer.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
Source filename [mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
17
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Source filename [mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
Destination filename [mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
. . . continued on next page
I-40
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version
– continued
Table I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and
Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
18
Action
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is not
correct, enter the correct filename.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Destination filename [mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin]?
Accessing tftp://100.100.100.1/mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin...
Loading mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0): !!!!
Loading mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0):
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
[OK – 7051976/14103552 bytes]
7051976 bytes copied in 145.108 secs (48634 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-41
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version
– continued
Table I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and
Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
19
Action
Display the CF memory card directory to verify that the new IOS file is there by entering the
following:
dir
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
1 –rw–
7051976
Sep 23 2002 07:25:36
mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
31932416 bytes total (24880440 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
20
If any additional files previously stored on the CF memory card are to be copied to the card, perform
the following:
copy tftp:filename slot0:
Where filename = the filename of the file to be copied to the CF memory card
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:canned–config slot0:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
21
If the default IP address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct IP address for the LMF computer.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default IP address is selected:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
Destination filename [canned–config]?
22
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Destination filename [canned–config]?
Accessing tftp://100.100.100.1/canned–config...
Loading basic_config from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0): !
[OK – 2212/4096 bytes]
2212 bytes copied in 0.152 secs
BTSRTR1#
. . . continued on next page
I-42
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version
– continued
Table I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and
Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
23
Action
After the additional file is copied to the CF memory card, display the CF memory card directory by
entering the following:
dir
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
1 –rw–
7051976
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2a.bin
2 –rw–
2212
Mar 01 1993 00:09:06
canned–config
24
The IOS file must be the first file listed for the BTS router to boot properly. If it is, proceed to step 29.
25
! CAUTION
The file sequence on the CF memory card can not be verified with application programs which place
the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain Unix telnet applications, Unix
directory listing commands, and Windows file managers such as Windows Explorer). This portion of
the procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal, which do not list
directory contents alphabetically.
If another file is listed before the IOS file, delete the file by performing steps 11 through 13 and
display the directory of the CF memory card as described in step 23 to be sure the file is deleted.
26
Copy the file from the LMF computer to the CF memory card again by performing steps 20 through
23.
27
If the file is again listed before the IOS file in the CF memory card directory display, format the CF
memory card by performing steps 11 through 14 of this table.
28
Copy the IOS file and any other required file to the formatted CF memory card by performing steps 15
through 24.
29
If additional files are to be transferred to the CF memory card, perform steps 20 through 24 for each
one.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-43
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version
– continued
Table I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and
Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
30
Action
After making sure the IOS file is the first file on the CF memory card, restart the BTS router with the
new IOS version by entering the following:
reload
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#reload
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
31
If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter key.
32
When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter key to continue the reload operation.
33
Once the router has completed rebooting, change to the privileged EXEC mode and confirm the
booted IOS version is correct by entering the following:
show version
A response similar to the following partial example will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2a, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)
BTSRTR1#
34
Verify the version number displayed in the second line of the version information is the correct IOS
version.
35
If this procedure was entered from step 8 of Table I-7, return to Table I-7, step 9.
36
If no other BTS router file operations or configuration actions are required, perform the following:
36a
– Remove power from the router and disconnect it from the power supply.
36b
– Disconnect all other cabling from the BTS router.
36c
– On the LMF computer, exit the HyperTerminal communications session.
. . . continued on next page
I-44
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Change or Upgrade BTS Router IOS Version
– continued
Table I-8: Using a TFTP Server Application for Upgrading/Replacing Loaded IOS Version and
Verifying File Sequence Position
Step
37
Action
If no additional tftp transfer activities will be performed, change the NIC IP address and subnet mask
back to those for LMF–BTS communication recorded in Table I-4, step 10b.
! CAUTION
If the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP address and subnet mask for the LMF computer’s NIC are not restored,
the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS optimization or ATP.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-45
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version
Introduction
BTS routers are supplied pre–loaded with a version of the ROM monitor
(ROMmon) low–level operating system. Along with the IOS version, the
loaded ROMmon version should be verified as being the one required
for the network. Procedures in this section are used to verify the loaded
ROMmon version, and, if necessary, upgrade or change it to the required
version. Methods are provided for using either a tftp server or CF
memory card reader to transfer the required ROMmon version to a BTS
router’s CF memory card.
Required Equipment and
Software
The following items are required to perform ROMmon version
verification and upgrade for both verification/upgrade methods:
S A Windows–based computer which meets the requirements of the
LMF computer platform as specified in 1X SC4812T BTS
Optimization/ATP; 68P09260A62 original design frames or 1X
SC4812T–CLPA BTS Optimization/ATP; 68P64115A06 for updated
design frames.
S One of the following operating systems for the Windows–based
computer:
– Windows 2000
– Windows 98 Second Edition (SE) using the FAT32 file system
CAUTION
BTS router CF memory cards loaded using computers
equipped with Windows 98 versions earlier than Windows
98 SE and using the FAT16 file system will not operate
properly, resulting in a complete site outage.
S Cable, rollover, as described in the Establishing a BTS Router
Communication Session section of this Appendix
S DB–9 plug–to–8–contact modular plug adapter as described in the
Establishing a BTS Router Communication Session section of this
Appendix
S Cable, Ethernet crossover, Category 5E or better, unshielded twisted
pair, two 8–contact modular plugs, in one of the following lengths, as
determined necessary:
– 0.3 m (11.8 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C07)
– 0.6 m (23.6 in)(Motorola pn 3088643C13)
– 1.0 m (39.4 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C15)
– 2.1 m (84 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C08)
– 3.0 m (120 in) (Motorola pn 3088643C09)
S A +27 Vdc power supply to power the BTS router during
configuration file operations
I-46
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version
– continued
S A tftp server software application (refer to the Setting Up the TFTP
Server – Procedure in Cellular System Administration – CDMA
OnLine Documentation, 68P09259A20) such as:
– Cisco tftp server
– PumpKIN tftp server
– Any other equivalent tftp server application
S A copy of the MWR 1900 or MWR 1941 router ROMmon version
required for the network where the routers are to be installed
NOTE
Contact the network administrator or the Motorola Account
Team for assistance in determining and obtaining a copy of
the required ROMmon version.
Required Publications
The following publication is required to perform procedures in this
section:
S MWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration
Guide; part number 78–13983–01
Verification and
Upgrade/Replacement of
Installed ROMmon Version
Description – This procedure covers using an LMF computer equipped
with a tftp server application to perform the following activities:
1. Verify the ROMmon version loaded and running on a BTS router
2. Upgrade or replace the ROMmon version installed in a BTS router
Prerequisites – The following are required prior to performing this
procedure:
S The LMF computer and BTS router have been prepared for tftp file
transfer and are operating as they would be after performing the
procedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, and steps 1 through 8 of
Table I-7
S A copy of the required ROMmon version is loaded into the tftp
default directory of the LMF computer
Verifying and Upgrading/replacing installed ROMmon version –
Follow the procedure in Table I-8 to verify and, if necessary, replace or
upgrade the installed ROMmon version using the tftp server application.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-47
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version
– continued
Table I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp Server
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing this
procedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures in
MWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this
publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
This procedure assumes the LMF computer and BTS router are configured, connected, and operating
as they would be after performing the procedures in Table I-4, Table I-5, Table I-6, and steps 1 through
4 of Table I-7. If necessary, perform these procedures now.
. . . continued on next page
I-48
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version
– continued
Table I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp Server
Step
Action
Determine the currently installed ROMmon version by entering the following at the router privileged
EXEC mode prompt:
show version
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc3)
TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tac
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasa
Image text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000
ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109],
DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE
ROM: 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT
RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc3)
Router uptime is 1 minute
System returned to ROM by power–on
System image file is ”slot0:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin”
cisco mwr1900 (R7000) processor (revision 0.1) with 121856K/18432K bytes
of memory.
Processor board ID JMX0611K5TS
R7000 CPU at 240Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 3.3, 256KB L2 Cache
Bridging software.
X.25 software, Version 3.0.0.
Primary Rate ISDN software, Version 1.1.
Toaster processor tmc is running.
2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
2 Serial network interface(s)
2 Channelized T1/PRI port(s)
DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.
55K bytes of non–volatile configuration memory.
31360K bytes of ATA Slot0 CompactFlash (Read/Write)
Configuration register is 0x101
BTSRTR1#
5/21/04
To determine the currently installed ROMmon version, examine the ROM: System Bootstrap line
in the response.
. . . continued on next page
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-49
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version
– continued
Table I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp Server
Step
Action
Compare the installed ROMmon version information with the filename of the ROMmon version
required for the network.
NOTE
1. Rommon filename format is similar to the following:
MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin
2. The ROMmon filename reflects the version number of the software (122–8r.MC3).
If the installed version is the one required for the network skip to step 26.
If the installed ROMmon version is not the one required for the network, backup the current BTS
router configuration to the LMF computer by entering the following:
copy nvram:startup–config tftp
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy nvram:start tftp
Address or name of remote host []?
NOTE
Be sure to include the colon (:) after nvram when typing the command.
At the prompt for the remote host address or name, enter the IP address of the LMF computer NIC:
100.100.100.1
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy copy nvram:start tftp
Address or name of remote host []? 100.100.100.1
Source filename [startup–config]?
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Source filename [startup–config]?
Destination filename [startup–config]?
. . . continued on next page
I-50
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version
– continued
Table I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp Server
Step
Action
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Destination filename [startup–config]?
[OK – 2212/4096 bytes]
2212 bytes copied in 0.152 secs
BTSRTR1#
10
NOTE
The IOS defaults to the CF memory card (slot0:) directory unless the present working directory has
been changed using the cd command. Determine the present working directory by entering pwd . If
the present working directory has been changed, enter the command cd slot0: to return to the default
setting.
Determine the amount of memory available (bytes free) on the CF memory card by entering the
following:
dir
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
1 –rw–
7051976
Sep 23 2002 07:24:18
mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin
2 –rw–
2212
Mar 01 1993 00:14:48
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24885606 bytes free)
Router#
11
Be sure there is at least 1 MB (1048580) of free memory.
NOTE
A ROMmon version file requires approximately 0.7 MB.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-51
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version
– continued
Table I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp Server
Step
Action
12
Begin to copy the required version of the ROMmon file from the LMF computer to the BTS router by entering the following:
copy tftp:new_rommon_filename slot0:
Where new_rommon_filename = the filename of the required ROMmon version for the BTS
router.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#copy tftp:MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin slot0:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
13
If the default IP address displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct IP address for the LMF computer.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Address or name of remote host [100.100.100.1]?
Source filename [MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
14
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Source filename [MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
Destination filename [MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
15
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is not
correct, enter the correct filename.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Destination filename [MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
Accessing tftp://100.100.100.1/MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin...
Loading MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0): !!!!
Loading MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin from 100.100.100.1 (via FastEthernet0/0):
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
[OK – 614306/14103552 bytes]
614306 bytes copied in 13.059 secs (48634 bytes/sec)
BTSRTR1#
. . . continued on next page
I-52
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version
– continued
Table I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp Server
Step
16
Action
Display the CF memory card directory to verify that the new ROMmon version file is there by
entering the following:
dir
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#dir
Directory of slot0:/
1 –rw–
7051976
Sep 23 2002 07:25:36
2 –rw–
2212
Mar 01 1993 00:09:06
3 –rw–
614306
Dec 13 2002 14:59:36
MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin
mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin
canned–config
31932416 bytes total (24263922 bytes free)
BTSRTR1#
17
Replace the existing ROMmon version with the new one copied to the CF memory card by entering
the following:
upgrade rom–monitor file slot0:MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#This command will reload the router. Continue?[yes/no]
18
When prompted to continue, enter yes and press the Enter key.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#This command will reload the router. Continue?[yes/no] yes
ROMMON image upgrade in progress
Erasing boot flash
eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
Programming boot flash pppp
Now reloading
19
When the router has completed initialization, change to the router privileged EXEC mode by entering
the following:
enable
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1>enable
BTSRTR1#
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-53
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version
– continued
Table I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp Server
Step
20
Action
Verify the router has initialized with the new ROMmon version by entering the following:
show version
A response similar to the following partial response will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc3)
TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tac
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasa
Image text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000
ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(8r)MC3 RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)
21
Compare the version displayed in the response ROM: System Bootstrap line to the filename of the
new ROMmon version file copied to the CF memory card.
22
If the router successfully rebooted with the new ROMmon version, the ROMmon file can be deleted
from the CF memory card by entering the following:
delete slot0:new_rommon_filename
Where new_rommon_filename = the filename of the required ROMmon version copied to the CF
memory card in steps 12 through 15, above.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#del slot0:MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin
Delete filename [MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
23
If the default filename displayed in the prompt is correct, press the Enter key to accept it. If it is
missing or not correct, enter the correct filename.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Delete filename [MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
Delete slot0:MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin? [confirm]
. . . continued on next page
I-54
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Verify and Upgrade ROMmon Version
– continued
Table I-9: Verify and Upgrade/Replace Installed ROMmon Version Using a tftp Server
Step
24
Action
Press the Enter key to confirm the deletion.
A response similar to the following will be displayed if the default filename is selected:
Delete filename [MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin]?
Delete slot0:MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin? [confirm]
BTSRTR1#
25
! CAUTION
In this step, do not delete the IOS and canned–config files from the CF memory card. The BTS
router must have these files on the card to properly boot or switch between packet and circuit mode.
If additional unnecessary files, such as a backup of the startup–config file, are also on the CF
memory card, delete them by repeating steps 22 through 24 for each file.
26
If no other BTS router file operations or configuration actions are required, perform the following:
26a
– Remove power from the router and disconnect it from the power supply.
26b
– Disconnect all cabling from the BTS router.
26c
– On the LMF computer, exit the HyperTerminal communications session.
27
If no additional tftp transfer activities will be performed, change the NIC IP address and subnet mask
back to those for LMF–BTS communication recorded in Table I-4, step 10b.
! CAUTION
If the BTS 10base–2 LAN IP address and subnet mask for the LMF computer’s NIC are not restored,
the LMF can not log into a BTS when attempting to perform a BTS optimization or ATP.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-55
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon
ROM monitor boot conditions – Under certain circumstances the BTS
router will initialize with the ROM monitor (ROMmon) operating
system rather than the IOS. These circumstances include:
S The hexadecimal value in the router’s configuration register has been
changed from the factory default (can change the location from where
the router attempts to load code for boot–up).
S IOS file is missing from the CF memory card
S IOS file is not the first file on the CF memory card
S Startup–config file contains an outdated boot system line specifying
an IOS file which has been replaced with an updated version
S Startup–config file contains boot system line with typographical
error(s) in the IOS filename
S IOS file image on the CF memory card is corrupted
Description – Router operation on ROMmon is signalled by the display
of the rommon # > prompt, where # is a number which increments
each time a command is issued. ROMmon is a low–level operating
system which provides limited capabilities for router testing and
troubleshooting operations, including viewing directory contents and
booting from a specified file.
Recovery methods – Two recovery methods are included in this section.
The first is the simplest and requires that a valid, uncorrupted IOS
version is installed on the CF memory card. The second method requires
additional equipment and must be used in instances such as when an IOS
file is not installed on the CF memory card or the installed IOS image is
corrupted.
Simple Recovery from Boot to
ROMmon
Requirements – Unless it is certain that the IOS image on the CF
memory card is corrupted, this method should always be the first tried
for router recovery from ROMmon initialization. This method does not
require any additional equipment beyond the items necessary to load
canned configuration files into the BTS router. To be effective, this
method does require that a valid, uncorrupted IOS image file is installed
on the router’s CF memory card.
Recovery – Follow the procedure in Table I-10 to attempt a simple
recovery from a BTS router ROMmon initialization.
I-56
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon
– continued
Table I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon Boot
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing this
procedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures in
MWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this
publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
This procedure assumes the LMF computer is set up and connected to the BTS router with an active
HyperTerminal communication session. If it is not, follow the procedure in Table I-2 to establish a
HyperTerminal communication session.
With the rommon 1 > prompt displayed in the HyperTerminal window, enter the following to
determine if the router’s configuration register is set to the factory default value:
confreg
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
rommon 4 > confreg
Configuration Summary
(Virtual Configuration Register: 0x100)
enabled are:
load rom after netboot fails
console baud: 9600
boot: image specified by the boot system commands
or default to: cisco2–mwr1900
do you wish to change the configuration? y/n
[n]:
NOTE
S The configuration register setting is shown in the (Virtual Configuration Register: 0x____) line
S 0x in the Virtual Configuration Register line indicates the numbers following are hexadecimal
If the value shown for the configuration register is 2102, skip to step 6.
If the value shown for the configuration register is not 2102, perform the following:
4a
Press the Return key to accept the default of n (for no).
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-57
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon
– continued
Table I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon Boot
Step
4b
Action
Enter the following at the rommon prompt:
confreg 0x2102
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
rommon 3 > confreg 0x2102
You must reset or power cycle for new config to take effect
rommon 4 >
4c
Enter the following at the rommon prompt:
reset
A response which begins and ends similar to the following will be displayed:
rommon 4 > reset
System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109], DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE
Copyright (c) 1994–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
mwr1900 processor with 131072 Kbytes of main memory
Main memory is configured to 64 bit mode with parity disabled
Readonly ROMMON initialized
...
...
Press RETURN to get started!
If the router reboots with the IOS, skip to step 21.
. . . continued on next page
I-58
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon
– continued
Table I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon Boot
Step
Action
If the configuration register is set properly and/or the router does not reboot with the IOS, enter the
following at the rommon # > prompt to identify the IOS file on the CF memory card:
dir slot0:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
rommon 1 > dir slot0:
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0
Directory of slot0:
2212
–rw–
canned–config
7051976
–rw–
mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin
614306
–rw–
MWR1900_RM2.srec.122–8r.MC3.bin
rommon 2 >
NOTE
The IOS filename will be similar to the following:
mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin
If there is no IOS file on the CF memory card, proceed to Table I-11 and perform the extended
recovery procedure.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-59
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon
– continued
Table I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon Boot
Step
Action
If an IOS file is found, note the IOS filename, and enter the following to begin recovery to an IOS
boot:
boot slot0:IOS_filename
Where IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS noted in step 6, above.
A successful IOS re–boot operation will result in display of a response which begins and ends similar
to the following:
rommon 2 > boot slot0:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0x6b99ac
Self decompressing the image :
################################################################### [OK]
Smart Init is enabled
smart init is sizing iomem
ID
00031A
MEMORY_REQ
TYPE
0X005F3C00 MWR1900 Mainboard
0X000F3BB0 public buffer pools
0X00211000 public particle pools
TOTAL:
0X008F87B0
...
...
Press RETURN to get started!
If the router successfully reboots with the IOS, skip to step 12.
10
If the router does not reboot with the IOS, perform the following:
10a
– Scroll the HyperTerminal display down until the directory display from step 6, above, is visible.
10b
– Compare the IOS filename from the directory display with the filename entered when performing
step 8, above.
10c
– If the filename was typed incorrectly, repeat step 8, using care to type the filename correctly.
. . . continued on next page
I-60
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon
– continued
Table I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon Boot
Step
Action
11
If the router still does not reboot with the IOS after typing the filename correctly, proceed to Table I-11
and perform the extended recovery procedure.
12
! CAUTION
The file sequence on the CF memory card can not be verified with application programs which place
the listed file names in alphabetical order (for example, certain Unix telnet applications, Unix
directory listing commands, and Windows file managers such as Windows Explorer). This portion of
the procedure is intended for use only with applications, such as HyperTerminal, which do not list
directory contents alphabetically.
After a successful reboot with IOS, perform the following to correct the cause of the boot to
ROMmon:
12a
– At the BTSRTR1> user EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the privileged EXEC
mode:
enable
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1>enable
BTSRTR1#
12b
– Enter the dir slot0: command to display the CF memory card directory, and, if the IOS file is
not the first file listed, perform the procedure in Table I-8, steps 25 through 32, to correct the
situation.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-61
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon
– continued
Table I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon Boot
Step
12c
Action
– If the IOS file is the first file, enter the following command to display the contents of the
startup–config file:
show startup–config
A response which begins similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh start
Using 1589 out of 57336 bytes
version 12.2
service timestamps debug uptime
service timestamps log uptime
no service password–encryption
hostname BTSRTR1
boot system slot0:mwr1900–i–mz.07132002.bin
no logging console
username cisco password 0 cisco
redundancy
mode y–cable
standalone
13
Review the startup–config file listing for a “boot system” line and perform the following:
13a
– If the startup–config file does not contain a boot system line, skip to step 14.
13b
– If the file listing contains a “boot system” line, examine it for the correct IOS filename.
13c
– If the boot system slot0: filename is incorrect, enter the following, using care to type the filename
correctly:
boot system slot0:IOS_filename
Where IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS noted in step 6, above.
13d
– Replace the boot system line in the startup–config file with the line entered in step 13c, above, by
entering the following:
copy runing–config startup–config
. . . continued on next page
I-62
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon
– continued
Table I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon Boot
Step
13e
Action
– Verify the correct IOS filename is now included in the listing by entering the following:
show startup–config
A response which begins similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh start
Using 1589 out of 57336 bytes
version 12.2
service timestamps debug uptime
service timestamps log uptime
no service password–encryption
hostname BTSRTR1
boot system slot0:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin
no logging console
username cisco password 0 cisco
redundancy
mode y–cable
standalone
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-63
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon
– continued
Table I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon Boot
Step
14
Action
Re–verify the router’s configuration register setting by entering the following:
show version
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)
TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tac
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Mon 05–Aug–02 11:07 by nmasa
Image text–base: 0x60008940, data–base: 0x60B54000
ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20020113:235343) [sbose–wilma 109],
DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE
ROM: 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT
RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)
Router uptime is 1 minute
System returned to ROM by power–on
System image file is ”slot0:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin”
cisco mwr1900 (R7000) processor (revision 0.1) with 121856K/18432K bytes
of memory.
Processor board ID JMX0611K5TS
R7000 CPU at 240Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 3.3, 256KB L2 Cache
Bridging software.
X.25 software, Version 3.0.0.
Primary Rate ISDN software, Version 1.1.
Toaster processor tmc is running.
2 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)
2 Serial network interface(s)
2 Channelized T1/PRI port(s)
DRAM configuration is 64 bits wide with parity disabled.
55K bytes of non–volatile configuration memory.
31360K bytes of ATA Slot0 CompactFlash (Read/Write)
Configuration register is 0x101
BTSRTR1#
NOTE
The configuration register value is shown in the last line of the show version response.
15
If the value shown for the configuration register is 0x2102, skip to step 18.
. . . continued on next page
I-64
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon
– continued
Table I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon Boot
Step
16
Action
If the value shown for the configuration register is not 0x2102, enter the following command in the
order shown to change it:
configure terminal
config–register 0x2102
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#conf t
Enter configuration commands, one per line.
BTSRTR1(config)#config–register 0x2102
BTSRTR1(config)#
17
End with CNTL/Z.
Verify the change was entered properly by entering the following commands in the order shown:
exit
show version
A response which begins and ends similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1(config)#exit
BTSRTR1#sh ver
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) 1900 Software (MWR1900–I–M), Version 12.2(8)MC2b, EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)
TAC Support: http://www.cisco.com/tac
Copyright (c) 1986–2002 by cisco Systems, Inc.
...
...
Configuration register is 0x101 (will be 0x2102 at next reload)
BTSRTR1#
18
If the filename is correctly written in the boot system line (step 13e) and the configuration register is
properly set to the factory default of 0x2102, enter the following to determine if the router will reboot
to IOS:
reload
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR1#reload
System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-65
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon
– continued
Table I-10: Simple Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon Boot
Step
Action
19
If prompted to save a modified configuration, enter n for “no,” and press the Enter key.
20
When prompted to proceed with reload, press the Enter key to continue the reload operation.
21
After a successful reboot with IOS, proceed with other BTS router activities or remove power from the
router and disconnect it
22
If the router still will not successfully boot with IOS, proceed to Table I-11 and perform the extended
recovery procedure.
Extended Recovery from Boot
to ROMmon
Requirements – If ROMmon boot recovery attempts fail using the
simple recovery method, this method must be used to reboot a BTS
router which has initialized with ROMmon. This method requires
additional equipment beyond the items necessary to load canned
configuration files into the BTS router. Extended recovery requires
formatting the CF memory card from the ROMmon–initialized router
and reloading the reformatted CF memory card with the required IOS
version.
Additional equipment required – An additional, formatted, 32 MB CF
memory card with the required version of the IOS installed is required in
addition to the equipment and software required for BTS router canned
configuration installation. This card may be:
S A spare CF memory card which is loaded with the required IOS
version
S A CF memory card from an additional BTS router which is loaded
with the required IOS version
Recovery – Follow the procedure in Table I-10 to perform an extended
recovery from a BTS router ROMmon initialization.
Table I-11: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon Boot
Step
Action
This procedure assumes the BTS router is powered and operating on ROMmon with the LMF
computer set up and connected to the router with an active HyperTerminal communication session. If
it is not, follow the procedure in Table I-2 to establish a HyperTerminal communication session.
Remove the CF memory card from the BTS router following the procedure in Table I-13.
Install the additional CF memory card in the router following the procedure in Table I-14.
. . . continued on next page
I-66
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon
– continued
Table I-11: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon Boot
Step
Action
Enter the following to obtain the filename of the IOS version loaded on the CF memory card:
dir slot0:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
rommon 1 > dir slot0:
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0
Directory of slot0:
7051976
–rw–
mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin
rommon 2 >
Note the exact filename displayed for the IOS version.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-67
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon
– continued
Table I-11: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon Boot
Step
Action
Enter the following to initialize the router with the IOS on the additional CF memory card:
boot slot0:IOS_filename
Where IOS_filename = the filename of the IOS noted in step 5, above.
A successful IOS re–boot operation will result in display of a response which begins and ends similar
to the following:
rommon 2 > boot slot0:mwr1900–i–mz.122–8.MC2b.bin
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0xb2a0
program load complete, entry point: 0x80008000, size: 0x6b99ac
Self decompressing the image :
################################################################### [OK]
Smart Init is enabled
smart init is sizing iomem
ID
00031A
MEMORY_REQ
TYPE
0X005F3C00 MWR1900 Mainboard
0X000F3BB0 public buffer pools
0X00211000 public particle pools
TOTAL:
0X008F87B0
––– System Configuration Dialog –––
Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog? [yes/no]: n
If the router prompts with a question to enter the initial dialog as shown in step 6, above, type no and
press the Enter key to obtain the user EXEC mode prompt.
If the router prompts with Press RETURN to get started!, press the Enter key to obtain the
user EXEC mode prompt.
. . . continued on next page
I-68
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon
– continued
Table I-11: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon Boot
Step
Action
At the user EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the privileged EXEC mode:
enable
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router> enable
Router#
10
Remove the additional CF memory card from the BTS router following the procedure in Table I-13.
11
Install the original CF memory card in the router following the procedure in Table I-14.
12
Format the original CF memory card by entering the following:
format slot0:
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Router#format slot0:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
13
Press the Enter key to continue the format operation.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-69
Recovery from BTS Router Boot to ROMmon
– continued
Table I-11: Extended Recovery from BTS Router ROMmon Boot
Step
14
Action
Press the Enter key to continue the format operation.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
Format operation will destroy all data in ”slot0:”. Continue? [confirm]
Format: Drive communication & 1st Sector Write OK...
Writing Monlib
sectors....................................................................
................
Monlib write complete
Format: All system sectors written. OK...
Format: Total sectors in formatted partition: 62560
Format: Total bytes in formatted partition: 32030720
Format: Operation completed successfully.
Format of slot0 complete
Router#
15
Copy the required IOS version to the formatted original CF memory card using the LMF computer
and a tftp server following the procedure in Table I-8.
16
If applicable, perform IOS initialization troubleshooting as described in Table I-10, steps 12 through
21.
I-70
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses
FE Interface IP Addresses and
Operating Parameters
It may be necessary to enter or change the IP addresses and/or operating
parameters for BTS router FE interfaces FE 0 and FE1 without making
other changes in the router configuration files. Procedures in this section
cover these operations.
Prerequisites
The following must be accomplished before entering or changing BTS
router FE port IP addresses and/or operating parameters:
S The user has read and understands the content of MWR1900 Wireless
Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number
78–13983–01
S BTS routers must have the required version of the IOS saved on their
installed CF memory card
S BTS routers must have power applied, be operating without alarms
other than span alarms, and have completed boot–up to the user EXEC
mode prompt (BTSRTR–bts#–1–1>)
S The BTS router privileged EXEC mode password has been obtained
from the network administrator
Entering or Changing FE
Interface IP Addresses
To enter or change FE interface IP addresses, follow the procedure in
Table I-12.
Table I-12: Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating Parameters
Step
Action
* IMPORTANT
This procedure does not cover all aspects of BTS router operation and programming. Before performing this
procedure, review BTS router initialization, operation, and programming information and procedures in
MWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Software Configuration Guide; part number 78–13983–01. Have this
publication available for reference while performing this procedure.
Obtain the correct IP addresses and subnet masks for the BTS router FE interfaces from the network
administrator.
If a HyperTerminal connection for BTS card/module MMI or BTS router (BTSRTR) communication
has not been created, create one as described in Table I-1 of this appendix.
Connect the LMF computer to the BTS router, and start a communication session as described in
Table I-2 in this appendix.
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-71
Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses
– continued
Table I-12: Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating Parameters
Step
Action
NOTE
Examples in this procedure show prompts for BTSRTR–bts#–1–1 and BTSRTR–bts#–1–2, but the
procedure can be used for any router in any BTS router group or a router running the canned
configuration file (BTSRTR1 or BTSRTR2).
At the BTSRTR–bts#–1–1> user EXEC mode prompt, enter the following to access the privileged
EXEC mode:
enable
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1> enable
Password:
Enter the privileged EXEC mode password.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1> enable
Password:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
At the BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# privileged EXEC mode prompt, display the FE interface IP addresses by
typing:
show ip interface brief
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
Interface
FastEthernet0/0
Serial0:0
FastEthernet0/1
Serial1:0
show ip interface
IP Address
OK?
192.168.146.1 YES
unassigned
YES
unassigned
YES
unassigned
YES
brief
Method
NVRAM
unset
unset
unset
Status
Protocol
up
up
administratively down down
administratively down down
administratively down down
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
. . . continued on next page
I-72
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses
– continued
Table I-12: Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating Parameters
Step
Action
For a FastEthernet0/0 (fa0/0) or FastEthernet0/1(fa0/1) interface which does not have a correct or an
assigned IP address, enter the following at the router prompt to access the global configuration mode:
configure terminal
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# conf t
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config)#
At the global configure mode prompt, enter the following to access the configure interface submode
for the interface requiring IP address assignment/change:
interface fastethernetinterface#
Where interface# = 0/0 or 0/1, as applicable.
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config)#
int fa0/1
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)#
At the configure interface submode prompt, assign or change the interface IP address by entering:
ip address IP_addr subnet_mask
Where:
IP_addr = the required IP address for the interface; for example, 192.168.147.1
subnet_mask = the required subnet mask for the interface; for example, 255.255.255.0
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)#
ip address
192.168.147.1
255.255.255.0
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)#
10
To complete configuration of the interface, enter the following parameter settings, one at a time,
pressing Enter after each:
duplex full
speed 100
keepalive 1
no shutdown
. . . continued on next page
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-73
Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses
– continued
Table I-12: Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating Parameters
Step
11
Action
Return to the global configuration mode by entering the following:
exit
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)#
exit
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config)#
12
If the IP address and/or parameters for the other FE interface on the router must be assigned or
changed at this time, repeat steps 8 through 11 for the other FE interface.
13
Once the correct parameters have been set for all FE interfaces, return to the privileged EXEC mode
prompt by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing z (Ctrl +z).
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1(config–if)# ^z
01:11:27: %SYS–5–CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
NOTE
Entering exit twice, pressing the Enter key after each entry, will also complete the interface
configuration and return the router to the privileged EXEC mode.
14
Save the interface configuration changes to the startup configuration file on the CF memory card by
entering the following:
copy running–config startup–config
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
15
copy run start
Destination filename [startup–config]?
Press Enter
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# copy run start
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1# Destination filename [startup–config]?
Building configuration...
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!![OK]
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
. . . continued on next page
I-74
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses
– continued
Table I-12: Entering or Changing BTS Router FE Interface IP Addresses and Operating Parameters
Step
Action
16
If all FE IP address entries/changes for the router are complete, enter the following to return the router
to user EXEC mode:
disable
A response similar to the following will be displayed:
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1#
BTSRTR–bts#–1–1>
disable
17
If no other router requires the FE interfaces to be assigned/changed, proceed to step 20.
18
If FE interfaces on another router must be assigned/changed, disconnect the 8–contact modular plug
from the current router CONSOLE port and connect it to the CONSOLE port of the other router.
19
Press the Enter key, and when the router user EXEC mode prompt appears repeat steps 3 through 16
for the other router.
20
When the router is in user EXEC mode, close the HyperTerminal session and disconnect the LMF
computer and additional components from the BTS router.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-75
Example BTS Router Canned Configuration Files
BTS Router Canned
Configuration File
This section presents listings of the blue and red router canned
configuration file contents for the MWR 1900 BTS routers. The blue
router is the primary router on the BTS LAN subnet 192.168.146.0, and
the red router is the primary on BTS LAN subnet 192.168.147.0. The
canned configuration files allow communication with the BTS routers
for both on–site FE cabling connectivity verification and for
downloading the routers from the network with the full, site–specific
operational configuration.
Obtaining the Latest
Configuration File Content
The files included here are for example only. The correct canned
configuration file content for each BTS router should be generated at the
OMC–R using the /screl/active/bin/gen_btsrtr_canned_config.ksh script.
Configuration File Examples
Examples of both configuration files are provided in the following
subsections.
I-76
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Example BTS Router Canned Configuration Files
– continued
“Blue” BTS Router Canned
Configuration
! Canned Config file for BTSRTR1
version 12.2
service timestamps debug uptime
service timestamps log uptime
no service password–encryption
hostname BTSRTR1
no logging console
ip subnet–zero
ip classless
ip pim bidir–enable
disable–eadi
memory–size iomem 25
redundancy
mode y–cable
standby use–interface Loopback101 health
standby use–interface Loopback102 revertive
standby use–interface Multilink1 backhaul
interface loopback 101
description BTSRTR health loopback
no ip address
interface loopback 102
description BTSRTR revertive loopback
no ip address
! configure 1 DS0 for BTSRTRLINK
controller T1 0/0
description 1st span on BTSRTR
framing esf
linecode b8zs
cablelength short 133
clock source line
channel–group 0 timeslots 1–24 speed 64
! MLPPP bundle with BTSRTRLINK.
! This performs IPCP with RPM when BTSRTR is rebooted
interface Multilink 1
ip address negotiated
no ip route–cache
no cdp enable
ppp multilink
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-77
Example BTS Router Canned Configuration Files
– continued
multilink–group 1
no shutdown
! Setup Serial Interface for PPP and IPCP, no MLPPP at this time
interface Serial0/0:0
no ip address
encapsulation ppp
keepalive 1
ppp multilink
multilink–group 1
no shutdown
! Setup Ethernet Interfaces and HSRP between them
interface FastEthernet0/0
ip address 192.168.146.1 255.255.255.0
keepalive 1
speed 100
full–duplex
standby 1 timers 1 3
standby 1 preempt
standby 1 priority 100
standby 1 ip 192.168.146.3
standby 1 name one
standby 1 track Fa0/1 10
standby 1 track Multilink1 10
! Track the router health interface
standby 1 track Loopback101 10
! Track the router revertive (compensation) interface
standby 1 track Loopback102 5
no shutdown
interface FastEthernet0/1
ip address 192.168.147.1 255.255.255.0
keepalive 1
speed 100
full–duplex
standby 2 timers 1 3
standby 2 preempt
standby 2 priority 100
standby 2 ip 192.168.147.3
standby 2 name two
standby 2 track Fa0/0 10
standby 2 track Multilink1 10
! Track the router health interface
standby 2 track Loopback101 10
! Track the router revertive (compensation) interface
standby 2 track Loopback102 5
no shutdown
! Set a default route to RPM thru BTSRTRLINK
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Multilink 1
I-78
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Example BTS Router Canned Configuration Files
– continued
line con 0
exec–timeout 15 0
password cisco
line aux 0
login
password cisco
line vty 0 4
login
password cisco
end
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-79
Example BTS Router Canned Configuration Files
– continued
“Red” BTS Router Canned
Configuration
! Canned Config file for BTSRTR2
version 12.2
service timestamps debug uptime
service timestamps log uptime
no service password–encryption
hostname BTSRTR2
no logging console
ip subnet–zero
ip classless
ip pim bidir–enable
disable–eadi
memory–size iomem 25
redundancy
mode y–cable
standby use–interface Loopback101 health
standby use–interface Loopback102 revertive
standby use–interface Multilink1 backhaul
interface loopback 101
description BTSRTR health loopback
no ip address
interface loopback 102
description BTSRTR revertive loopback
no ip address
! configure 1 DS0 for BTSRTRLINK
controller T1 0/0
description 1st span on BTSRTR
framing esf
linecode b8zs
cablelength short 133
clock source line
channel–group 0 timeslots 1–24 speed 64
! MLPPP bundle with BTSRTRLINK.
! This performs IPCP with RPM when BTSRTR is rebooted
interface Multilink 1
ip address negotiated
no ip route–cache
no cdp enable
I-80
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Example BTS Router Canned Configuration Files
– continued
ppp multilink
multilink–group 1
no shutdown
! Setup Serial Interface for PPP and IPCP, no MLPPP at this time
interface Serial0/0:0
no ip address
encapsulation ppp
keepalive 1
ppp multilink
multilink–group 1
no shutdown
! Setup Ethernet Interfaces and HSRP between them
interface FastEthernet0/0
ip address 192.168.146.2 255.255.255.0
keepalive 1
speed 100
full–duplex
standby 1 timers 1 3
standby 1 preempt
standby 1 priority 100
standby 1 ip 192.168.146.3
standby 1 name one
standby 1 track Fa0/1 10
standby 1 track Multilink1 10
! Track the router health interface
standby 1 track Loopback101 10
! Track the router revertive (compensation) interface
standby 1 track Loopback102 5
no shutdown
interface FastEthernet0/1
ip address 192.168.147.2 255.255.255.0
keepalive 1
speed 100
full–duplex
standby 2 timers 1 3
standby 2 preempt
standby 2 priority 100
standby 2 ip 192.168.147.3
standby 2 name two
standby 2 track Fa0/0 10
standby 2 track Multilink1 10
! Track the router health interface
standby 2 track Loopback101 10
! Track the router revertive (compensation) interface
standby 2 track Loopback102 5
no shutdown
! Set a default route to RPM thru BTSRTRLINK
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-81
Example BTS Router Canned Configuration Files
– continued
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Multilink 1
line con 0
exec–timeout 15 0
password cisco
line aux 0
login
password cisco
line vty 0 4
login
password cisco
end
I-82
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
BTS Router CF Memory Card Removal and Replacement
BTS Router CF Memory Card
Removal and Installation
The following procedures cover removal and installation of the CF
memory card used to store the IOS and configuration data for the BTS
router.
Figure I-5: Router CF Memory Card Removal
CF Memory
Card Cover
Card Ejector
Lever
ACT
LED
PUSH IN
CF Memory
Card
ROTATE OUT
Captive
Screws
SC4812T0012
Tools Required
The following tool is required to perform procedures included in this
section:
S Number 2 cross–recess screwdriver
Removing a CF memory card – Refer to Figure I-5 and follow the
procedures in Table I-13 to remove the CF memory card from the BTS
router.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-83
BTS Router CF Memory Card Removal and Replacement
– continued
NOTE
The CF memory card may be removed and installed while
power is applied to the router.
Table I-13: Router Flash Memory Card Removal
Step
Action
Refer to MWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Hardware Installation Guide; part number
78–13982–01 for the latest information, cautions, and notes on BTS router CF memory card removal
and installation prior to proceeding with the following steps.
! CAUTION
Do not remove the CF memory card while there are read or write operations occurring on the card.
Removing the card during these operations will cause the router to shut down and damage the file
system.
If power is applied to the router, be sure there are no read or write operations in progress for the card
by verifying the ACT indicator LED is not lighted or lighting intermittently.
Using a cross–recess screwdriver, fully loosen the captive screws securing the flash memory card slot
cover to the router, and remove the cover.
Remove the CF memory card by performing the following:
4a
– Rotate the end of the card ejector lever until it is pointing out 90_ to the router front panel (see
Figure I-5).
4b
– Push the card ejector lever straight into the router to unseat the CF memory card.
4c
– Carefully pull the card out of the slot.
Place the CF memory card on an anti–static surface or in an anti–static container.
Installing a Flash Memory Card – Refer to Figure I-5 and follow the
procedures in Table I-13 to install the CF memory card in a BTS router
Table I-14: Router Flash Memory Card Installation
Step
Action
Refer to MWR1900 Wireless Mobile Edge Router Hardware Installation Guide; part number
78–13982–01 for the latest information, cautions, and notes on BTS router CF memory card removal
and installation prior to proceeding with the following steps.
If the flash memory slot cover is installed, use a cross–recess screwdriver to fully loosen the captive
screws securing the cover to the router, and remove the cover (see NO TAG).
Install the CF memory card by performing the following:
3a
– Hold the CF memory card with the label facing up and the connector end pointing toward the
router.
3b
– Carefully insert the connector end into the flash memory card slot.
. . . continued on next page
I-84
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
BTS Router CF Memory Card Removal and Replacement
– continued
Table I-14: Router Flash Memory Card Installation
Step
Action
3c
– Push the CF memory card into the slot to seat it in the slot connector.
–– The card ejector lever will extend out of the router as the card is seated.
3d
– Pull on the card ejector lever to fully extend it from the router, and rotate it to the left to its stowed
position to latch the card in the slot (see Figure I-5).
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
I-85
BTS Router CF Memory Card Removal and Replacement
– continued
Notes
I-86
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Appendix J: Chapter Title Goes Here
Appendix Content
THIS IS THE GENERAL APPENDIX TOC. USE THIS FOR ALL
APPENDICES EXCEPT APPENDIX A.
Guide Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
Document Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Is In This Guide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–2
1–2
Book Catalogs and Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Book Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–3
1–5
Physical Page Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page and Margin Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Text Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/A4 Page Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–6
1–6
1–7
1–9
Frame and Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frames With Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Charts and Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Types In This Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item/Description Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step/Check Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–13
1–14
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–15
Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–16
Map Title Goes Here lkjsfdg Sfdkgj Msfd N lkas K lkjsdfl kB lkj fgcb . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Label Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–17
1–17
1–17
1–18
1–19
Map Title Goes Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–22
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Table of Contents
– continued
Notes
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
MMI Cable Fabrication
Purpose
When the Motorola SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit is not available, a
cable can be fabricated by the user to interface a nine–pin serial
connector on an LMF computer platform with an MMI connector on
GLI cards and other Motorola BTS assemblies. This section provides
information necessary for fabricating this cable.
Required Parts
Table J-1: Parts Required to Fabricate MMI Cable
Item
Part Number
Qty
Description
Motorola 3009786R01
Ribbon cable assembly, 1.524 M, one 8–contact MMI
connector, one 10–contact connector
AMP 749814–1,
Belkin A4B202BGC,
or equivalent
Receptacle kit, unassembled, 9–position, socket contacts,
unshielded, metal or plastic shell, solder or crimp–type
contacts
Cable Details
Figure J-1 illustrates the details of the fabricated MMI cable.
Figure J-1: Fabricated MMI Cable Details
8–Contact MMI Plug
Socket Numbering
(Mating Side)
Item B
1 3 5 7
DB–9 Plug
Socket Numbering
(Mating Side)
4 3 2 1
2 4 6 8
8 7 6
Item A: Cable assembly 3009786R01 (with 10–contact plug removed)
FABRICATION NOTES:
1. Remove 10–contact connector from ribbon cable of cable assembly 3009786R01
2. Separate wires at unterminated end of ribbon cable as required to connect to DB–9
connector contacts
3. Dark wire on ribbon cable of cable assembly 3009786R01 connects to pin 1 of the
8–contact plug
4. Strip three ribbon cable wires with connections specified in Table J-2 and connect to
DB–9 plug contacts as specified in Table J-2
5. Shorten un–connected ribbon cable wires enough to prevent contacting DB–9
contacts, leaving enough wire to egage any strain relief in the DB–9 connector shell
MMIFAB001–0
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
J-1
MMI Cable Fabrication
– continued
Wire Run List
Table J-2 provides the wire run/pin–out information for the fabricated
MMI cable.
Table J-2: Fabricated MMI Cable Wire Run List
8–CONTACT MMI
PLUG CONTACT
DB–9 PLUG
CONTACT
–––––––––––––––––
–––––––––––––––––
–––––––––––––––––
No Connection (NC)
NC
NC
NC
NC
J-2
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
Index
This index supports 4 levels–
Level 1 through Level 4 in a
2–column format.
5/21/04
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
Index-1
Index
– continued
BBX
Adding, 3-48–3-50
Prerequisites, 3-48–3-50
Logical data, 4-79–4-81
Index-2
1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
DRAFT
5/21/04
*68P09260A64−B*
68P09260A64–B
Technical
Information
1X SC4812T–MC BTS
OPTIMIZATION/ATP
SOFTWARE RELEASE 2.16.4.X
800 MHZ & 1.9 GHZ
CDMA2000 1X
DRAFT
ENGLISH
5/21/04
68P09260A64–B
1X SC4812T–MC BTS OPTIMIZATION/ATP
SOFTWARE RELEASE 2.16.4.X
800 MHZ & 1.9 GHZ
CDMA2000 1X
DRAFT
ENGLISH
5/21/04
68P09260A64–B
Technical Information Products and Services
STANDARD MANUAL PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS
Filename:
Part Number: 68P09260A64–B
APC:
Title: 1X SC4812T–MC BTS Optimization/ATP
Volume 1
of 1
Print Vendor: eDOC
Date 5/21/04
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS – FOR REFERENCE–DO NOT MODIFY
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
TAB and SHEET SIZE/QUANTITY
PAPER:
1st. LEVEL TABS: 2nd. LEVEL TABS:
Body: 70 lb.
Inside Cover: 65 lb. Cougar
Tabs: 110 lb. Index
Binder Cover: Standard TED
cover – 10 pt. Carolina
Single Sided
5 Cuts
Clear Mylar
Pantone 2706–C
Black Ink
Single Sided
7 Cuts
Clear Mylar
White
Black Ink
FINISHING:
3–Ring Binder
Slant–D
3–Hole Punched
(5/16–in. dia.)
Shrink Wrap Body
Black ink for body, inside cover, and binder cover.
7X9
8.5x11
11x17
1st Level Tabs
Sheets = (Total Pages) / 2
2nd Level Tabs
NON–STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Tape Bound
Corner Stitch
Other: Meet with manager to determine the deliverable.
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
Map Title Goes Here
MMM YYYY
Manual Title
PRELIMINARY
-1
Map Title Goes Here
– continued
-2
Manual Title
PRELIMINARY
MMM YYYY
Map Title Goes Here
MMM YYYY
Manual Title
PRELIMINARY
-3
Map Title Goes Here
– continued
-4
Manual Title
PRELIMINARY
MMM YYYY
Using The Tabs
To use these tabs, simply cut or copy the tab catalog and paste in the chapter
book in the first postion (in front of the chaptoc document).
You will note that these are good for ten chapters. To build tabs for 11–20 or for
appendix A–J, open the catalogs for the proper tab position and edit the
microdocument for the proper number/letter. Number 11 or alpha A start in the
top tab_1 position.
-1
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
MANUAL TITLE
PART NUMBER
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGG
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
SC 9640 BTS Install/Opto/ATP/FRU xxxxxxxx
68P09248A54–D
*** DO NOT HAVE 3 OR MORE LINES OF TEXT ON A TAB ***
CUT 1 –
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
For 8.5x11, use all tabs.
For 7x9, use just cuts 1–4
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CLEAR MYLAR, COLOR–PANTONE 2706–C, INK–BLACK
CUT 2 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 3 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 4 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 5 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
MANUAL TITLE
PART NUMBER
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
GGGGGGGGGGGGGG
GGGGGGGGGGGGGG
SC 9640 BTS Install/Opto/ATP/FRU xxxxxxxx
68P09248A54–D
*** DO NOT HAVE 3 OR MORE LINES OF TEXT ON A TAB ***
For 8.5x11, use all tabs.
For 7x9, use just cuts 1–5
CUT 1 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 6 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 2 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 7 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 3 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 4 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CUT 5 –
IN FRONT OF CHAPTER
OR
AND
BETWEEN PAGES
CLEAR MYLAR, COLOR–WHITE, INK–BLACK
Product Information
Model Chart
Model Complement For Product A – Models X, Y, Z
Model
Description
Quantity
Options
Option Complement For Product A
Model
Description
Quantity
Specifications
General Specifications for Product A
Specification
Description
Receiver Specifications for Product A
Specification
Description
Transmitter Specifications for Product A
Specification
Manual Title
PRELIMINARY
Description
MMM YYYY
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
Notice
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting from any
inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this document has been
carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola,
Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the right to revise this document and to make
changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not
assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey
license under its patent rights or the rights of others.
It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and programs),
programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean
that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.
Copyrights
This instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe copyrighted
Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and
other countries preserve for Motorola and its licensors certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive
right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any
copyrighted material of Motorola and its licensors contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual
may not be copied, reproduced, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola.
Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or
otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a
product.
Usage and Disclosure Restrictions
License Agreement
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc and its licensors. It is furnished by express license
agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.
Copyrighted Materials
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or
documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or
computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.
High Risk Activities
Components, units, or third–party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault–tolerant and are NOT designed,
manufactured, or intended for use as on–line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail–safe
controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life
Support, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or implied
warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.
PRELIMINARY
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
Trademarks
MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent & Trademark Office. All other product or service names are
the property of their respective owners.
© Copyright 2002 Motorola, Inc.
Javat Technology and/or J2MEt: Java and all other Java–based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
UNIXR: UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
INSERT CONTRACTUAL LANGUAGE HERE
REV073102
PRELIMINARY

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Modify Date                     : 2004:06:01 10:20:24-05:00
Create Date                     : 2004:06:01 10:19:46-05:00
Title                           : Document1
Author                          : WLMV00
Creator                         : Document1 - Microsoft Word
Producer                        : Acrobat PDFWriter 4.05 for Windows NT
Page Count                      : 402
Mod Date                        : 2004:06:01 10:20:24-05:00
Creation Date                   : 2004:06:01 10:19:46-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2004:06:01 10:20:24-05:00